Sie sind auf Seite 1von 752

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System

V100R001C01

Commissioning and Configuration


Guide
Issue

02

Date

2012-12-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved.


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address:

Huawei Industrial Base


Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

support@huawei.com

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

About This Document

About This Document


Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name

Version

OptiX RTN 310

V100R001C01

iManager U2000

V100R008C00

Intended Audience
This document describes how to commission OptiX RTN 310, including preparations, site
commissioning, system commissioning, and network-wide service data configuration.
This document is intended for:
l

Installation and commissioning engineers

Data configuration engineers

System maintenance engineers

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol

Description
Alerts you to a high risk hazard that could, if
not avoided, result in serious injury or death.
Alerts you to a medium or low risk hazard that
could, if not avoided, result in moderate or
minor injury.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ii

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

About This Document

Symbol

Description
Alerts you to a potentially hazardous situation
that could, if not avoided, result in equipment
damage, data loss, performance deterioration,
or unanticipated results.
Provides a tip that may help you solve a
problem or save time.
Provides additional information to emphasize
or supplement important points in the main
text.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention

Description

Times New Roman

Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface

Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in


boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic

Book titles are in italics.

Courier New

Examples of information displayed on the screen are in


Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Convention

Description

Boldface

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic

Command arguments are in italics.

[]

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... }

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ]

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

About This Document

Convention

Description

{ x | y | ... }*

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles


are in boldface. For example, click OK.

>

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"


signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change History
Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue contains all the
changes made in earlier issues.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)
This issue is the second release for the product version V100R001C01.
Change

Description

8.7 Configuring Native Ethernet Services

Added end-to-end configuration examples.

Issue 01 (2012-10-30)
This issue is the first release for the product version V100R001C01.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iv

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Safety Precautions.........................................................................................................................1
1.1 General Safety Precautions.................................................................................................................................2
1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols.............................................................................................................................3
1.3 Electrical Safety..................................................................................................................................................4
1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas.........................................................................................................................5
1.5 Storage Batteries.................................................................................................................................................6
1.6 Radiation.............................................................................................................................................................7
1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers.....................................................................................................................8
1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure.........................................................................................................................8
1.6.3 Forbidden Areas........................................................................................................................................8
1.6.4 Laser..........................................................................................................................................................9
1.6.5 Microwave...............................................................................................................................................10
1.7 Working at Heights...........................................................................................................................................10
1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects...........................................................................................................................10
1.7.2 Using Ladders..........................................................................................................................................11
1.8 Mechanical Safety............................................................................................................................................13
1.9 Other Precautions.............................................................................................................................................14

2 Commissioning Preparations....................................................................................................16
2.1 Preparing Documents and Tools.......................................................................................................................17
2.2 Preparing a USB Flash Drive...........................................................................................................................18
2.3 Determining the Commissioning Method........................................................................................................18
2.4 Checking Commissioning Conditions..............................................................................................................19
2.4.1 Checking Site Commissioning Conditions..............................................................................................19
2.4.2 Checking System Commissioning Conditions........................................................................................19

3 Commissioning Process.............................................................................................................20
3.1 Site Commissioning Process............................................................................................................................21
3.2 System Commissioning Process.......................................................................................................................23

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to Configure Data).................................25


4.1 Powering on the Equipment.............................................................................................................................27
4.2 Loading Commissioning Data Using a USB Flash Drive................................................................................31
4.3 Connecting the Web LCT to the Equipment....................................................................................................34
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

4.4 Creating NEs Using the Search Method...........................................................................................................37


4.5 Synchronizing NE Time...................................................................................................................................38
4.6 Checking Alarms..............................................................................................................................................39
4.7 Aligning Antennas............................................................................................................................................40
4.7.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes......................................................................................................................40
4.7.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas.......................................................................................................43
4.7.3 Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas..........................................................................................................46
4.8 Checking the Microwave Link Status and Receive Power...............................................................................52

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)..........................................54


5.1 Powering on the Equipment.............................................................................................................................55
5.2 Connecting the Web LCT to the Equipment....................................................................................................59
5.3 Creating NEs Using the Search Method...........................................................................................................62
5.4 Configuring Site Commissioning Data.............................................................................................................63
5.4.1 Changing an NE ID.................................................................................................................................66
5.4.2 Setting NE Communication Parameters..................................................................................................66
5.4.3 Changing an NE Name............................................................................................................................67
5.4.4 Setting the VLAN ID and Bandwidth for an Inband DCN.....................................................................68
5.4.5 Setting OSPF Protocol Parameters..........................................................................................................69
5.4.6 Creating a LAG.......................................................................................................................................70
5.4.7 Creating a Microwave 1+1 Protection Group..........................................................................................73
5.4.8 Creating a PLA Group.............................................................................................................................74
5.4.9 Configuring a Single Hop of Microwave Link........................................................................................75
5.4.10 Synchronizing NE Time........................................................................................................................77
5.5 Checking Alarms..............................................................................................................................................78
5.6 Aligning Antennas............................................................................................................................................79
5.6.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes......................................................................................................................79
5.6.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas.......................................................................................................82
5.6.3 Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas..........................................................................................................85
5.7 Checking the Microwave Link Status and Receive Power...............................................................................91

6 System Commissioning..............................................................................................................93
6.1 Configuring Network-wide Service Data.........................................................................................................94
6.2 Testing Ethernet Services.................................................................................................................................94
6.2.1 Testing Ethernet Services Configured on a Per NE Basis.......................................................................94
6.2.2 Testing Ethernet Services Configured in End-to-End Mode...................................................................95
6.3 Testing AM Shifting.........................................................................................................................................97
6.4 Testing Protection Switching............................................................................................................................98
6.4.1 Testing ERPS Switching.........................................................................................................................98
6.4.2 Testing 1+1 Protection Switching.........................................................................................................101
6.4.3 Testing PLA Protection Switching........................................................................................................103
6.5 Checking the Clock Status..............................................................................................................................105
6.6 Testing the Fade Margin over a Microwave Link..........................................................................................105
6.7 Testing Ethernet Service Performance...........................................................................................................107
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vi

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

6.7.1 Testing the Latency, Throughput, and Packet Loss Ratio.....................................................................107


6.7.2 Testing the Long-term Packet Loss Ratio.............................................................................................110

7 Handling of Common Faults During Site Deployment....................................................113


7.1 When a USB Flash Drive Is Used for Loading Commissioning Data, Some Commands Fail to Be Loaded
..............................................................................................................................................................................114
7.2 The Receive Power Does not Meet the Design Requirements.......................................................................114

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data..............................................................................116


8.1 Configuration Preparations.............................................................................................................................118
8.1.1 Preparing Documents and Tools............................................................................................................118
8.1.2 Checking Configuration Conditions......................................................................................................118
8.2 U2000 Quick Start..........................................................................................................................................118
8.3 General Configuration Process.......................................................................................................................118
8.4 Common Configuration Scenarios of Microwave Transmission Networks...................................................120
8.4.1 Microwave Chain Network...................................................................................................................120
8.4.2 Microwave Ring Network.....................................................................................................................122
8.5 Configuring the Network Topology...............................................................................................................123
8.5.1 Basic Concepts......................................................................................................................................123
8.5.1.1 DCN..............................................................................................................................................123
8.5.1.2 Access Control..............................................................................................................................124
8.5.1.3 GNE and Non-GNE......................................................................................................................126
8.5.1.4 NE ID and NE IP Address............................................................................................................127
8.5.1.5 Fiber/Cable Types.........................................................................................................................127
8.5.1.6 Subnet...........................................................................................................................................128
8.5.2 Configuration Process (Network Topology).........................................................................................128
8.5.3 Configuration Example (Microwave Chain Network Topology)..........................................................135
8.5.3.1 Networking Diagram....................................................................................................................135
8.5.3.2 Service Planning...........................................................................................................................136
8.5.3.3 Configuration Procedure...............................................................................................................138
8.5.4 Configuration Example (Microwave Ring Network Topology)...........................................................140
8.5.4.1 Networking Diagram....................................................................................................................140
8.5.4.2 Service Planning...........................................................................................................................141
8.5.4.3 Configuration Procedure...............................................................................................................142
8.6 Configuring Microwave Links.......................................................................................................................145
8.6.1 Basic Concepts......................................................................................................................................145
8.6.1.1 Adaptive Modulation....................................................................................................................145
8.6.1.2 CCDP and XPIC...........................................................................................................................147
8.6.1.3 RF Configuration Modes..............................................................................................................148
8.6.1.4 PLA...............................................................................................................................................151
8.6.1.5 E-LAG..........................................................................................................................................152
8.6.1.6 Hop Management.........................................................................................................................154
8.6.2 Configuration Process (Microwave Links)............................................................................................155
8.6.3 Configuration Example (Microwave Links on a Microwave Chain Network).....................................162
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

8.6.3.1 Networking Diagram....................................................................................................................162


8.6.3.2 Service Planning...........................................................................................................................164
8.6.3.3 Configuration Procedure...............................................................................................................167
8.6.4 Configuration Example (Microwave Links on a Microwave Ring Network).......................................171
8.6.4.1 Networking Diagram....................................................................................................................171
8.6.4.2 Service Planning...........................................................................................................................172
8.6.4.3 Configuration Procedure...............................................................................................................174
8.7 Configuring Native Ethernet Services ...........................................................................................................176
8.7.1 Basic Concepts......................................................................................................................................176
8.7.1.1 Auto-negotiation...........................................................................................................................176
8.7.1.2 Flow Control Function..................................................................................................................177
8.7.1.3 Ethernet Port Description.............................................................................................................178
8.7.1.4 MAC Address Table Management...............................................................................................179
8.7.1.5 VLAN Forwarding Tables for E-Line Services............................................................................180
8.7.1.6 Split Horizon Groups....................................................................................................................181
8.7.1.7 Protection for Native Ethernet Services.......................................................................................181
8.7.2 Native Ethernet Service Types..............................................................................................................183
8.7.2.1 Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Service...........................................................183
8.7.2.2 VLAN-based E-Line Service........................................................................................................185
8.7.2.3 IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Services...............................................................................186
8.7.2.4 IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services...............................................................................187
8.7.3 Typical Mobile Bearer Network Topologies for Ethernet Services......................................................188
8.7.3.1 Networking of VLAN-based E-Line Services..............................................................................188
8.7.3.2 Networking of IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Services......................................................189
8.7.3.3 Networking of IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services......................................................190
8.7.3.4 Comparison Between the Three Networking Modes...................................................................191
8.7.4 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................194
8.7.4.1 Per-NE Configuration Process (Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Services)
..................................................................................................................................................................195
8.7.4.2 End-to-End Configuration Process (Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Services)
..................................................................................................................................................................201
8.7.4.3 Per-NE Configuration Process (VLAN-based E-Line Services)..................................................205
8.7.4.4 End-to-End Configuration Process (VLAN-based E-Line Services)...........................................213
8.7.4.5 Per-NE Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Services)...........................218
8.7.4.6 End-to-End Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Services)....................227
8.7.4.7 Per-NE Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services)...........................231
8.7.4.8 End-to-End Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services)....................240
8.7.5 Configuration Example (Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Services).........................245
8.7.5.1 Networking Diagram....................................................................................................................245
8.7.5.2 Service Planning (Port Information).............................................................................................246
8.7.5.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................246
8.7.5.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)...........................................................................................247
8.7.5.5 Service Planning (QoS)................................................................................................................247
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

viii

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

8.7.5.6 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection)...............................................................250


8.7.5.7 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Ports).......................................................................250
8.7.5.8 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (QoS).......................................................................................250
8.7.5.9 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Service Verification)...............................................253
8.7.5.10 End-to-End Configuration Procedure.........................................................................................254
8.7.6 Configuration Example (VLAN-based E-Line Service).......................................................................254
8.7.6.1 Networking Diagram....................................................................................................................255
8.7.6.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports).................................................................................................256
8.7.6.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................258
8.7.6.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)...........................................................................................258
8.7.6.5 Service Planning (QoS)................................................................................................................259
8.7.6.6 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection)...............................................................262
8.7.6.7 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Service Information)..............................................................262
8.7.6.8 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (QoS).......................................................................................266
8.7.6.9 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Service Verification)...............................................269
8.7.6.10 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection)......................................................272
8.7.6.11 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Service Information).....................................................272
8.7.6.12 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS)..............................................................................274
8.7.6.13 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Service Verification)......................................277
8.7.7 Configuration Example (IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service)................................................278
8.7.7.1 Networking Diagram....................................................................................................................278
8.7.7.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports).................................................................................................279
8.7.7.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................281
8.7.7.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)...........................................................................................282
8.7.7.5 Service Planning (QoS)................................................................................................................283
8.7.7.6 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection)...............................................................286
8.7.7.7 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Service Information)..............................................................286
8.7.7.8 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Ports).......................................................................288
8.7.7.9 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (QoS).......................................................................................289
8.7.7.10 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Service Verification).............................................292
8.7.7.11 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Service Information).....................................................294
8.7.7.12 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS)..............................................................................298
8.7.7.13 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations).................300
8.7.8 Configuration Example (IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service)................................................302
8.7.8.1 Networking Diagram....................................................................................................................302
8.7.8.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports).................................................................................................303
8.7.8.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................306
8.7.8.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)...........................................................................................306
8.7.8.5 Service Planning (QoS)................................................................................................................307
8.7.8.6 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection)...............................................................310
8.7.8.7 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Service Information)..............................................................310
8.7.8.8 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Ports).......................................................................313
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ix

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

8.7.8.9 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (QoS).......................................................................................315


8.7.8.10 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Service Verification).............................................317
8.7.8.11 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection)......................................................320
8.7.8.12 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Service Information).....................................................321
8.7.8.13 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS)..............................................................................323
8.7.8.14 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations).................326
8.8 Configuring Clocks.........................................................................................................................................327
8.8.1 Basic Concepts......................................................................................................................................327
8.8.1.1 Clock Source.................................................................................................................................327
8.8.1.2 Clock Protection Modes...............................................................................................................328
8.8.1.3 Clock Synchronization Policy......................................................................................................333
8.8.2 Configuration Process (Configuring a Clock).......................................................................................337
8.8.3 Configuration Example (Clock on a Microwave Chain Network)........................................................339
8.8.3.1 Networking Diagram....................................................................................................................339
8.8.3.2 Service Planning...........................................................................................................................340
8.8.3.3 Configuration Procedure...............................................................................................................341
8.8.4 Configuration Example (Clock on a Microwave Ring Network)..........................................................342
8.8.4.1 Networking Diagram....................................................................................................................343
8.8.4.2 Service Planning...........................................................................................................................343
8.8.4.3 Configuration Procedure...............................................................................................................344
8.9 Adding and Modifying Configuration Data...................................................................................................345
8.9.1 Common Task Collection (Network Topology)....................................................................................345
8.9.2 Common Task Collection (Microwave Links)......................................................................................346
8.9.3 Common Task Collection (Ethernet Services)......................................................................................348

A Task Collection.........................................................................................................................351
A.1 U2000 Quick Start.........................................................................................................................................352
A.1.1 Logging In to a U2000 Client...............................................................................................................352
A.1.2 Shutting Down a U2000 Client.............................................................................................................352
A.1.3 Using the Help......................................................................................................................................353
A.1.4 Navigating to Common Views.............................................................................................................354
A.1.4.1 Navigating to Main Topology.....................................................................................................354
A.1.4.2 Navigating to NE Explorer..........................................................................................................355
A.1.4.3 Navigating to the NE Panel.........................................................................................................356
A.2 Web LCT Quick Start....................................................................................................................................357
A.2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to the Equipment........................................................................................357
A.2.2 Using the Help......................................................................................................................................360
A.2.3 Navigating to NE Explorer...................................................................................................................361
A.3 Network Management...................................................................................................................................362
A.3.1 Managing NEs......................................................................................................................................362
A.3.1.1 Creating an NE by Using the Search Method..............................................................................362
A.3.1.2 Creating an NE Manually............................................................................................................364
A.3.1.3 Logging In to an NE....................................................................................................................365
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

A.3.1.4 Changing an NE ID.....................................................................................................................366


A.3.1.5 Changing an NE Name................................................................................................................367
A.3.1.6 Synchronizing the NE Time........................................................................................................368
A.3.1.7 Localizing the NE Time...............................................................................................................370
A.3.1.8 Configuring a Standard NTP Key................................................................................................371
A.3.2 Configuring NE Data............................................................................................................................372
A.3.2.1 Uploading NE Data......................................................................................................................373
A.3.2.2 Synchronizing NE Data...............................................................................................................374
A.3.3 Setting the Performance Monitoring Status for an NE.........................................................................375
A.3.4 Creating a Fiber/Cable..........................................................................................................................376
A.3.4.1 Creating a Fiber/Cable by Using the Search Method..................................................................376
A.3.4.2 Creating a Fiber/Cable Manually.................................................................................................377
A.3.4.3 Creating an Extended ECC Connection......................................................................................378
A.3.4.4 Creating a Back-to-back Radio Connection................................................................................379
A.3.5 Managing Subnets................................................................................................................................380
A.3.5.1 Creating a Subnet.........................................................................................................................380
A.3.5.2 Copying a Topology Object.........................................................................................................381
A.3.5.3 Moving a Topology Object..........................................................................................................382
A.3.6 Managing Communication...................................................................................................................383
A.3.6.1 Setting NE Communication Parameters......................................................................................383
A.3.6.2 Configuring DCCs.......................................................................................................................384
A.3.6.3 Setting the VLAN ID and Bandwidth for an Inband DCN.........................................................385
A.3.6.4 Configuring the Priorities of Inband DCN Packets.....................................................................386
A.3.6.5 Setting a Port for an Inband DCN................................................................................................387
A.3.6.6 Configuring Access Control........................................................................................................389
A.3.6.7 Configuring Extended ECCs.......................................................................................................390
A.3.6.8 Creating a Static IP Route............................................................................................................392
A.3.6.9 Setting OSPF Protocol Parameters..............................................................................................393
A.3.6.10 Creating an OSPF Area.............................................................................................................394
A.3.6.11 Configuring the Network Information of an ABR....................................................................395
A.3.6.12 Creating a Manual Route Aggregation Group...........................................................................397
A.3.6.13 Configuring Port IP Addresses for an ABR..............................................................................398
A.3.6.14 Configuring the OSPF Authentication Type.............................................................................399
A.3.6.15 Enabling the Proxy ARP............................................................................................................401
A.3.6.16 Querying ECC Routes...............................................................................................................402
A.3.6.17 Querying IP Routes....................................................................................................................403
A.3.6.18 Verifying Connectivity of an ECC Network.............................................................................404
A.3.6.19 Verifying Connectivity of an IP DCN Network........................................................................405
A.3.6.20 Setting SNMP Communication Parameters...............................................................................407
A.3.6.21 Configuring the Active and Standby Gateway NEs..................................................................408
A.3.7 Configuring the NMS Port on an NE...................................................................................................409
A.4 Security Management....................................................................................................................................410
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xi

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

A.4.1 Configuring an NE User.......................................................................................................................410


A.4.1.1 Creating an NE User....................................................................................................................410
A.4.1.2 Changing the Password of an NE User........................................................................................412
A.4.1.3 Setting the Warning Screen Parameters.......................................................................................412
A.4.1.4 Switching NE Users.....................................................................................................................413
A.4.2 Configuring Web LCT Access to an NE..............................................................................................414
A.4.3 Configuring an Access Control List for an NE....................................................................................415
A.4.3.1 Creating Basic ACL Rules...........................................................................................................415
A.4.3.2 Creating Advanced ACL Rules...................................................................................................416
A.4.4 Querying NE Operation Logs...............................................................................................................417
A.4.5 Querying Operation Logs Sent to Syslog Servers................................................................................418
A.4.6 Configuring Syslog...............................................................................................................................419
A.4.6.1 Enabling the Syslog Service........................................................................................................419
A.4.6.2 Setting Types and Severities of Logs to Be Sent to Syslog Servers............................................419
A.4.6.3 Configuring Syslog Servers.........................................................................................................420
A.4.6.4 Configuring Gateway NEs for Communication Between NEs and Syslog Servers....................421
A.4.7 Configuring File Transfer Protocols.....................................................................................................422
A.4.8 Configuring SSL Protocol Communication..........................................................................................423
A.4.8.1 Configuring SSL Protocol Communication Between a U2000 Server and Its Clients...............423
A.4.8.2 Configuring the Connection Mode Between the U2000 and Its Gateway NE............................424
A.4.9 Configuring RADIUS Authentication..................................................................................................425
A.4.9.1 Enabling/Disabling the RADIUS Authentication Function........................................................426
A.4.9.2 Creating a RADIUS Server or a RADIUS Proxy Server............................................................426
A.4.9.3 Configuring RADIUS Server Parameters....................................................................................428
A.5 Managing Microwave Links..........................................................................................................................430
A.5.1 Configuring a Single Hop of Microwave Link.....................................................................................430
A.5.2 Browsing the Performance of a Hop of Microwave Link....................................................................432
A.5.3 Creating a Microwave 1+1 Protection Group.......................................................................................433
A.5.4 Microwave 1+1 Protection Switching..................................................................................................435
A.5.5 Querying the Microwave 1+1 Protection Status...................................................................................436
A.5.6 Creating a PLA Group..........................................................................................................................436
A.5.7 Querying the Status of a PLA Group....................................................................................................438
A.5.8 Configuring Ethernet Frame Header Compression and Errored Frame Discarding Over Air Interfaces
........................................................................................................................................................................438
A.5.9 Enabling the Notification of Radio Bandwidth....................................................................................439
A.5.10 Setting the Maximum Transmit Power and the Power Thresholds....................................................440
A.5.11 Querying the AM Status.....................................................................................................................441
A.5.12 Querying ATPC Adjustment Records................................................................................................442
A.5.13 Querying Historical Transmit Power and Receive Power..................................................................443
A.5.14 Querying the SNR Value of a Microwave Link.................................................................................444
A.6 Managing Ports..............................................................................................................................................445
A.6.1 Setting Parameters for an Ethernet Port................................................................................................445
A.6.1.1 Setting the Basic Attributes for an Ethernet Port.........................................................................445
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xii

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

A.6.1.2 Configuring the Traffic Control Function for an Ethernet Port...................................................446


A.6.1.3 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes for an Ethernet Port.....................................................................447
A.6.1.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes for an Ethernet Port.................................................................449
A.6.1.5 Querying the Running Status of a Microwave Port.....................................................................450
A.6.2 Setting Parameters for a Microwave Port.............................................................................................451
A.6.2.1 Setting Basic Attributes for a Microwave Port............................................................................451
A.6.2.2 Setting Layer 2 Attributes for a Microwave Port........................................................................452
A.6.2.3 Setting Advanced Attributes for a Microwave Port....................................................................453
A.6.2.4 Querying the Running Status of an Ethernet Port.......................................................................454
A.7 Managing Ethernet Services and Features.....................................................................................................455
A.7.1 Managing ERPS....................................................................................................................................455
A.7.1.1 Creating an ERP Instance............................................................................................................455
A.7.1.2 Setting ERPS Protocol Parameters..............................................................................................457
A.7.1.3 Querying the ERPS Status...........................................................................................................458
A.7.2 Managing LAGs...................................................................................................................................458
A.7.2.1 Creating a LAG............................................................................................................................458
A.7.2.2 Setting Parameters for a LAG......................................................................................................461
A.7.2.3 Querying the Protocol Information About a LAG.......................................................................462
A.7.3 Configuring Ethernet Services..............................................................................................................463
A.7.3.1 Creating a Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Service.........................................463
A.7.3.2 Creating a VLAN-based E-Line Service.....................................................................................464
A.7.3.3 Creating an E-Line Service for Transmitting Layer 2 Protocol Packets.....................................465
A.7.3.4 Creating VLAN Forwarding Table Entries.................................................................................467
A.7.3.5 Creating an IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service............................................................468
A.7.3.6 Creating an IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service............................................................469
A.7.3.7 Creating an E-LAN Service for Transmitting Layer 2 Protocol Packets....................................470
A.7.3.8 Configuring a Split Horizon Group.............................................................................................472
A.7.3.9 Changing Logical Ports Mounted to a Bridge.............................................................................473
A.7.3.10 Deleting an E-Line Service........................................................................................................473
A.7.3.11 Deleting an E-LAN Service.......................................................................................................474
A.7.4 Managing MAC Address Tables..........................................................................................................475
A.7.4.1 Creating a Static MAC Address Entry.........................................................................................475
A.7.4.2 Creating a Blacklist MAC Address Entry...................................................................................476
A.7.4.3 Managing a Dynamic MAC Address Table................................................................................477
A.7.5 Setting the Mode for Processing an Unknown Frame of an E-LAN Service.......................................478
A.7.6 Managing QoS......................................................................................................................................479
A.7.6.1 Modifying the Mapping for a DS Domain..................................................................................479
A.7.6.2 Changing the Packet Type Trusted by a Port..............................................................................481
A.7.6.3 Configuring Port Shaping............................................................................................................482
A.7.6.4 Setting Egress Queue Scheduling Policies..................................................................................483
A.7.6.5 Setting Traffic Shaping for Egress Queues.................................................................................484
A.7.6.6 Setting the Congestion Management Mode for Egress Queues..................................................485
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xiii

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

A.7.7 Using Ethernet Service OAM...............................................................................................................487


A.7.7.1 Creating an MD...........................................................................................................................487
A.7.7.2 Creating an MA...........................................................................................................................488
A.7.7.3 Creating an MEP..........................................................................................................................489
A.7.7.4 Creating a Remote MEP in an MA..............................................................................................490
A.7.7.5 Creating an MIP...........................................................................................................................491
A.7.7.6 Performing a CC Test..................................................................................................................492
A.7.7.7 Performing an LB Test................................................................................................................493
A.7.7.8 Performing an LT Test.................................................................................................................495
A.7.7.9 Activating the AIS.......................................................................................................................496
A.7.7.10 Monitoring Packet Loss Ratio, Delay, or Delay Variation of Ethernet Services......................497
A.7.7.11 Performing E-LAN Service Loopback Detection......................................................................499
A.7.7.12 Reactivating an E-LAN Service................................................................................................500
A.7.8 Using Ethernet Port OAM....................................................................................................................501
A.7.8.1 Enabling OAM Auto-discovery...................................................................................................501
A.7.8.2 Enabling the Link Event Notification..........................................................................................502
A.7.8.3 Changing the OAM Errored Frame Monitoring Threshold.........................................................503
A.7.8.4 Performing a Remote Loopback..................................................................................................504
A.7.8.5 Enabling Self-loop Detection......................................................................................................506
A.7.9 Configuring LPT...................................................................................................................................507
A.8 Managing Clocks...........................................................................................................................................508
A.8.1 Managing Clocks at the Physical Layer...............................................................................................508
A.8.1.1 Changing the Clock Control Mode..............................................................................................508
A.8.1.2 Configuring Clock Sources..........................................................................................................509
A.8.1.3 Configuring Protection for Clock Sources..................................................................................510
A.8.1.4 Customizing the Clock Quality...................................................................................................512
A.8.1.5 Enabling/Disabling SSM Transmission.......................................................................................513
A.8.1.6 Enabling/Disabling the Output of Clock Source IDs..................................................................514
A.8.1.7 Modifying Clock Source Reversion Parameters..........................................................................514
A.8.1.8 Querying the Clock Synchronization Status................................................................................515
A.8.2 Managing the IEEE 1588v2 Clock.......................................................................................................516
A.8.2.1 Enabling/Disabling the IEEE-1588 Timeslot for a Microwave Port...........................................516
A.8.2.2 Querying or Modifying the PTP System Time............................................................................517
A.8.2.3 Setting the PTP NE Attributes.....................................................................................................518
A.8.2.4 Creating a PTP Clock Port...........................................................................................................519
A.8.2.5 Setting PTP Clock Port Attributes...............................................................................................520
A.8.2.6 Setting Parameters for IEEE 1588v2 Clock Packets...................................................................522
A.8.2.7 Configuring the Delay Offset for Asymmetric Transmission Between NEs...............................524
A.8.2.8 Configuring the Cascade Fiber Length for a 1+1 Protection Group...........................................525
A.8.2.9 Configuring a PTP Clock Subnet................................................................................................526
A.8.2.10 Modifying the BMC Algorithm Parameters for an NE Clock...................................................527
A.9 Using RMON.................................................................................................................................................528
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xiv

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

A.9.1 Browsing Current Performance Events of Ethernet.............................................................................528


A.9.2 Setting the Ethernet Performance Threshold-Crossing Parameter.......................................................529
A.9.3 Configuring the Parameters for Ethernet Historical Performance Monitoring.....................................530
A.9.4 Browsing Ethernet Historical Performance Data..................................................................................531
A.10 Configuring a Native Ethernet Service (in End-to-End Mode)...................................................................532
A.10.1 Searching for Native Ethernet Services..............................................................................................532
A.10.2 Creating a Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Service................................................533
A.10.3 Creating a VLAN-based E-Line Service............................................................................................534
A.10.4 Creating an IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service...................................................................535
A.10.5 Creating an IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service...................................................................537
A.10.6 Verifying a Native Ethernet Service...................................................................................................539
A.10.7 Managing Native Ethernet Services...................................................................................................541
A.10.8 Managing Discrete Native Ethernet Services ....................................................................................542
A.10.9 Adjusting an E-LAN Service Network...............................................................................................543
A.11 Verifying Services and Features..................................................................................................................544
A.11.1 Testing Ethernet Services...................................................................................................................544
A.11.1.1 Testing Ethernet Services Configured on a Per NE Basis.........................................................544
A.11.1.2 Testing Ethernet Services Configured in End-to-End Mode.....................................................546
A.11.2 Testing AM Shifting...........................................................................................................................547
A.11.3 Testing Protection Switching..............................................................................................................548
A.11.3.1 Testing ERPS Switching............................................................................................................548
A.11.3.2 Testing 1+1 Protection Switching.............................................................................................551
A.11.3.3 Testing PLA Protection Switching............................................................................................553

B Parameters Description............................................................................................................556
B.1 Parameters for Network Management...........................................................................................................557
B.1.1 Parameters for NE Management...........................................................................................................557
B.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching.........................................................................................557
B.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation...........................................................................................560
B.1.1.3 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization (U2000).......................................................562
B.1.1.4 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management...........................................................565
B.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time............................................566
B.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management.....................................................................................567
B.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting..................................................567
B.1.2.2 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC..................................569
B.1.2.3 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management...................................................................570
B.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Link Management_Availability Test............................................571
B.1.2.5 Parameter Description: Access Control.......................................................................................572
B.1.2.6 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration........................................574
B.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management........................575
B.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_Availability Test.................................576
B.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings...................577
B.1.2.10 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP.............................................................582
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xv

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

B.1.2.11 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas.................................................583


B.1.2.12 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding OSPF Areas..............584
B.1.2.13 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding Routes to Be Manually
Aggregated................................................................................................................................................586
B.1.2.14 Parameter Description: Port OSPF Setting................................................................................586
B.1.2.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management......................................586
B.1.2.16 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting..........................................................587
B.1.2.17 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control.....................................................588
B.1.2.18 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Packet Control.....................................................589
B.1.2.19 Parameter Description: SNMP Communications Parameters Setting.......................................590
B.1.3 Parameters for RADIUS.......................................................................................................................590
B.1.3.1 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_Creation.........................................................591
B.1.3.2 Parameter Description: Enabling/Disabling the RADIUS Function...........................................592
B.2 Radio Link Parameters...................................................................................................................................592
B.2.1 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection Group.................................................................................592
B.2.2 Parameter Description: PLA Group Creation.......................................................................................596
B.2.3 Parameters Description: Radio Link Configuration.............................................................................597
B.3 Parameters for Board Interfaces.....................................................................................................................603
B.3.1 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards........................................................................................603
B.3.1.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes.......................................................603
B.3.1.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control...........................................................606
B.3.1.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes....................................................608
B.3.1.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes................................................610
B.3.2 Microwave Interface Parameters..........................................................................................................613
B.3.2.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes..................................................613
B.3.2.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes...............................................614
B.3.2.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes...........................................615
B.4 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features...............................................................................617
B.4.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services..........................................................................................................617
B.4.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service........................................................................................617
B.4.1.2 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service.......................................................................................622
B.4.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols........................................................................................................633
B.4.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management................................................................................633
B.4.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management...............................................639
B.4.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation......................................646
B.4.2.4 Parameter Description: Simplified LPT Creation........................................................................647
B.4.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM........................................................................................................648
B.4.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation
..................................................................................................................................................................648
B.4.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation
..................................................................................................................................................................649
B.4.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation............................650
B.4.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation..............651
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xvi

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

B.4.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation.............................652


B.4.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling..............................653
B.4.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling...............................654
B.4.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling Service Loopback Detection............655
B.4.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter..............................656
B.4.3.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring
..................................................................................................................................................................658
B.4.4 Parameter Description: QoS Management............................................................................................660
B.5 RMON Parameters.........................................................................................................................................668
B.5.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group............................................................668
B.5.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group..............................................................669
B.5.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting.............................................................670
B.6 Clock Parameters...........................................................................................................................................671
B.6.1 Physical-Layer Clock Parameters.........................................................................................................671
B.6.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status................................................................672
B.6.1.2 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table...................................................................673
B.6.1.3 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching................................674
B.6.1.4 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters...........675
B.6.1.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet......................................................677
B.6.1.6 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality.....................................................680
B.6.1.7 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control...........................................683
B.6.1.8 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status...................................684
B.7 PTP Clock Parameters...................................................................................................................................685
B.7.1 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Attribute....................................................................685
B.7.2 Parameter Description: Setting of a PTP Clock Subnet_Clock Subnet................................................696
B.7.3 Parameter Description: Setting of a PTP Clock Subnet_Port_BMC....................................................696

C Glossary......................................................................................................................................699

Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Safety Precautions.........................................................................................................................1
1.1 General Safety Precautions.................................................................................................................................2
1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols.............................................................................................................................3
1.3 Electrical Safety..................................................................................................................................................4
1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas.........................................................................................................................5
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xvii

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

1.5 Storage Batteries.................................................................................................................................................6


1.6 Radiation.............................................................................................................................................................7
1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers.....................................................................................................................8
1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure.........................................................................................................................8
1.6.3 Forbidden Areas........................................................................................................................................8
1.6.4 Laser..........................................................................................................................................................9
1.6.5 Microwave...............................................................................................................................................10
1.7 Working at Heights...........................................................................................................................................10
1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects...........................................................................................................................10
1.7.2 Using Ladders..........................................................................................................................................11
1.8 Mechanical Safety............................................................................................................................................13
1.9 Other Precautions.............................................................................................................................................14

2 Commissioning Preparations....................................................................................................16
2.1 Preparing Documents and Tools.......................................................................................................................17
2.2 Preparing a USB Flash Drive...........................................................................................................................18
2.3 Determining the Commissioning Method........................................................................................................18
2.4 Checking Commissioning Conditions..............................................................................................................19
2.4.1 Checking Site Commissioning Conditions..............................................................................................19
2.4.2 Checking System Commissioning Conditions........................................................................................19

3 Commissioning Process.............................................................................................................20
3.1 Site Commissioning Process............................................................................................................................21
3.2 System Commissioning Process.......................................................................................................................23

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to Configure Data).................................25


4.1 Powering on the Equipment.............................................................................................................................27
4.2 Loading Commissioning Data Using a USB Flash Drive................................................................................31
4.3 Connecting the Web LCT to the Equipment....................................................................................................34
4.4 Creating NEs Using the Search Method...........................................................................................................37
4.5 Synchronizing NE Time...................................................................................................................................38
4.6 Checking Alarms..............................................................................................................................................39
4.7 Aligning Antennas............................................................................................................................................40
4.7.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes......................................................................................................................40
4.7.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas.......................................................................................................43
4.7.3 Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas..........................................................................................................46
4.8 Checking the Microwave Link Status and Receive Power...............................................................................52

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)..........................................54


5.1 Powering on the Equipment.............................................................................................................................55
5.2 Connecting the Web LCT to the Equipment....................................................................................................59
5.3 Creating NEs Using the Search Method...........................................................................................................62
5.4 Configuring Site Commissioning Data.............................................................................................................63
5.4.1 Changing an NE ID.................................................................................................................................66
5.4.2 Setting NE Communication Parameters..................................................................................................66
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xviii

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

5.4.3 Changing an NE Name............................................................................................................................67


5.4.4 Setting the VLAN ID and Bandwidth for an Inband DCN.....................................................................68
5.4.5 Setting OSPF Protocol Parameters..........................................................................................................69
5.4.6 Creating a LAG.......................................................................................................................................70
5.4.7 Creating a Microwave 1+1 Protection Group..........................................................................................73
5.4.8 Creating a PLA Group.............................................................................................................................74
5.4.9 Configuring a Single Hop of Microwave Link........................................................................................75
5.4.10 Synchronizing NE Time........................................................................................................................77
5.5 Checking Alarms..............................................................................................................................................78
5.6 Aligning Antennas............................................................................................................................................79
5.6.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes......................................................................................................................79
5.6.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas.......................................................................................................82
5.6.3 Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas..........................................................................................................85
5.7 Checking the Microwave Link Status and Receive Power...............................................................................91

6 System Commissioning..............................................................................................................93
6.1 Configuring Network-wide Service Data.........................................................................................................94
6.2 Testing Ethernet Services.................................................................................................................................94
6.2.1 Testing Ethernet Services Configured on a Per NE Basis.......................................................................94
6.2.2 Testing Ethernet Services Configured in End-to-End Mode...................................................................95
6.3 Testing AM Shifting.........................................................................................................................................97
6.4 Testing Protection Switching............................................................................................................................98
6.4.1 Testing ERPS Switching.........................................................................................................................98
6.4.2 Testing 1+1 Protection Switching.........................................................................................................101
6.4.3 Testing PLA Protection Switching........................................................................................................103
6.5 Checking the Clock Status..............................................................................................................................105
6.6 Testing the Fade Margin over a Microwave Link..........................................................................................105
6.7 Testing Ethernet Service Performance...........................................................................................................107
6.7.1 Testing the Latency, Throughput, and Packet Loss Ratio.....................................................................107
6.7.2 Testing the Long-term Packet Loss Ratio.............................................................................................110

7 Handling of Common Faults During Site Deployment....................................................113


7.1 When a USB Flash Drive Is Used for Loading Commissioning Data, Some Commands Fail to Be Loaded
..............................................................................................................................................................................114
7.2 The Receive Power Does not Meet the Design Requirements.......................................................................114

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data..............................................................................116


8.1 Configuration Preparations.............................................................................................................................118
8.1.1 Preparing Documents and Tools............................................................................................................118
8.1.2 Checking Configuration Conditions......................................................................................................118
8.2 U2000 Quick Start..........................................................................................................................................118
8.3 General Configuration Process.......................................................................................................................118
8.4 Common Configuration Scenarios of Microwave Transmission Networks...................................................120
8.4.1 Microwave Chain Network...................................................................................................................120
8.4.2 Microwave Ring Network.....................................................................................................................122
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xix

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

8.5 Configuring the Network Topology...............................................................................................................123


8.5.1 Basic Concepts......................................................................................................................................123
8.5.1.1 DCN..............................................................................................................................................123
8.5.1.2 Access Control..............................................................................................................................124
8.5.1.3 GNE and Non-GNE......................................................................................................................126
8.5.1.4 NE ID and NE IP Address............................................................................................................127
8.5.1.5 Fiber/Cable Types.........................................................................................................................127
8.5.1.6 Subnet...........................................................................................................................................128
8.5.2 Configuration Process (Network Topology).........................................................................................128
8.5.3 Configuration Example (Microwave Chain Network Topology)..........................................................135
8.5.3.1 Networking Diagram....................................................................................................................135
8.5.3.2 Service Planning...........................................................................................................................136
8.5.3.3 Configuration Procedure...............................................................................................................138
8.5.4 Configuration Example (Microwave Ring Network Topology)...........................................................140
8.5.4.1 Networking Diagram....................................................................................................................140
8.5.4.2 Service Planning...........................................................................................................................141
8.5.4.3 Configuration Procedure...............................................................................................................142
8.6 Configuring Microwave Links.......................................................................................................................145
8.6.1 Basic Concepts......................................................................................................................................145
8.6.1.1 Adaptive Modulation....................................................................................................................145
8.6.1.2 CCDP and XPIC...........................................................................................................................147
8.6.1.3 RF Configuration Modes..............................................................................................................148
8.6.1.4 PLA...............................................................................................................................................151
8.6.1.5 E-LAG..........................................................................................................................................152
8.6.1.6 Hop Management.........................................................................................................................154
8.6.2 Configuration Process (Microwave Links)............................................................................................155
8.6.3 Configuration Example (Microwave Links on a Microwave Chain Network).....................................162
8.6.3.1 Networking Diagram....................................................................................................................162
8.6.3.2 Service Planning...........................................................................................................................164
8.6.3.3 Configuration Procedure...............................................................................................................167
8.6.4 Configuration Example (Microwave Links on a Microwave Ring Network).......................................171
8.6.4.1 Networking Diagram....................................................................................................................171
8.6.4.2 Service Planning...........................................................................................................................172
8.6.4.3 Configuration Procedure...............................................................................................................174
8.7 Configuring Native Ethernet Services ...........................................................................................................176
8.7.1 Basic Concepts......................................................................................................................................176
8.7.1.1 Auto-negotiation...........................................................................................................................176
8.7.1.2 Flow Control Function..................................................................................................................177
8.7.1.3 Ethernet Port Description.............................................................................................................178
8.7.1.4 MAC Address Table Management...............................................................................................179
8.7.1.5 VLAN Forwarding Tables for E-Line Services............................................................................180
8.7.1.6 Split Horizon Groups....................................................................................................................181
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xx

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

8.7.1.7 Protection for Native Ethernet Services.......................................................................................181


8.7.2 Native Ethernet Service Types..............................................................................................................183
8.7.2.1 Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Service...........................................................183
8.7.2.2 VLAN-based E-Line Service........................................................................................................185
8.7.2.3 IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Services...............................................................................186
8.7.2.4 IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services...............................................................................187
8.7.3 Typical Mobile Bearer Network Topologies for Ethernet Services......................................................188
8.7.3.1 Networking of VLAN-based E-Line Services..............................................................................188
8.7.3.2 Networking of IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Services......................................................189
8.7.3.3 Networking of IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services......................................................190
8.7.3.4 Comparison Between the Three Networking Modes...................................................................191
8.7.4 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................194
8.7.4.1 Per-NE Configuration Process (Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Services)
..................................................................................................................................................................195
8.7.4.2 End-to-End Configuration Process (Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Services)
..................................................................................................................................................................201
8.7.4.3 Per-NE Configuration Process (VLAN-based E-Line Services)..................................................205
8.7.4.4 End-to-End Configuration Process (VLAN-based E-Line Services)...........................................213
8.7.4.5 Per-NE Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Services)...........................218
8.7.4.6 End-to-End Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Services)....................227
8.7.4.7 Per-NE Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services)...........................231
8.7.4.8 End-to-End Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services)....................240
8.7.5 Configuration Example (Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Services).........................245
8.7.5.1 Networking Diagram....................................................................................................................245
8.7.5.2 Service Planning (Port Information).............................................................................................246
8.7.5.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................246
8.7.5.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)...........................................................................................247
8.7.5.5 Service Planning (QoS)................................................................................................................247
8.7.5.6 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection)...............................................................250
8.7.5.7 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Ports).......................................................................250
8.7.5.8 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (QoS).......................................................................................250
8.7.5.9 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Service Verification)...............................................253
8.7.5.10 End-to-End Configuration Procedure.........................................................................................254
8.7.6 Configuration Example (VLAN-based E-Line Service).......................................................................254
8.7.6.1 Networking Diagram....................................................................................................................255
8.7.6.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports).................................................................................................256
8.7.6.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................258
8.7.6.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)...........................................................................................258
8.7.6.5 Service Planning (QoS)................................................................................................................259
8.7.6.6 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection)...............................................................262
8.7.6.7 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Service Information)..............................................................262
8.7.6.8 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (QoS).......................................................................................266
8.7.6.9 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Service Verification)...............................................269
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxi

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

8.7.6.10 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection)......................................................272


8.7.6.11 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Service Information).....................................................272
8.7.6.12 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS)..............................................................................274
8.7.6.13 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Service Verification)......................................277
8.7.7 Configuration Example (IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service)................................................278
8.7.7.1 Networking Diagram....................................................................................................................278
8.7.7.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports).................................................................................................279
8.7.7.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................281
8.7.7.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)...........................................................................................282
8.7.7.5 Service Planning (QoS)................................................................................................................283
8.7.7.6 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection)...............................................................286
8.7.7.7 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Service Information)..............................................................286
8.7.7.8 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Ports).......................................................................288
8.7.7.9 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (QoS).......................................................................................289
8.7.7.10 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Service Verification).............................................292
8.7.7.11 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Service Information).....................................................294
8.7.7.12 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS)..............................................................................298
8.7.7.13 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations).................300
8.7.8 Configuration Example (IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service)................................................302
8.7.8.1 Networking Diagram....................................................................................................................302
8.7.8.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports).................................................................................................303
8.7.8.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................306
8.7.8.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)...........................................................................................306
8.7.8.5 Service Planning (QoS)................................................................................................................307
8.7.8.6 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection)...............................................................310
8.7.8.7 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Service Information)..............................................................310
8.7.8.8 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Ports).......................................................................313
8.7.8.9 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (QoS).......................................................................................315
8.7.8.10 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Service Verification).............................................317
8.7.8.11 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection)......................................................320
8.7.8.12 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Service Information).....................................................321
8.7.8.13 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS)..............................................................................323
8.7.8.14 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations).................326
8.8 Configuring Clocks.........................................................................................................................................327
8.8.1 Basic Concepts......................................................................................................................................327
8.8.1.1 Clock Source.................................................................................................................................327
8.8.1.2 Clock Protection Modes...............................................................................................................328
8.8.1.3 Clock Synchronization Policy......................................................................................................333
8.8.2 Configuration Process (Configuring a Clock).......................................................................................337
8.8.3 Configuration Example (Clock on a Microwave Chain Network)........................................................339
8.8.3.1 Networking Diagram....................................................................................................................339
8.8.3.2 Service Planning...........................................................................................................................340
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxii

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

8.8.3.3 Configuration Procedure...............................................................................................................341


8.8.4 Configuration Example (Clock on a Microwave Ring Network)..........................................................342
8.8.4.1 Networking Diagram....................................................................................................................343
8.8.4.2 Service Planning...........................................................................................................................343
8.8.4.3 Configuration Procedure...............................................................................................................344
8.9 Adding and Modifying Configuration Data...................................................................................................345
8.9.1 Common Task Collection (Network Topology)....................................................................................345
8.9.2 Common Task Collection (Microwave Links)......................................................................................346
8.9.3 Common Task Collection (Ethernet Services)......................................................................................348

A Task Collection.........................................................................................................................351
A.1 U2000 Quick Start.........................................................................................................................................352
A.1.1 Logging In to a U2000 Client...............................................................................................................352
A.1.2 Shutting Down a U2000 Client.............................................................................................................352
A.1.3 Using the Help......................................................................................................................................353
A.1.4 Navigating to Common Views.............................................................................................................354
A.1.4.1 Navigating to Main Topology.....................................................................................................354
A.1.4.2 Navigating to NE Explorer..........................................................................................................355
A.1.4.3 Navigating to the NE Panel.........................................................................................................356
A.2 Web LCT Quick Start....................................................................................................................................357
A.2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to the Equipment........................................................................................357
A.2.2 Using the Help......................................................................................................................................360
A.2.3 Navigating to NE Explorer...................................................................................................................361
A.3 Network Management...................................................................................................................................362
A.3.1 Managing NEs......................................................................................................................................362
A.3.1.1 Creating an NE by Using the Search Method..............................................................................362
A.3.1.2 Creating an NE Manually............................................................................................................364
A.3.1.3 Logging In to an NE....................................................................................................................365
A.3.1.4 Changing an NE ID.....................................................................................................................366
A.3.1.5 Changing an NE Name................................................................................................................367
A.3.1.6 Synchronizing the NE Time........................................................................................................368
A.3.1.7 Localizing the NE Time...............................................................................................................370
A.3.1.8 Configuring a Standard NTP Key................................................................................................371
A.3.2 Configuring NE Data............................................................................................................................372
A.3.2.1 Uploading NE Data......................................................................................................................373
A.3.2.2 Synchronizing NE Data...............................................................................................................374
A.3.3 Setting the Performance Monitoring Status for an NE.........................................................................375
A.3.4 Creating a Fiber/Cable..........................................................................................................................376
A.3.4.1 Creating a Fiber/Cable by Using the Search Method..................................................................376
A.3.4.2 Creating a Fiber/Cable Manually.................................................................................................377
A.3.4.3 Creating an Extended ECC Connection......................................................................................378
A.3.4.4 Creating a Back-to-back Radio Connection................................................................................379
A.3.5 Managing Subnets................................................................................................................................380
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxiii

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

A.3.5.1 Creating a Subnet.........................................................................................................................380


A.3.5.2 Copying a Topology Object.........................................................................................................381
A.3.5.3 Moving a Topology Object..........................................................................................................382
A.3.6 Managing Communication...................................................................................................................383
A.3.6.1 Setting NE Communication Parameters......................................................................................383
A.3.6.2 Configuring DCCs.......................................................................................................................384
A.3.6.3 Setting the VLAN ID and Bandwidth for an Inband DCN.........................................................385
A.3.6.4 Configuring the Priorities of Inband DCN Packets.....................................................................386
A.3.6.5 Setting a Port for an Inband DCN................................................................................................387
A.3.6.6 Configuring Access Control........................................................................................................389
A.3.6.7 Configuring Extended ECCs.......................................................................................................390
A.3.6.8 Creating a Static IP Route............................................................................................................392
A.3.6.9 Setting OSPF Protocol Parameters..............................................................................................393
A.3.6.10 Creating an OSPF Area.............................................................................................................394
A.3.6.11 Configuring the Network Information of an ABR....................................................................395
A.3.6.12 Creating a Manual Route Aggregation Group...........................................................................397
A.3.6.13 Configuring Port IP Addresses for an ABR..............................................................................398
A.3.6.14 Configuring the OSPF Authentication Type.............................................................................399
A.3.6.15 Enabling the Proxy ARP............................................................................................................401
A.3.6.16 Querying ECC Routes...............................................................................................................402
A.3.6.17 Querying IP Routes....................................................................................................................403
A.3.6.18 Verifying Connectivity of an ECC Network.............................................................................404
A.3.6.19 Verifying Connectivity of an IP DCN Network........................................................................405
A.3.6.20 Setting SNMP Communication Parameters...............................................................................407
A.3.6.21 Configuring the Active and Standby Gateway NEs..................................................................408
A.3.7 Configuring the NMS Port on an NE...................................................................................................409
A.4 Security Management....................................................................................................................................410
A.4.1 Configuring an NE User.......................................................................................................................410
A.4.1.1 Creating an NE User....................................................................................................................410
A.4.1.2 Changing the Password of an NE User........................................................................................412
A.4.1.3 Setting the Warning Screen Parameters.......................................................................................412
A.4.1.4 Switching NE Users.....................................................................................................................413
A.4.2 Configuring Web LCT Access to an NE..............................................................................................414
A.4.3 Configuring an Access Control List for an NE....................................................................................415
A.4.3.1 Creating Basic ACL Rules...........................................................................................................415
A.4.3.2 Creating Advanced ACL Rules...................................................................................................416
A.4.4 Querying NE Operation Logs...............................................................................................................417
A.4.5 Querying Operation Logs Sent to Syslog Servers................................................................................418
A.4.6 Configuring Syslog...............................................................................................................................419
A.4.6.1 Enabling the Syslog Service........................................................................................................419
A.4.6.2 Setting Types and Severities of Logs to Be Sent to Syslog Servers............................................419
A.4.6.3 Configuring Syslog Servers.........................................................................................................420
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxiv

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

A.4.6.4 Configuring Gateway NEs for Communication Between NEs and Syslog Servers....................421
A.4.7 Configuring File Transfer Protocols.....................................................................................................422
A.4.8 Configuring SSL Protocol Communication..........................................................................................423
A.4.8.1 Configuring SSL Protocol Communication Between a U2000 Server and Its Clients...............423
A.4.8.2 Configuring the Connection Mode Between the U2000 and Its Gateway NE............................424
A.4.9 Configuring RADIUS Authentication..................................................................................................425
A.4.9.1 Enabling/Disabling the RADIUS Authentication Function........................................................426
A.4.9.2 Creating a RADIUS Server or a RADIUS Proxy Server............................................................426
A.4.9.3 Configuring RADIUS Server Parameters....................................................................................428
A.5 Managing Microwave Links..........................................................................................................................430
A.5.1 Configuring a Single Hop of Microwave Link.....................................................................................430
A.5.2 Browsing the Performance of a Hop of Microwave Link....................................................................432
A.5.3 Creating a Microwave 1+1 Protection Group.......................................................................................433
A.5.4 Microwave 1+1 Protection Switching..................................................................................................435
A.5.5 Querying the Microwave 1+1 Protection Status...................................................................................436
A.5.6 Creating a PLA Group..........................................................................................................................436
A.5.7 Querying the Status of a PLA Group....................................................................................................438
A.5.8 Configuring Ethernet Frame Header Compression and Errored Frame Discarding Over Air Interfaces
........................................................................................................................................................................438
A.5.9 Enabling the Notification of Radio Bandwidth....................................................................................439
A.5.10 Setting the Maximum Transmit Power and the Power Thresholds....................................................440
A.5.11 Querying the AM Status.....................................................................................................................441
A.5.12 Querying ATPC Adjustment Records................................................................................................442
A.5.13 Querying Historical Transmit Power and Receive Power..................................................................443
A.5.14 Querying the SNR Value of a Microwave Link.................................................................................444
A.6 Managing Ports..............................................................................................................................................445
A.6.1 Setting Parameters for an Ethernet Port................................................................................................445
A.6.1.1 Setting the Basic Attributes for an Ethernet Port.........................................................................445
A.6.1.2 Configuring the Traffic Control Function for an Ethernet Port...................................................446
A.6.1.3 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes for an Ethernet Port.....................................................................447
A.6.1.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes for an Ethernet Port.................................................................449
A.6.1.5 Querying the Running Status of a Microwave Port.....................................................................450
A.6.2 Setting Parameters for a Microwave Port.............................................................................................451
A.6.2.1 Setting Basic Attributes for a Microwave Port............................................................................451
A.6.2.2 Setting Layer 2 Attributes for a Microwave Port........................................................................452
A.6.2.3 Setting Advanced Attributes for a Microwave Port....................................................................453
A.6.2.4 Querying the Running Status of an Ethernet Port.......................................................................454
A.7 Managing Ethernet Services and Features.....................................................................................................455
A.7.1 Managing ERPS....................................................................................................................................455
A.7.1.1 Creating an ERP Instance............................................................................................................455
A.7.1.2 Setting ERPS Protocol Parameters..............................................................................................457
A.7.1.3 Querying the ERPS Status...........................................................................................................458
A.7.2 Managing LAGs...................................................................................................................................458
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxv

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

A.7.2.1 Creating a LAG............................................................................................................................458


A.7.2.2 Setting Parameters for a LAG......................................................................................................461
A.7.2.3 Querying the Protocol Information About a LAG.......................................................................462
A.7.3 Configuring Ethernet Services..............................................................................................................463
A.7.3.1 Creating a Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Service.........................................463
A.7.3.2 Creating a VLAN-based E-Line Service.....................................................................................464
A.7.3.3 Creating an E-Line Service for Transmitting Layer 2 Protocol Packets.....................................465
A.7.3.4 Creating VLAN Forwarding Table Entries.................................................................................467
A.7.3.5 Creating an IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service............................................................468
A.7.3.6 Creating an IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service............................................................469
A.7.3.7 Creating an E-LAN Service for Transmitting Layer 2 Protocol Packets....................................470
A.7.3.8 Configuring a Split Horizon Group.............................................................................................472
A.7.3.9 Changing Logical Ports Mounted to a Bridge.............................................................................473
A.7.3.10 Deleting an E-Line Service........................................................................................................473
A.7.3.11 Deleting an E-LAN Service.......................................................................................................474
A.7.4 Managing MAC Address Tables..........................................................................................................475
A.7.4.1 Creating a Static MAC Address Entry.........................................................................................475
A.7.4.2 Creating a Blacklist MAC Address Entry...................................................................................476
A.7.4.3 Managing a Dynamic MAC Address Table................................................................................477
A.7.5 Setting the Mode for Processing an Unknown Frame of an E-LAN Service.......................................478
A.7.6 Managing QoS......................................................................................................................................479
A.7.6.1 Modifying the Mapping for a DS Domain..................................................................................479
A.7.6.2 Changing the Packet Type Trusted by a Port..............................................................................481
A.7.6.3 Configuring Port Shaping............................................................................................................482
A.7.6.4 Setting Egress Queue Scheduling Policies..................................................................................483
A.7.6.5 Setting Traffic Shaping for Egress Queues.................................................................................484
A.7.6.6 Setting the Congestion Management Mode for Egress Queues..................................................485
A.7.7 Using Ethernet Service OAM...............................................................................................................487
A.7.7.1 Creating an MD...........................................................................................................................487
A.7.7.2 Creating an MA...........................................................................................................................488
A.7.7.3 Creating an MEP..........................................................................................................................489
A.7.7.4 Creating a Remote MEP in an MA..............................................................................................490
A.7.7.5 Creating an MIP...........................................................................................................................491
A.7.7.6 Performing a CC Test..................................................................................................................492
A.7.7.7 Performing an LB Test................................................................................................................493
A.7.7.8 Performing an LT Test.................................................................................................................495
A.7.7.9 Activating the AIS.......................................................................................................................496
A.7.7.10 Monitoring Packet Loss Ratio, Delay, or Delay Variation of Ethernet Services......................497
A.7.7.11 Performing E-LAN Service Loopback Detection......................................................................499
A.7.7.12 Reactivating an E-LAN Service................................................................................................500
A.7.8 Using Ethernet Port OAM....................................................................................................................501
A.7.8.1 Enabling OAM Auto-discovery...................................................................................................501
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxvi

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

A.7.8.2 Enabling the Link Event Notification..........................................................................................502


A.7.8.3 Changing the OAM Errored Frame Monitoring Threshold.........................................................503
A.7.8.4 Performing a Remote Loopback..................................................................................................504
A.7.8.5 Enabling Self-loop Detection......................................................................................................506
A.7.9 Configuring LPT...................................................................................................................................507
A.8 Managing Clocks...........................................................................................................................................508
A.8.1 Managing Clocks at the Physical Layer...............................................................................................508
A.8.1.1 Changing the Clock Control Mode..............................................................................................508
A.8.1.2 Configuring Clock Sources..........................................................................................................509
A.8.1.3 Configuring Protection for Clock Sources..................................................................................510
A.8.1.4 Customizing the Clock Quality...................................................................................................512
A.8.1.5 Enabling/Disabling SSM Transmission.......................................................................................513
A.8.1.6 Enabling/Disabling the Output of Clock Source IDs..................................................................514
A.8.1.7 Modifying Clock Source Reversion Parameters..........................................................................514
A.8.1.8 Querying the Clock Synchronization Status................................................................................515
A.8.2 Managing the IEEE 1588v2 Clock.......................................................................................................516
A.8.2.1 Enabling/Disabling the IEEE-1588 Timeslot for a Microwave Port...........................................516
A.8.2.2 Querying or Modifying the PTP System Time............................................................................517
A.8.2.3 Setting the PTP NE Attributes.....................................................................................................518
A.8.2.4 Creating a PTP Clock Port...........................................................................................................519
A.8.2.5 Setting PTP Clock Port Attributes...............................................................................................520
A.8.2.6 Setting Parameters for IEEE 1588v2 Clock Packets...................................................................522
A.8.2.7 Configuring the Delay Offset for Asymmetric Transmission Between NEs...............................524
A.8.2.8 Configuring the Cascade Fiber Length for a 1+1 Protection Group...........................................525
A.8.2.9 Configuring a PTP Clock Subnet................................................................................................526
A.8.2.10 Modifying the BMC Algorithm Parameters for an NE Clock...................................................527
A.9 Using RMON.................................................................................................................................................528
A.9.1 Browsing Current Performance Events of Ethernet.............................................................................528
A.9.2 Setting the Ethernet Performance Threshold-Crossing Parameter.......................................................529
A.9.3 Configuring the Parameters for Ethernet Historical Performance Monitoring.....................................530
A.9.4 Browsing Ethernet Historical Performance Data..................................................................................531
A.10 Configuring a Native Ethernet Service (in End-to-End Mode)...................................................................532
A.10.1 Searching for Native Ethernet Services..............................................................................................532
A.10.2 Creating a Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Service................................................533
A.10.3 Creating a VLAN-based E-Line Service............................................................................................534
A.10.4 Creating an IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service...................................................................535
A.10.5 Creating an IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service...................................................................537
A.10.6 Verifying a Native Ethernet Service...................................................................................................539
A.10.7 Managing Native Ethernet Services...................................................................................................541
A.10.8 Managing Discrete Native Ethernet Services ....................................................................................542
A.10.9 Adjusting an E-LAN Service Network...............................................................................................543
A.11 Verifying Services and Features..................................................................................................................544
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxvii

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

A.11.1 Testing Ethernet Services...................................................................................................................544


A.11.1.1 Testing Ethernet Services Configured on a Per NE Basis.........................................................544
A.11.1.2 Testing Ethernet Services Configured in End-to-End Mode.....................................................546
A.11.2 Testing AM Shifting...........................................................................................................................547
A.11.3 Testing Protection Switching..............................................................................................................548
A.11.3.1 Testing ERPS Switching............................................................................................................548
A.11.3.2 Testing 1+1 Protection Switching.............................................................................................551
A.11.3.3 Testing PLA Protection Switching............................................................................................553

B Parameters Description............................................................................................................556
B.1 Parameters for Network Management...........................................................................................................557
B.1.1 Parameters for NE Management...........................................................................................................557
B.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching.........................................................................................557
B.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation...........................................................................................560
B.1.1.3 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization (U2000).......................................................562
B.1.1.4 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management...........................................................565
B.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time............................................566
B.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management.....................................................................................567
B.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting..................................................567
B.1.2.2 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC..................................569
B.1.2.3 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management...................................................................570
B.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Link Management_Availability Test............................................571
B.1.2.5 Parameter Description: Access Control.......................................................................................572
B.1.2.6 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration........................................574
B.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management........................575
B.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_Availability Test.................................576
B.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings...................577
B.1.2.10 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP.............................................................582
B.1.2.11 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas.................................................583
B.1.2.12 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding OSPF Areas..............584
B.1.2.13 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding Routes to Be Manually
Aggregated................................................................................................................................................586
B.1.2.14 Parameter Description: Port OSPF Setting................................................................................586
B.1.2.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management......................................586
B.1.2.16 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting..........................................................587
B.1.2.17 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control.....................................................588
B.1.2.18 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Packet Control.....................................................589
B.1.2.19 Parameter Description: SNMP Communications Parameters Setting.......................................590
B.1.3 Parameters for RADIUS.......................................................................................................................590
B.1.3.1 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_Creation.........................................................591
B.1.3.2 Parameter Description: Enabling/Disabling the RADIUS Function...........................................592
B.2 Radio Link Parameters...................................................................................................................................592
B.2.1 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection Group.................................................................................592
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxviii

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

B.2.2 Parameter Description: PLA Group Creation.......................................................................................596


B.2.3 Parameters Description: Radio Link Configuration.............................................................................597
B.3 Parameters for Board Interfaces.....................................................................................................................603
B.3.1 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards........................................................................................603
B.3.1.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes.......................................................603
B.3.1.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control...........................................................606
B.3.1.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes....................................................608
B.3.1.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes................................................610
B.3.2 Microwave Interface Parameters..........................................................................................................613
B.3.2.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes..................................................613
B.3.2.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes...............................................614
B.3.2.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes...........................................615
B.4 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features...............................................................................617
B.4.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services..........................................................................................................617
B.4.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service........................................................................................617
B.4.1.2 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service.......................................................................................622
B.4.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols........................................................................................................633
B.4.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management................................................................................633
B.4.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management...............................................639
B.4.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation......................................646
B.4.2.4 Parameter Description: Simplified LPT Creation........................................................................647
B.4.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM........................................................................................................648
B.4.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation
..................................................................................................................................................................648
B.4.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation
..................................................................................................................................................................649
B.4.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation............................650
B.4.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation..............651
B.4.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation.............................652
B.4.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling..............................653
B.4.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling...............................654
B.4.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling Service Loopback Detection............655
B.4.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter..............................656
B.4.3.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring
..................................................................................................................................................................658
B.4.4 Parameter Description: QoS Management............................................................................................660
B.5 RMON Parameters.........................................................................................................................................668
B.5.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group............................................................668
B.5.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group..............................................................669
B.5.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting.............................................................670
B.6 Clock Parameters...........................................................................................................................................671
B.6.1 Physical-Layer Clock Parameters.........................................................................................................671
B.6.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status................................................................672
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxix

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

B.6.1.2 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table...................................................................673


B.6.1.3 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching................................674
B.6.1.4 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters...........675
B.6.1.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet......................................................677
B.6.1.6 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality.....................................................680
B.6.1.7 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control...........................................683
B.6.1.8 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status...................................684
B.7 PTP Clock Parameters...................................................................................................................................685
B.7.1 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Attribute....................................................................685
B.7.2 Parameter Description: Setting of a PTP Clock Subnet_Clock Subnet................................................696
B.7.3 Parameter Description: Setting of a PTP Clock Subnet_Port_BMC....................................................696

C Glossary......................................................................................................................................699

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxx

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Figures

Figures
Figure 1-1 Hoisting heavy objects.........................................................................................................................11
Figure 1-2 Slanting a ladder..................................................................................................................................12
Figure 1-3 Ladder top being one meter higher than the roof.................................................................................12
Figure 4-1 Ways for connecting the Web LCT to an OptiX RTN 310.................................................................35
Figure 4-2 Main lobe and side lobes......................................................................................................................40
Figure 4-3 Horizontal section and front view of the antenna................................................................................41
Figure 4-4 Three tracking paths.............................................................................................................................42
Figure 4-5 Aligning the antenna with the first side lobe.......................................................................................42
Figure 4-6 Testing the RSSI voltage using a multimeter......................................................................................44
Figure 4-7 Signal peaks.........................................................................................................................................45
Figure 5-1 Ways for connecting the Web LCT to an OptiX RTN 310.................................................................60
Figure 5-2 Configuration flowchart.......................................................................................................................64
Figure 5-3 Main lobe and side lobes......................................................................................................................79
Figure 5-4 Horizontal section and front view of the antenna................................................................................80
Figure 5-5 Three tracking paths.............................................................................................................................81
Figure 5-6 Aligning the antenna with the first side lobe.......................................................................................81
Figure 5-7 Testing the RSSI voltage using a multimeter......................................................................................83
Figure 5-8 Signal peaks.........................................................................................................................................84
Figure 6-1 Connection diagram for testing Ethernet services...............................................................................94
Figure 6-2 Connection diagram for testing Ethernet services...............................................................................96
Figure 6-3 Configuration for testing ERPS...........................................................................................................99
Figure 6-4 Test connection diagram....................................................................................................................102
Figure 6-5 Test connection diagram....................................................................................................................104
Figure 6-6 Test connection diagram....................................................................................................................108
Figure 6-7 Test connection diagram....................................................................................................................111
Figure 8-1 Flowchart for initial configuration.....................................................................................................119
Figure 8-2 Networking diagram of a microwave chain network.........................................................................121
Figure 8-3 Networking diagram of a microwave ring network...........................................................................122
Figure 8-4 Application of the IP DCN solution...................................................................................................124
Figure 8-5 Access control (OptiX RTN 310 connecting to an NMS through a third-party service network)
..............................................................................................................................................................................125
Figure 8-6 Access control (OptiX RTN 310 connecting to a Web LCT through its GE port)............................126
Figure 8-7 Flowchart for configuring the network topology...............................................................................129
Figure 8-8 Networking diagram (microwave chain network topology)..............................................................136
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxxi

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Figures

Figure 8-9 Allocated IDs and IP addresses (microwave chain network)............................................................137


Figure 8-10 Networking diagram (microwave ring network topology)..............................................................141
Figure 8-11 Allocated IDs and IP addresses (microwave ring network).............................................................142
Figure 8-12 Adaptive modulation........................................................................................................................146
Figure 8-13 Single-polarized transmission..........................................................................................................147
Figure 8-14 CCDP transmission..........................................................................................................................147
Figure 8-15 Typical configuration of 1+0 non-protection...................................................................................148
Figure 8-16 Typical configuration of 1+1 HSB protection.................................................................................149
Figure 8-17 Typical configuration of 1+1 FD protection....................................................................................149
Figure 8-18 Typical configuration of 1+1 SD protection....................................................................................150
Figure 8-19 Typical configuration of 2+0 non-protection (with PLA configured with NE-level protection)
..............................................................................................................................................................................150
Figure 8-20 Typical configuration of the XPIC..................................................................................................151
Figure 8-21 PLA..................................................................................................................................................151
Figure 8-22 E-LAG application...........................................................................................................................152
Figure 8-23 Before E-LAG switching.................................................................................................................153
Figure 8-24 E-LAG switching.............................................................................................................................154
Figure 8-25 Flowchart for configuring microwave links.....................................................................................156
Figure 8-26 Networking diagram (microwave links on a microwave chain network)........................................164
Figure 8-27 Networking diagram (microwave links on a microwave ring network)..........................................172
Figure 8-28 Ethernet ports on an OptiX RTN 310..............................................................................................178
Figure 8-29 Application of the VLAN forwarding table for an E-Line service (on NE 2).................................180
Figure 8-30 Split horizon group..........................................................................................................................181
Figure 8-31 Implementation of ERPS.................................................................................................................182
Figure 8-32 LAG.................................................................................................................................................183
Figure 8-33 Typical application of service model 1............................................................................................184
Figure 8-34 VLAN-based E-Line service model.................................................................................................186
Figure 8-35 IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service model..........................................................................187
Figure 8-36 IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service model..........................................................................188
Figure 8-37 Networking diagram of VLAN-based E-Line services....................................................................189
Figure 8-38 Networking diagram (IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services)...............................................190
Figure 8-39 Networking diagram of IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services.............................................191
Figure 8-40 Flowchart for configuring transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line services......................195
Figure 8-41 Flowchart for configuring transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line services......................201
Figure 8-42 Flowchart for configuring VLAN-based E-Line services................................................................206
Figure 8-43 Flowchart for configuring VLAN-based E-Line services................................................................213
Figure 8-44 Flowchart for configuring IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services.........................................219
Figure 8-45 Flowchart for configuring IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services.........................................227
Figure 8-46 Flowchart for configuring IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services.........................................232
Figure 8-47 Flowchart for configuring IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services.........................................241
Figure 8-48 Networking diagram (transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line services)............................245
Figure 8-49 Networking diagram (VLAN-based E-Line services).....................................................................255
Figure 8-50 Information about VLAN-based E-Line services............................................................................258
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxxii

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Figures

Figure 8-51 Networking diagram (IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services)...............................................279


Figure 8-52 Networking diagram (IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services)...............................................303
Figure 8-53 Clock source protection based on priorities.....................................................................................328
Figure 8-54 SSM protection................................................................................................................................330
Figure 8-55 Extended SSM protection................................................................................................................333
Figure 8-56 Clock synchronization policy for a chain network..........................................................................334
Figure 8-57 Clock synchronization policy for a ring network.............................................................................336
Figure 8-58 Flowchart for configuring a clock....................................................................................................337
Figure 8-59 Networking diagram (clocks on a microwave chain network)........................................................340
Figure 8-60 Networking diagram (clocks on a microwave chain network)........................................................341
Figure 8-61 Networking diagram (clocks on a microwave ring network)..........................................................343
Figure 8-62 Networking diagram (clocks on a microwave ring network)..........................................................344
Figure A-1 Ways for connecting the Web LCT to an OptiX RTN 310...............................................................358
Figure A-2 Connection diagram for testing Ethernet services............................................................................545
Figure A-3 Connection diagram for testing Ethernet services............................................................................546
Figure A-4 Configuration for testing ERPS........................................................................................................549
Figure A-5 Test connection diagram...................................................................................................................552
Figure A-6 Test connection diagram...................................................................................................................554

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxxiii

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Tables

Tables
Table 1-1 Warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 310..............................................................................3
Table 2-1 Tools......................................................................................................................................................17
Table 3-1 Configuring site commissioning data using a USB flash drive.............................................................21
Table 3-2 System commissioning items................................................................................................................23
Table 4-1 Fuse capacity.........................................................................................................................................27
Table 5-1 Fuse capacity.........................................................................................................................................55
Table 5-2 Configuration procedure........................................................................................................................65
Table 8-1 Initial configuration.............................................................................................................................119
Table 8-2 Network adjustment.............................................................................................................................120
Table 8-3 Configuration examples.......................................................................................................................121
Table 8-4 Configuration examples.......................................................................................................................123
Table 8-5 Process of creating NEs.......................................................................................................................130
Table 8-6 Process of configuring NE attributes...................................................................................................131
Table 8-7 Process of configuring DCCs..............................................................................................................131
Table 8-8 Process of synchronizing NE time......................................................................................................133
Table 8-9 Process of setting the performance monitoring status.........................................................................134
Table 8-10 Process of creating fibers/cables and subnets....................................................................................134
Table 8-11 Process of configuring microwave links...........................................................................................157
Table 8-12 Service capacity transmitted by each NodeB....................................................................................163
Table 8-13 Common service priorities................................................................................................................163
Table 8-14 Basic information about microwave links.........................................................................................164
Table 8-15 AM attribute information..................................................................................................................165
Table 8-16 Power and ATPC information...........................................................................................................166
Table 8-17 Configuration information about XPIC groups.................................................................................166
Table 8-18 Configuration information about PLA groups..................................................................................167
Table 8-19 Service capacity transmitted by each NodeB....................................................................................171
Table 8-20 Common service priorities................................................................................................................172
Table 8-21 Basic information about microwave links.........................................................................................173
Table 8-22 AM attribute information..................................................................................................................173
Table 8-23 Power and ATPC information...........................................................................................................174
Table 8-24 Auto-negotiation rules for GE electrical ports (when the local GE electrical port works in autonegotiation mode).................................................................................................................................................176
Table 8-25 Mapping between physical ports and logical ports for an OptiX RTN 310......................................178
Table 8-26 Entries in a MAC address table.........................................................................................................179
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxxiv

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Tables

Table 8-27 Transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service model.......................................................184


Table 8-28 VLAN-based E-Line service model..................................................................................................185
Table 8-29 IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service model............................................................................186
Table 8-30 IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service model............................................................................187
Table 8-31 Comparison between the three networking modes............................................................................192
Table 8-32 Process of configuring LAG for Ethernet ports................................................................................196
Table 8-33 Process of configuring transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line services.............................196
Table 8-34 Process of setting port attributes........................................................................................................197
Table 8-35 Process of configuring QoS...............................................................................................................198
Table 8-36 Process of verifying Ethernet service configurations........................................................................199
Table 8-37 Process of setting port attributes........................................................................................................202
Table 8-38 Process of configuring LAG for Ethernet ports................................................................................203
Table 8-39 Process of configuring transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line services.............................203
Table 8-40 Process of configuring QoS...............................................................................................................204
Table 8-41 Process of verifying Ethernet service configurations........................................................................205
Table 8-42 Process of configuring LAG for Ethernet ports................................................................................207
Table 8-43 Process of configuring VLAN-based E-Line services......................................................................207
Table 8-44 Process of setting port attributes........................................................................................................209
Table 8-45 Process of configuring QoS...............................................................................................................210
Table 8-46 Process of verifying Ethernet service configurations........................................................................211
Table 8-47 Process of setting port attributes........................................................................................................214
Table 8-48 Process of configuring LAG for Ethernet ports................................................................................216
Table 8-49 Process of configuring VLAN-based E-Line services......................................................................216
Table 8-50 Process of configuring QoS...............................................................................................................217
Table 8-51 Process of verifying Ethernet service configurations........................................................................218
Table 8-52 Process of configuring LAG for Ethernet ports................................................................................220
Table 8-53 Process of configuring ERPS protection...........................................................................................221
Table 8-54 Process of configuring IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services................................................222
Table 8-55 Process of setting port attributes........................................................................................................223
Table 8-56 Process of configuring QoS...............................................................................................................224
Table 8-57 Process of verifying Ethernet service configurations........................................................................225
Table 8-58 Process of configuring LAG for Ethernet ports................................................................................228
Table 8-59 Process of configuring ERPS protection...........................................................................................229
Table 8-60 Process of configuring IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services................................................229
Table 8-61 Process of configuring QoS...............................................................................................................230
Table 8-62 Process of verifying Ethernet service configurations........................................................................231
Table 8-63 Process of configuring LAG for Ethernet ports................................................................................233
Table 8-64 Process of configuring ERPS protection...........................................................................................233
Table 8-65 Process of configuring IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services................................................234
Table 8-66 Process of setting port attributes........................................................................................................236
Table 8-67 Process of configuring QoS...............................................................................................................238
Table 8-68 Process of verifying Ethernet service configurations........................................................................239
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxxv

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Tables

Table 8-69 Process of configuring LAG for Ethernet ports................................................................................242


Table 8-70 Process of configuring ERPS protection...........................................................................................242
Table 8-71 Process of configuring IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services................................................243
Table 8-72 Process of configuring QoS...............................................................................................................244
Table 8-73 Process of verifying Ethernet service configurations........................................................................245
Table 8-74 Ethernet port information..................................................................................................................246
Table 8-75 Microwave port information..............................................................................................................246
Table 8-76 Information about a transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service...................................247
Table 8-77 PHBs and service types.....................................................................................................................247
Table 8-78 Queue scheduling policies.................................................................................................................248
Table 8-79 Congestion management mode..........................................................................................................249
Table 8-80 Information about Ethernet ports on XPIC links...............................................................................256
Table 8-81 Information about Ethernet ports on non-XPIC links.......................................................................256
Table 8-82 Information about microwave ports on XPIC links..........................................................................257
Table 8-83 Information about microwave ports on non-XPIC links...................................................................257
Table 8-84 Information about VLAN-based E-Line services on XPIC links......................................................258
Table 8-85 Information about VLAN-based E-Line services on non-XPIC links..............................................259
Table 8-86 PHBs and service types.....................................................................................................................260
Table 8-87 Queue scheduling policies.................................................................................................................261
Table 8-88 Congestion management mode..........................................................................................................261
Table 8-89 Ethernet port information..................................................................................................................280
Table 8-90 Microwave port information..............................................................................................................281
Table 8-91 Information about ERP instances......................................................................................................281
Table 8-92 Information About an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service...................................................282
Table 8-93 PHBs and service types.....................................................................................................................283
Table 8-94 Queue scheduling policies.................................................................................................................285
Table 8-95 Congestion management mode..........................................................................................................285
Table 8-96 Information about Ethernet ports on XPIC links...............................................................................304
Table 8-97 Information about Ethernet ports on non-XPIC links.......................................................................304
Table 8-98 Information about microwave ports on XPIC links..........................................................................305
Table 8-99 Information about microwave ports on non-XPIC links...................................................................306
Table 8-100 Information about IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services on XPIC links.............................306
Table 8-101 Information about IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services on non-XPIC links......................307
Table 8-102 PHBs and service types...................................................................................................................308
Table 8-103 Queue scheduling policies...............................................................................................................309
Table 8-104 Congestion management mode........................................................................................................309
Table 8-105 SSM protection................................................................................................................................329
Table 8-106 Extended SSM protection................................................................................................................331
Table 8-107 Process of configuring the clock.....................................................................................................337
Table 8-108 XPIC links.......................................................................................................................................342
Table 8-109 Non-XPIC links...............................................................................................................................342
Table 8-110 Common task collection (NE attributes).........................................................................................346
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxxvi

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Tables

Table 8-111 Common task collection (microwave links)....................................................................................347


Table 8-112 Common task collection (Ethernet services)...................................................................................348
Table A-1 Parameters for NE time synchronization............................................................................................368
Table A-2 Parameters for NE time synchronization............................................................................................369
Table A-3 Parameters for the standard NTP server.............................................................................................369
Table A-4 Authentication Type...........................................................................................................................400
Table A-5 Authentication Password....................................................................................................................400
Table A-6 SNMP plan.........................................................................................................................................407
Table A-7 Basic parameters for an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service.................................................536
Table A-8 Information about ports mounted to network bridges........................................................................536
Table A-9 Basic parameters for an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service.................................................538
Table A-10 Information about ports mounted to network bridges......................................................................538
Table B-1 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames.............................................................609
Table B-2 Data frame processing........................................................................................................................615

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxxvii

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

Safety Precautions

About This Chapter


This topic describes the safety precautions that you must follow when installing, operating, and
maintaining Huawei devices.
1.1 General Safety Precautions
This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring
and testing instruments when you install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices.
1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols
Before using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment.
1.3 Electrical Safety
This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current,
power cables, fuses, and ESD.
1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas
This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device.
1.5 Storage Batteries
This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries.
1.6 Radiation
This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers.
1.7 Working at Heights
This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights.
1.8 Mechanical Safety
This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans,
and carrying heavy objects.
1.9 Other Precautions
This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables,
and routing cables.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

1.1 General Safety Precautions


This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring
and testing instruments when you install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices.

All Safety Precautions


To ensure the safety of humans and a device, follow the marks on the device and all the safety
precautions in this document when installing, operating, and maintaining a device.
The "CAUTION", "WARNING", and "DANGER" marks in this document do not cover all the
safety precautions that must be followed. They are supplements to the safety precautions.

Local Laws and Regulations


When operating a device, always comply with the local laws and regulations. The safety
precautions provided in the documents are in addition/supplementary to the local laws and
regulations.

Basic Installation Requirements


The installation and maintenance personnel of Huawei devices must receive strict training and
be familiar with the proper operation methods and safety precautions before any operation.
l

Only trained and qualified personnel are permitted to install, operate, and maintain a device.

Only certified professionals are permitted to remove the safety facilities, and to troubleshoot
and maintain the device.

Only the personnel authenticated or authorized by Huawei are permitted to replace or


change the device or parts of the device (including software).

The operating personnel must immediately report the faults or errors that may cause safety
problems to the person in charge.

Grounding Requirements
The grounding requirements are applicable to the device that needs to be grounded.
l

When installing the device, always connect the grounding facilities first. When removing
the device, always disconnect the grounding facilities last.

Ensure that the grounding conductor is intact.

Do not operate the device in the absence of a suitably installed grounding conductor.

The device must be connected to the protection ground (PGND) permanently. Before
operating the device, check the electrical connections of the device, and ensure that the
device is properly grounded.

Human Safety
l

When there is a risk of a lightning strike, do not operate the fixed terminal or touch the
cables.

When there is risk of a lightning strike, unplug the AC power connector. Do not use the
fixed terminal or touch the terminal or antenna connector.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

NOTE

The preceding requirements apply to wireless fixed station terminals.

To avoid electric shocks, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to
telephone-network voltage (TNV) circuits.

Do not look into optical ports without eye protection. Otherwise, human eyes may be hurt
by laser beams.

Before operating the device, wear an ESD protective coat, ESD gloves, and an ESD wrist
strap. In addition, you need to get off the conductive objects, such as jewelry and watches,
to prevent electric shock and burn.

In case of fire, escape from the building or site where the device is located and press the
fire alarm bell or dial the telephone number for fire alarms. Do not enter the burning building
again in any situation.

Before any operation, install the device firmly on the ground or other rigid objects, such as
on a wall or in a rack.

When the system is working, ensure that the ventilation hole is not blocked.

When installing the front panel, use a tool to tighten the screws firmly, if required.

After installing the device, clean up the packing materials.

Device Safety

1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols


Before using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment.
Table 1-1 lists the warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 310 and their meanings.
Table 1-1 Warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 310
Label

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Label Name

Description

ESD protection label

Indicates that the equipment is


sensitive to static electricity.

Radiation warning label

Indicates that the equipment


generates electromagnetic
radiation.

High temperature warning label

Indicates that the equipment


surface temperature may exceed
70C when the ambient
temperature is higher than 55C.
Wear protective gloves to handle
the equipment.

Grounding label

Indicates the grounding position


of a chassis.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

1.3 Electrical Safety


This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current,
power cables, fuses, and ESD.

High Voltage

DANGER
l A high-voltage power supply provides power for device operations. Direct human contact
with the high voltage power supply or human contact through damp objects can be fatal.
l Unspecified or unauthorized high voltage operations could result in fire or electric shock, or
both.

Thunderstorm
The requirements apply only to wireless base stations or devices with antennas and feeders.

DANGER
Do not perform operations on high voltage, AC power, towers, or backstays in stormy weather
conditions.

High Leakage Current

WARNING
Before powering on a device, ground the device. Otherwise, the safety of humans and the device
cannot be ensured.
If a high leakage current mark is labeled near the power connector of the device, you must
connect the PGND terminal on the shell to the ground before connecting the device to an A/C
input power supply. This is to prevent the electric shock caused by leakage current of the device.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

Power Cables

DANGER
Do not install or remove the power cable with a live line. Transient contact between the core of
the power cable and the conductor may generate electric arc or spark, which may cause fire or
eye injury.
l

Before installing or removing power cables, you must power off the device.

Before connecting a power cable, you must ensure that the label on the power cable is
correct.

Device with Power On

DANGER
Installing or removing a device is prohibited if the device is on.

DANGER
Do not install or remove the power cables of the equipment when it is powered on.

Short Circuits
When installing and maintaining devices, place and use the associated tools and instruments in
accordance with regulations to avoid short-circuits caused by metal objects.

Fuse

WARNING
If the fuse on a device blows, replace the fuse with a fuse of the same type and specifications to
ensure safe operation of the device.

1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas


This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

DANGER
Do not place or operate devices in an environment of flammable or explosive air or gas.
Operating an electronic device in an environment of flammable gas causes a severe hazard.

1.5 Storage Batteries


This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries.

DANGER
Before operating a storage battery, you must read the safety precautions carefully and be familiar
with the method of connecting a storage battery.
l

Incorrect operations of storage batteries cause hazards. During operation, prevent any shortcircuit, and prevent the electrolyte from overflowing or leakage.

If the electrolyte overflows, it causes potential hazards to the device. The electrolyte may
corrode metal parts and the circuit boards, and ultimately damage the circuit boards.

A storage battery contains a great deal of energy. Misoperations may cause a short-circuit,
which leads to human injuries.

Basic Precautions
To ensure safety, note the following points before installing or maintaining the storage battery:
l

Use special insulation tools.

Wear an eye protector and take effective protection measures.

Wear rubber gloves and a protection coat to prevent the hazard caused by the overflowing
electrolyte.

When handling the storage battery, ensure that its electrodes are upward. Leaning or
reversing the storage battery is prohibited.

Before installing or maintaining the storage battery, ensure that the storage battery is
disconnected from the power supply that charges the storage battery.

Short-Circuit

DANGER
A battery short-circuit may cause human injuries. Although the voltage of an ordinary battery
is low, the instantaneous high current caused by a short-circuit emits a great deal of energy.
Avoid any short-circuit of batteries caused by metal objects. If possible, disconnect the working
battery before performing other operations.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

Hazardous Gas

CAUTION
Do not use any unsealed lead-acid storage battery. Lay a storage battery horizontally and fix it
properly to prevent the battery from emitting flammable gas, which may cause fire or device
erosion.
Working lead-acid storage batteries emit flammable gas. Therefore, ventilation and fireproofing
measures must be taken at the sites where lead-acid storage batteries are placed.

Battery Temperature

CAUTION
If a battery overheats, the battery may be deformed or damaged, and the electrolyte may
overflow.
When the temperature of the battery is higher than 60C, you need to check whether the
electrolyte overflows. If the electrolyte overflows, take appropriate measures immediately.

Battery Leakage

CAUTION
In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up appropriately.
When handling a leaky battery, protect against the possible damage caused by the acid. When
you find the electrolyte leaks, you can use the following substances to counteract and absorb the
leaking electrolyte:
l

Sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3)

Sodium carbonate (Na2CO3)

In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up as recommended by
the battery manufacturer and any local regulations for acid disposal.
If a person contacts battery electrolyte, clean the skin that contacts the battery electrolyte
immediately by using water. In case of a severe situation, the person must be sent to a hospital
immediately.

1.6 Radiation
This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers


The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes. Hence, you must exercise caution when using
optical fibers.

DANGER
When installing or maintaining optical fibers, avoid direct eye exposure to the laser beams
launched from the optical interface or fiber connectors. The laser beam can cause damage to
your eyes.

Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Optical Interfaces

CAUTION
If fiber connectors or flanges are contaminated, optical power commissioning is seriously
affected. Therefore, the two endfaces and flange of every external fiber must be cleaned before
the fiber is led into the equipment through the optical distribution frame (ODF) for being inserted
into an optical interface on the equipment.
The fiber connectors and optical interfaces of the lasers must be cleaned with the following
special cleaning tools and materials:
l

Special cleaning solvent: It is preferred to use isoamylol. Propyl alcohol, however, can also
be used. It is prohibited that you use alcohol and formalin.

Non-woven lens tissue

Special compressed gas

Cotton stick (medical cotton or long fiber cotton)

Special cleaning roll, used with the recommended cleaning solvent

Special magnifier for fiber connectors

1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure


This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure.
If multiple transmit antennas are installed on a tower or backstay, keep away from the transmit
directions of the antennas when you install or maintain an antenna locally.

CAUTION
Ensure that all personnel are beyond the transmit direction of a working antenna.

1.6.3 Forbidden Areas


The topic describes requirements for a forbidden area.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

Before entering an area where the electromagnetic radiation is beyond the specified range,
the associated personnel must shut down the electromagnetic radiator or stay at least 10
meters away from the electromagnetic radiator, if in the transmit direction.

A physical barrier and an eye-catching warning flag should be available in each forbidden
area.

1.6.4 Laser
This topic describes safety precautions for lasers.

WARNING
When handling optical fibers, do not stand close to, or look into the optical fiber outlet directly
without eye protection.
Laser transceivers are used in the optical transmission system and associated test tools. The laser
transmitted through the bare optical fiber produces a small beam of light, and therefore it has
very high power density and is invisible to human eyes. When a beam of light enters eyes, the
eyes may be damaged.
In normal cases, viewing an un-terminated optical fiber or a damaged optical fiber without eye
protection at a distance greater than 150 mm does not cause eye injury. Eye injury may occur,
however, if an optical tool such as a microscope, magnifying glass, or eye loupe is used to view
an un-terminated optical fiber.

Safety Instructions Regarding Lasers


To avoid laser radiation, obey the following instructions:
l

All operations should be performed by authorized personnel who have completed the
required training courses.

Wear a pair of eye-protective glasses when you are handling lasers or fibers.

Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber connectors.

Do not look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector when you are not sure
whether the optical source is switched off.

Use an optical power meter to measure the optical power and ensure that the optical source
is switched off.

Before opening the front door of an optical transmission device, ensure that you are not
exposed to laser radiation.

Do not use an optical tool such as a microscope, a magnifying glass, or an eye loupe to
view the optical connector or fiber that is transmitting optical signals.

Instructions Regarding Fiber Handling


Read and abide by the following instructions before handling fibers:
l

Only trained personnel are permitted to cut and splice fibers.

Before cutting or splicing a fiber, ensure that the fiber is disconnected from the optical
source. After disconnecting the fiber, cap to the fiber connectors.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

1.6.5 Microwave
When installing and maintaining the equipment of Huawei, follow the safety precautions of
microwave to ensure the safety of the human body and the equipment.

WARNING
Strong radio frequency can harm the human body.
When installing or maintaining an aerial on the tower or mast that is installed with multiple
aerials, switch off the transmitter in advance.

1.7 Working at Heights


This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights.

WARNING
When working at heights, be cautious to prevent objects from falling down.
The requirements for working at heights are as follows:
l

The personnel who work at heights must be trained.

Carry and handle the operating machines and tools with caution to prevent them from falling
down.

Safety measures, such as wearing a helmet and a safety belt, must be taken.

Wear cold-proof clothes when working at heights in cold areas.

Check all lifting appliances thoroughly before starting the work, and ensure that they are
intact.

1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects


This topic describes the safety precautions for hoisting heavy objects that you must follow when
installing, operating, and maintaining Huawei devices.

WARNING
When heavy objects are being hoisted, do not walk below the cantilever or hoisted objects.
l

Only trained and qualified personnel can perform hoisting operations.

Before hoisting heavy objects, check that the hoisting tools are complete and in good
condition.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

Before hoisting heavy objects, ensure that the hoisting tools are fixed to a secure object or
wall with good weight-bearing capacity.

Issue orders with short and explicit words to ensure correct operations.

Ensure that the angle between the two cables is less than or equal to 90 degrees during the
lifting, as shown in Figure 1-1.

Figure 1-1 Hoisting heavy objects

1.7.2 Using Ladders


This topic describes safety precautions for using ladders.

Checking Ladders
l

Before using a ladder, check whether the ladder is damaged. After checking that the ladder
is in good condition, you can use the ladder.

Before using a ladder, you should know the maximum weight capacity of the ladder. Avoid
overweighing the ladder.

Placing Ladders
The proper slant angle of the ladder is 75 degrees. You can measure the slant angle of the ladder
with an angle square or your arms, as shown in Figure 1-2. When using a ladder, to prevent the
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

ladder from sliding, ensure that the wider feet of the ladder are downward, or take protection
measures for the ladder feet. Ensure that the ladder is placed securely.
Figure 1-2 Slanting a ladder

Climbing Up a Ladder
When climbing up a ladder, pay attention to the following points:
l

Ensure that the center of gravity of your body does not deviate from the edges of the two
long sides.

Before operations, ensure that your body is stable to reduce risks.

Do not climb higher than the fourth rung of the ladder (counted from up to down).

If you want to climb up a roof, ensure that the ladder top is at least one meter higher than the
roof, as shown in Figure 1-3.
Figure 1-3 Ladder top being one meter higher than the roof

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

1.8 Mechanical Safety


This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans,
and carrying heavy objects.

Drilling Holes

WARNING
Do not drill holes on the cabinet without prior permission. Drilling holes without complying
with the requirements affects the electromagnetic shielding performance of the cabinet and
damages the cables inside the cabinet. In addition, if the scraps caused by drilling enter the
cabinet, the printed circuit boards (PCBs) may be short-circuited.
l

Before drilling a hole on the cabinet, remove the cables inside the cabinet.

Wear an eye protector when drilling holes. This is to prevent eyes from being injured by
the splashing metal scraps.

Wear protection gloves when drilling holes.

Take measures to prevent the metallic scraps from falling into the cabinet. After the drilling,
clean up the metallic scraps.

Sharp Objects

WARNING
Wear protection gloves when carrying the device. This is to prevent hands from being injured
by the sharp edges of the device.

Fans
l

When replacing parts, place the objects such as the parts, screws, and tools properly. This
is to prevent them from falling into the operating fans, which damages the fans or device.

When replacing the parts near fans, keep your fingers or boards from touching operating
fans before the fans are powered off and stop running. Otherwise, the hands or the boards
are damaged.

Carrying Heavy Objects


Wear protection gloves when carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent hands from being hurt.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

WARNING
l The carrier must be prepared for load bearing before carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent
the carrier from being strained or pressed by the heavy objects.
l When you pull a chassis out of the cabinet, pay attention to the unstable or heavy objects on
the cabinet. This is to prevent the heavy objects on the cabinet top from falling down, which
may hurt you.
l

Generally, two persons are needed to carry a chassis. It is prohibited that only one person
carries a heavy chassis. When carrying a chassis, the carriers should stretch their backs and
move stably to avoid being strained.

When moving or lifting a chassis, hold the handles or bottom of the chassis. Do not hold
the handles of the modules installed in the chassis, such as the power modules, fan modules,
and boards.

1.9 Other Precautions


This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables,
and routing cables.

Removing and Inserting a Board

CAUTION
When inserting a board, wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and handle the board gently to
avoid distorting pins on the backplane.
l

Slide the board along the guide rails.

Do not contact one board with another to avoid short-circuits or damage.

When holding a board in hand, do not touch the board circuits, components, connectors,
or connection slots of the board to prevent damage caused by ESD of the human body to
the electrostatic-sensitive components.

Binding Signal Cables

CAUTION
Bind the signal cables separately from the high-current or high-voltage cables.

Routing Cables
In the case of extremely low temperature, heavy shock or vibration may damage the plastic skin
of the cables. To ensure the construction safety, comply with the following requirements:
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

When installing cables, ensure that the environment temperature is above 0C.

If the cables are stored in a place where the ambient temperature is below 0C, transfer
them to a place at room temperature and store the cables for more than 24 hours before
installation.

Handle the cables gently, especially in a low-temperature environment. Do not perform


any improper operations, for example, pushing the cables down directly from a truck.

High Temperature

WARNING
If the ambient temperature exceeds 55C, the temperature of the front panel surface marked the
flag may exceed 70C. When touching the front panel of the board in such an environment,
you must wear the protection gloves.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

2 Commissioning Preparations

Commissioning Preparations

About This Chapter


This chapter describes the preparations that must be made prior to commissioning equipment.
The preparation process is as follows:
2.1 Preparing Documents and Tools
This section lists the documents and tools to be obtained prior to equipment commissioning.
2.2 Preparing a USB Flash Drive
Prepare a USB flash drive if it is required for commissioning.
2.3 Determining the Commissioning Method
According to the scale of a microwave transmission network, commissioning engineers can use
the network commissioning method.
2.4 Checking Commissioning Conditions
Ensure that the equipment meets the requirements for site commissioning or system
commissioning prior to performing any commissioning tasks.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

2 Commissioning Preparations

2.1 Preparing Documents and Tools


This section lists the documents and tools to be obtained prior to equipment commissioning.

Documents
Obtain the following documents before equipment commissioning:
l

Engineering design documents, including:


Network Plan
Engineering Design

Commissioning guide, including:


OptiX RTN 310 Microwave Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration
Guide

Tools
Prepare the tools listed in Table 2-1 before equipment commissioning.
Table 2-1 Tools
Tool

Application Scenario

Adjustable wrench, screwdriver, telescope,


interphone, hex key (delivered with
antennas), multimeter, north-stabilized
indicator, and received signal strength
indicator (RSSI) test cable (delivered with
OptiX RTN 310), special spanner for the
orthogonal mode transducer (OMT)
(delivered with the OMT)

Aligning antennas

A laptop with the Web LCT installed

l Configuring site commissioning data


l Checking the microwave link status and
receive power
l Testing adaptive modulation (AM)
shifting
l Checking alarms

Network management system (NMS) server

Performing system commissioning items

NOTE

For details about the requirements and methods for installing the Web LCT, see the iManager U2000 Web
LCT User Guide.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

2 Commissioning Preparations

2.2 Preparing a USB Flash Drive


Prepare a USB flash drive if it is required for commissioning.

USB Flash Drive Model


The USB flash drive model recommended for OptiX RTN 310 is Locitech U208 (4 GB). If a
USB flash drive of another model or capacity is required, contact the local Huawei office for
confirmation. Not all USB flash drives are supported by OptiX RTN 310.

Content and Storage Paths on the USB Flash Drive


Data

Storage Directory

NE software

\pkg

Patch

\patch

License software

\license

Script

\script

USB authentication certificate

Root directory
NOTE
The RTN.CER file stores the administrator
accounts and passwords. The passwords are
encrypted in MD5 format. This file is generated
using a special-purpose tool.

2.3 Determining the Commissioning Method


According to the scale of a microwave transmission network, commissioning engineers can use
the network commissioning method.
NOTE

In the following instructions for both types of commissioning methods, site commissioning and system
commissioning are defined as follows:
l Site commissioning refers to the commissioning of one microwave link hop and the sites at both ends of the
hop. Site commissioning is carried out with commissioning tools connected to the NE at a single site.
l System commissioning refers to the commissioning and configuring of all NEs on a network. System
commissioning is carried out with commissioning tools connected to a gateway NE.

Single-Hop Commissioning
Single-hop commissioning is preferred for small-scale microwave transmission networks (for
example, a network with only one or two microwave link hops). By performing single-hop
commissioning, you can complete all site and system commissioning tasks at one time. The
major steps are outlined as follows:
1.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

On both ends of a microwave link, power on the equipment.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

2 Commissioning Preparations

2.

Load commissioning data using a USB flash drive or configure commissioning data
using the Web LCT.

3.

Use the Web LCT to complete the site commissioning items.

4.

Use the Web LCT to complete the system commissioning items.

Network Commissioning
Network commissioning is usually carried out for large-scale microwave transmission networks.
The major steps are outlined as follows:
1.

On both ends of a microwave link, power on the equipment.

2.

Load commissioning data using a USB flash drive or configure commissioning data
using the Web LCT.

3.

Use the Web LCT to complete the site commissioning items.

4.

Use the U2000 to complete the system commissioning items at the site where services
converge.

2.4 Checking Commissioning Conditions


Ensure that the equipment meets the requirements for site commissioning or system
commissioning prior to performing any commissioning tasks.

2.4.1 Checking Site Commissioning Conditions


Before performing site commissioning, ensure that the equipment and weather conditions meet
the requirements for site commissioning.
The requirements are listed as follows:
l

Hardware installation has been completed and has passed the installation check.

Power is available for the equipment.

Service signal cables have been properly routed.

Onsite conditions meet the requirements for antennas to work at their given heights, and
the commissioning personnel are trained to work at these heights.

There are no adverse weather conditions (such as strong wind, rain, snow, or fog) that could
hinder or affect commissioning.

2.4.2 Checking System Commissioning Conditions


Before performing system commissioning, ensure that the equipment and weather meet the
requirements for system commissioning.
The requirements are listed as follows:
l

Site commissioning at both ends of a microwave link has been completed.

Data communication network (DCN) communication on the microwave transmission


network is normal.

There are no adverse weather conditions (such as strong wind, rain, snow, or fog) that could
hinder or affect commissioning.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

19

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

3 Commissioning Process

Commissioning Process

About This Chapter


Based on the objects to be commissioned, commissioning involves two stages: site
commissioning and system commissioning.
3.1 Site Commissioning Process
Site commissioning refers to the commissioning of one microwave link hop and the sites at both
ends of the hop. Site commissioning ensures that the sites and the microwave link between the
sites work properly. Site commissioning is a preparation for system commissioning.
3.2 System Commissioning Process
System commissioning refers to the commissioning of an entire microwave transmission
network. System commissioning ensures that various services are transmitted properly and
protection is implemented across the network.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

20

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

3 Commissioning Process

3.1 Site Commissioning Process


Site commissioning refers to the commissioning of one microwave link hop and the sites at both
ends of the hop. Site commissioning ensures that the sites and the microwave link between the
sites work properly. Site commissioning is a preparation for system commissioning.
You can use the following tools to configure site commissioning data for OptiX RTN 310:
l

USB flash drive

Web LCT

Site Commissioning Items (Using a USB Flash Drive to Configure Data)


Engineers can configure site commissioning data using a USB flash drive onsite if they:
l

Are familiar with the microwave link plan for the target sites.

Have a USB flash drive that contains the NE commissioning data.

Have a laptop on which the Web LCT is installed.

Table 3-1 Configuring site commissioning data using a USB flash drive
Commissioning Item

Remarks

Powering on the Equipment

Required.

Loading Commissioning Data Using a USB Flash Drive

Required.

Connecting the Web LCT to the Equipment

Required.

Creating NEs Using the Search Method

Required.

Synchronizing NE Time

Required.

Checking Alarms

Required.

Aligning Antennas*

Aligning Single-Polarized
Antennas

Required when radio services


are transmitted by singlepolarized antennas.

Aligning Dual-Polarized
Antennas

Required when radio services


are transmitted by dualpolarized antennas.

Checking the Microwave Link Status and Receive Power

Required.

NOTE

*: Before aligning antennas, power on the equipment and configure site commissioning data at both ends
of the microwave link.

Site Commissioning Items (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)


Engineers can configure site commissioning data using the Web LCT onsite if they:
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

21

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

3 Commissioning Process

Are familiar with how to configure microwave link data on OptiX RTN 310.

Are familiar with the microwave link plan for the target sites.

Have a laptop on which the Web LCT is installed.

Commissioning Item

Remarks

Powering on the Equipment

Required.

Connecting the Web LCT to the Equipment

Required.

Creating NEs Using the Search Method

Required.

Configuring Site
Commissioning Data

Changing an NE ID

Required.

Configuring NE
Communications
Parameters

Required.

Changing an NE Name

Optional.

Setting the VLAN ID and


Bandwidth for an Inband
DCN

Required.

Setting OSPF Protocol


Parameters

Optional.

Configuring a link
aggregation group (LAG)

Required when configuring


physical link aggregation
(PLA) or 1+1 HSB/FD/SD
with NE-level protection
(HSB is short for hot standby,
FD for frequency diversity,
and SD for space diversity).

Configuring an IF 1+1
Protection Group

Required when configuring a


microwave link with 1+1
protection.

Configuring a PLA Group

Required when configuring a


microwave link with PLA
protection.

Configuring Data for a Hop


of Microwave Link

Required.

Synchronizing the NE Time

Required.

Checking Alarms
Aligning Antennas*

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Required.
Aligning Single-Polarized
Antennas

Required when radio services


are transmitted by singlepolarized antennas.

Aligning Dual-Polarized
Antennas

Required when radio services


are transmitted by dualpolarized antennas.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

22

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

3 Commissioning Process

Commissioning Item

Remarks

Checking the Microwave Link Status and Receive Power

Required.

NOTE

*: Before aligning antennas, power on the equipment and configure site commissioning data at both ends
of the microwave link.

3.2 System Commissioning Process


System commissioning refers to the commissioning of an entire microwave transmission
network. System commissioning ensures that various services are transmitted properly and
protection is implemented across the network.
Table 3-2 System commissioning items
Commissioning Item

Remarks

6.1 Configuring Network-wide Service Data

Required.

6.2 Testing Ethernet


Services

6.2.1 Testing Ethernet


Services Configured on a
Per NE Basis

Required when Ethernet


services are configured on a
per NE basis.

6.2.2 Testing Ethernet


Services Configured in
End-to-End Mode

Required when Ethernet


services are configured in
end-to-end mode.

6.3 Testing AM Shifting


6.4 Testing Protection
Switching

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Required.
Testing Ethernet Ring
Protection Switching
(ERPS)

Required.

6.4.2 Testing 1+1


Protection Switching

Required when a microwave


link with 1+1 protection is
configured.

6.4.3 Testing PLA


Protection Switching

Required when a microwave


link with physical link
aggregation (PLA)
protection is configured.

6.5 Checking the Clock Status

Required.

6.6 Testing the Fade Margin over a Microwave Link

Optional.

6.7 Testing Ethernet


Service Performance

Required.

6.7.1 Testing the Latency,


Throughput, and Packet
Loss Ratio

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

23

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

3 Commissioning Process

Commissioning Item

Remarks
6.7.2 Testing the Long-term
Packet Loss Ratio

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Required.

24

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash


Drive to Configure Data)

About This Chapter


Site commissioning using a USB flash drive is highly efficient. Prior to site commissioning using
this method, ensure that configuration data stored in the USB flash drive is correct.
The commissioning process is as follows:
4.1 Powering on the Equipment
This section describes how to power on the equipment. By observing the equipment power-on
process, you can determine if the hardware system and power system are functioning properly.
4.2 Loading Commissioning Data Using a USB Flash Drive
While commissioning data is being loaded to an NE using a USB flash drive, NE software is
also upgraded simultaneously.
4.3 Connecting the Web LCT to the Equipment
Properly connecting the Web LCT to the equipment is a prerequisite for configuring
commissioning data for the equipment.
4.4 Creating NEs Using the Search Method
The search method is generally used to create an NE during site commissioning.
4.5 Synchronizing NE Time
Adjust the NE time so that it is synchronized with the time on the Web LCT. This ensures that
the NE accurately records the time when an alarm, a performance event, or an abnormal event
occurs.
4.6 Checking Alarms
Checking alarms generated by equipment helps you to determine whether the equipment is
functioning properly.
4.7 Aligning Antennas
Antenna alignment is the most important activity in site commissioning, as antenna alignment
has a direct effect on microwave link performance.
4.8 Checking the Microwave Link Status and Receive Power

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

25

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

After antenna alignment, check whether the status of a microwave link is normal and whether
the receive power meets requirements.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

26

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

4.1 Powering on the Equipment


This section describes how to power on the equipment. By observing the equipment power-on
process, you can determine if the hardware system and power system are functioning properly.

Prerequisites
l

Hardware installation has been completed and has passed the installation check.

A suitable power supply is available. The voltage, polarity, and fuse capacity of the power
supply have been checked.

The power supply (for example, the cabinet power distribution box) is switched off.

Power cables are connected correctly.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Context
Table 4-1 lists the fuse capacity recommended for OptiX RTN 310.
Table 4-1 Fuse capacity
Chassis

Recommended Fuse Capacity

OptiX RTN 310

6 A to 12 A

Precautions

CAUTION
l If the output voltage of the power supply does not meet test requirements, do not switch on
the power supply and propose rectification suggestions.
l If power cables are connected to the OptiX RTN 310 incorrectly, reconnect the power cables
before switch on the power supply. Otherwise, the circuit breakers in the power distribution
box will be switched off and the power cables will be damaged.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the desired procedure to switch on the power supply based on the actual scenario.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

27

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

2
PWR

P&E

MGMT

P&E
P&E

NMS/COM

P&E

3/P1

EG4P

Power over Ethernet is used.

A DC power supply is used.

Interconnected with OptiX RTN 900

If...

Then...

Power over Ethernet is used

Perform Step 2 and Step 3.

A DC power supply is used

Perform Step 4.

OptiX RTN 310 is interconnected with OptiX


RTN 900

Perform Step 5 to Step 7.

Step 2 Verify that the P&E cable and power injector (PI) power cable are correctly connected. Switch
on the power supply and observe the PI indicators.

Power supply equipment


Blue: -48 V
Black: 0 V ground cable

(-)
(+)

Normally, the DC IN and P&E OUT indicators on the PI are steady green.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

28

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

NOTE

l If the DC IN indicator is steady green but the P&E OUT indicator blinks green, check whether the P&E
cable or OptiX RTN 310 is short-circuited.
l If the DC IN indicator is steady green but the P&E OUT indicator is off, check whether the P&E cable or
PI is faulty.

Step 3 Observe the system indicator on the OptiX RTN 310 to check whether the equipment is
successfully powered on.

System indicator

USB/RSSI/NMS

Normally, the system indicator in the USB/RSSI/NMS port on the OptiX RTN 310 is steady
green.
NOTE

If the system indicator is steady red, check whether the P&E cable or OptiX RTN 310 is faulty.

Step 4 Verify that the DC power cable is correctly connected and switch on the power supply. Observe
the system indicator on the OptiX RTN 310 to check whether the equipment is successfully
powered on.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

29

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

System indicator

PWR

Front view

Positive

Negative

USB/RSSI/NMS

Power supply equipment


Brown: 0 V ground cable

Blue: -48 V

(+)
(-)

Normally, the system indicator in the USB/RSSI/NMS port on the OptiX RTN 310 is steady
green.
NOTE

l If the system indicator is off, check the output voltage and polarity of the power supply. If the output
voltage or polarity is incorrect, locate the fault.
l If the system indicator is steady red, check whether the OptiX RTN 310 is faulty.

Step 5 Power on the OptiX RTN 900, observe the 3/P1 or 4/P2 indicator on the EG4P board on the
OptiX RTN 900 that is connected to the P&E port on the OptiX RTN 310.
If...

Then...

The 3/P1 or 4/P2 indicator on the EG4P board is off

Go to the next step.

The 3/P1 or 4/P2 indicator on the EG4P board is on

Perform Step 7.

Step 6 Connect the Web LCT to the OptiX RTN 900. Enable the power over Ethernet function for the
port on the EG4P board that is connected to the OptiX RTN 310 by using the Web LCT.
1.

In NE Explorer, choose the desired NE from the object tree and choose Configuration >
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from Function Tree.

2.

Click the Advanced Attributes tab.

3.

Set PoE to Enabled for the port on the EG4P board that is connected to the OptiX RTN
310.

4.

Click Apply.

Step 7 Verify that the P&E cable is correctly connected, and observe the system indicator on the OptiX
RTN 310 to check whether the equipment is successfully powered on.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

30

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

System indicator

P&E

USB/RSSI/NMS
NMS/COM

3/P1

4/P1

STAT
SRV
L/A1
L/A2
L/A3
L/A4
P1
P2

EG4P

OUT1/IN1

EG4P

OUT2/IN2

3/P1

4/P1

OUT2/IN2

3/P1

4/P1

L/A4
P1
P2

L/A3

OUT1/IN1

Power over
Ethernet indicators

OUT2/IN2

STAT
SRV
L/A1
L/A2
L/A3
L/A4
P1
P2

STAT
SRV
L/A1
L/A2
L/A3
L/A4
P1
P2

EG4P

RTN 950
OUT1/IN1

EG4P
3/P1

4/P2

The 3/P1 and 4/P2 ports on the EG4P board provide power over Ethernet capabilities. The 3/P1
port is used in this example. Normally, the L/A3 indicator on the EG4P board of the OptiX RTN
900 is steady green or blinks yellow, and the 3/P1 indicator on the EG4P board and the system
indicator in the USB/RSSI/NMS port on the OptiX RTN 310 are steady green.
NOTE

l If the L/A3 indicator on the EG4P board of the OptiX RTN 900 is off, check whether the P&E cable
or OptiX RTN 900 is faulty.
l If the 3/P1 indicator on the EG4P board of the OptiX RTN 900 is off, check whether the power over
Ethernet function is enabled.
l If the system indicator on the OptiX RTN 310 is steady red, check whether the P&E cable or OptiX
RTN 310 is faulty.

----End

4.2 Loading Commissioning Data Using a USB Flash Drive


While commissioning data is being loaded to an NE using a USB flash drive, NE software is
also upgraded simultaneously.

Prerequisites
l

The NE has been powered on.

Commissioning data has been loaded onto a USB flash drive.

The authentication certificate on the USB flash drive is correct.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

31

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


USB flash drive

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the metal protector from the USB/RSSI/NMS port.
Step 2 Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port.
USB/RSSI/NMS (bottom view)
USB
indicator

System
indicator

USB
interface

USB/RSSI/NMS

Step 3 Observe the USB indicator to check the data loading status.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

32

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

Status of the USB


Indicator

Data Loading Status

Operation

The USB indicator blinks


green, goes off, blinks green,
and turns steady green.

The loading of
commissioning data is
complete.

Remove the USB flash drive.

NOTE
l Do not remove the USB
flash drive while the USB
indicator is blinking green.
If the USB flash drive is
removed, the data loading
will be interrupted.
l When data is being loaded
from the USB flash drive,
the USB indicator blinks
green for the first time.
After the data loading is
complete, the NE
automatically resets, which
takes 2 minutes to 3
minutes, and the USB
indicator goes off. After the
reset is complete, the USB
indicator blinks green
again. Finally, the USB
indicator and the system
indicator on the NE are both
steady green, indicating
that the data loading is
successful.
l If only the script files are
loaded using the USB flash
drive, the USB indicator
blinks green for 1 second to
2 seconds and then the NE
resets automatically. In this
case, you may fail to notice
that the USB indicator has
blinked green because the
blinking duration is too
short.
l If the script files and
software package are
loaded using the USB flash
drive, the loading process
may last more than 10
minutes.

The USB indicator turns off


after the USB flash drive is
inserted.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

The USB flash drive is faulty


and has failed to go online.
NOTE
Another possible cause is that
the USB flash drive is not
properly inserted.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l Copy the commissioning


data to another USB flash
drive.
l Repeat Step 2 to load the
data to the NE.

33

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

Status of the USB


Indicator

Data Loading Status

Operation

The USB indicator blinks


red.

An incorrect model of USB


flash drive has been inserted,
or an error has occurred when
the NE attempted to read/
write the USB flash drive.

l Copy the commissioning


data to another USB flash
drive of the correct
model.

NOTE
2.2 Preparing a USB Flash
Drive provides the model of
USB flash drive supported by
OptiX RTN 310.

The USB indicator is steady


red.

The loaded data is incorrect.

l Repeat Step 2 to load the


data to the NE.

Handle the fault by following


instructions in 7.1 When a
USB Flash Drive Is Used
for Loading
Commissioning Data, Some
Commands Fail to Be
Loaded.

----End

4.3 Connecting the Web LCT to the Equipment


Properly connecting the Web LCT to the equipment is a prerequisite for configuring
commissioning data for the equipment.

Prerequisites
OptiX RTN 310s have been powered on.
NOTE

When a USB flash drive is used for data configuration, connect the Web LCT to only one end of the microwave
link.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 Start the laptop and log in to the operating system.
Step 2 Set the IP address of the laptop.
The IP address must meet the following requirements:
l The IP address is in the same network segment (the default network segment is 129.9.0.0)
as the NE IP address, but is different from the NE IP address.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

34

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

l The subnet mask is the same as that for the NE IP address (the default subnet mask is
255.255.0.0).
l The default gateway IP address is blank.
Step 3 Connect the Web LCT to an OptiX RTN 310 in an appropriate way based on the site
configuration. For details, see Figure 4-1.

CAUTION
Ensure that each fiber/cable is properly connected to the correct port. Otherwise, the equipment
or the tool may be damaged.

Figure 4-1 Ways for connecting the Web LCT to an OptiX RTN 310

P&E

MGMT

P&E
P&E

USB/RSSI/NMS

NMS/COM

P&E

4/P2

NMS

Fiber

To NodeB
MGMT
P&E

EG4P

A network consisting of only OptiX RTN 310s


(using the PI)

A network consisting of both OptiX RTN 310s and


OptiX RTN 900s

A network consisting of only


OptiX RTN 310s

NOTE

l If a site has several cascaded OptiX RTN 310s, connect the laptop to only one of the OptiX RTN 310s.
l Use either a crossover cable or a straight-through cable to connect the laptop to the OptiX RTN 310. For
the wire sequences of crossover cables and straight-through cables, see Cable in the OptiX RTN 310
Microwave Transmission System Product Description.

After the Web LCT and the OptiX RTN 310 are properly connected, the indicator at the Ethernet
port of the laptop is steady green. A message is displayed indicating that the network has
established a local connection if the operating system has been configured to do so. If the
operating system displays a message indicating an IP address conflict, change the IP address of
the laptop.
Step 4 On the desktop, double-click the Start Web LCT icon.
The system displays the USER LOGIN window of the Web LCT.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

35

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

Step 5 Set User Name, Password, and Verification Code, and click Login.
l User Name: admin
l Password: Changeme_123
If the entered user name and password are correct, the NE List page is displayed.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
l

If a site has only OptiX RTN 310s and no PI is configured, remove the P&E cable from
the OptiX RTN 310 after the commissioning is complete.

If you cannot access the USER LOGIN window or the NE List page, configure the Internet
Explorer using the following method:

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

36

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

4.4 Creating NEs Using the Search Method


The search method is generally used to create an NE during site commissioning.

Prerequisites
l

The Web LCT is communicating properly with NEs.

The NE user has Operation Level rights or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Context
The following procedure:
l

Searches for NEs using the NE Search method if the NEs are connected directly to the
Web LCT using Ethernet cables.

Searches for NEs using the IP auto discovery method if the site has multiple NEs.

Procedure
Step 1 Search for NEs using the NE Search method if the NEs are connected directly to the Web LCT
using Ethernet cables.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

37

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

Step 2 Search for NEs using the IP auto discovery method if the site has multiple NEs.

----End

4.5 Synchronizing NE Time


Adjust the NE time so that it is synchronized with the time on the Web LCT. This ensures that
the NE accurately records the time when an alarm, a performance event, or an abnormal event
occurs.

Prerequisites
l

The basic data of all NEs on the network has been configured.

Time settings on the Web LCT are correct.

You must be an NM user with NE maintainer rights or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

38

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

Context
The following procedure synchronizes the NE time with the Web LCT time.

Procedure
Step 1 Synchronize the NE time with the Web LCT time.

----End

4.6 Checking Alarms


Checking alarms generated by equipment helps you to determine whether the equipment is
functioning properly.

Prerequisites
l

The Web LCT has been connected to the equipment.

Basic data has been configured for the equipment.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Context
The following procedure checks the alarms on an NE.

Procedure
Step 1 Check alarms.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

39

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

----End

4.7 Aligning Antennas


Antenna alignment is the most important activity in site commissioning, as antenna alignment
has a direct effect on microwave link performance.

4.7.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes


Before aligning antennas, engineers must be familiar with the following concepts regarding the
main lobe and side lobes.

Definition
The electric field strength of the radiated power of an antenna varies in space. The differences
of the power distribution can be shown in an azimuth diagram. Generally, there are two azimuth
diagrams illustrating the horizontal and vertical sections. These are the horizontal azimuth
diagram and vertical azimuth diagram. Figure 4-2 is a vertical azimuth diagram showing many
lobes. The lobe with the strongest radiated power is the main lobe, while the others are side
lobes. The first side lobe can be used for aligning the antenna.
Figure 4-2 Main lobe and side lobes

Main lobe
First side lobe
Second side lobe

Locating of the Main Lobe


Antenna alignment aligns the main lobe of the local antenna with the main lobe of the opposite
antenna, to achieve the maximum received signal strength at the opposite antenna.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

40

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

The main lobe width of a microwave antenna is narrow, specifically, between 0.6 and 3.7. For
instance, in the case of a 1.2 m antenna at a working frequency of 23 GHz, the azimuth is only
0.9 when the signal level drops from the signal peak to zero. Once a signal is detected, very
small alignment adjustments are required to locate the main lobe.
Antenna movement across the main lobe results in a rapid rise and drop in the signal level.
Whether the main lobe is aligned properly can be verified by comparing the received signal
peaks. Typically, the main lobe signal peak is 20-25 dB higher than the first side lobe signal
peak.
Figure 4-3 shows the head-on view of a free-space model for radio propagation with concentric
rings of side lobe peaks and troughs radiating outward from the main lobe.
Figure 4-3 Horizontal section and front view of the antenna
180o

90o

0o

Center of the main lobe


Outer edge of the main lobe, 3 to
10 dB lower than the main lobe
Trough between the main lobe
and the first side lobe, 30 dB
lower than the main lobe
First side lobe, 20-25 dB
lower than the main lobe

180o

90o

0o
a Horizontal section
of the antenna

b Head-on
view

Trough between the first side lobe


and the second side lobe, 30 dB or
more lower than the main lobe
Second side lobe, where
signals are very weak

Tracking Path
Side lobe signal readings are sometimes mistaken for main lobe readings when signals are
tracked on different elevations (or azimuths). Figure 4-4 shows a horizontal radio propagation
model of an antenna, and signal levels at three different elevation positions (1-7 represent the
measured signal level values of the received signal strength indicator [RSSI] port of the OptiX
RTN 310).

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

Figure 4-4 Three tracking paths


Head-on view of tracking paths for
different elevations

Signal level for each path


6 7

C
1

C'

B'
3

C'

B'

A'

2
1

3
A'

Line AA' indicates that the main lobe of the antenna is almost aligned properly. The main
lobe is at point 2, and the first side lobes are at points 1 and 3. Slightly adjust the azimuth
of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.

Line BB' indicates that the elevation of the antenna slightly deviates from the main lobe.
The signal peaks appear at points 4 and 5. The signal peak at point 4 is higher than the
signal peak at point 5 because of the antenna characteristics. As a result, point 4 may be
mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correct method is to set the azimuth
of the antenna to the middle position between the two signal peaks. Then, adjust the
elevation of the antenna until the three signal peaks of line AA' appear. Slightly adjust the
elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.

Line CC' indicates that the elevation of the antenna completely deviates from the main lobe
and is almost aligned with the first side lobe. The signal peak of the first side lobe at point
6 and the signal peak of the first side lobe at point 7 appear as one signal peak. As a result,
points 6 and 7 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correct
method is to set the azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 6 and 7. Then, adjust
the elevation of the antenna until the three signal peaks of line AA' appear. Slightly adjust
the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.

When the side lobe peak on one side is higher than the side lobe peak at the other side, as shown
in Figure 4-5, a common error is moving the antenna from left to right along line DD', or top
to bottom along line EE'. As a result, point 1 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main
lobe signal. The correct method is to adjust the elevation in the middle of points 1 and 2 or the
azimuth in the middle of points 1 and 3. Several adjustments are required to ensure that the three
signal peaks of line AA' can appear. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at
point 2 as shown in Figure 4-4 until the peak signal appears.
Figure 4-5 Aligning the antenna with the first side lobe
E
1

D'

D
D'
1

3
E'

E'

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

42

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

4.7.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas


When aligning single-polarized antennas, align the main lobes by adjusting the azimuth and
elevation of the antennas at both ends.

Prerequisites
l

The preceding site commissioning items have been completed at both ends of a microwave
link.

The weather conditions at both ends are suitable for outdoor operations, and there is no
threat of rain, snow, fog or other unfavorable conditions that could interfere with the
procedure.

Onsite conditions meet the requirements for antennas to work at their given heights, and
the commissioning personnel are trained to work at these heights.

A properly calibrated multimeter is available.

The automatic transmit power control (ATPC) function has been disabled (this function is
disabled by default).

The adaptive modulation (AM) function has been disabled (this function is disabled by
default).

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l

Adjustable wrench

Interphone

Hex key (delivered with antennas)

North-stabilized indicator

Telescope

Multimeter

Received signal strength indicator (RSSI) test cables (delivered with OptiX RTN 310)

CAUTION
You can change the azimuth and elevation of the antennas by adjusting the nuts or screws. For
details, see the antenna installation guide. Steps provided in this section are for reference only.

Precautions
l

If the microwave link needs to be configured with 1+1 protection, configure 1+1 protection
after antenna alignment.

If the microwave link is configured with 1+1 protection and only one antenna is used at
each end, power off the standby OptiX RTN 310s at both ends before aligning the antennas.
After the antennas are aligned, power on the standby OptiX RTN 310s.

If the microwave link is configured with 1+1 space diversity (SD) protection, align the
antennas in the following sequence:

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

43

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

1.

Power on the main OptiX RTN 310s at both ends. Ensure that they are always powered
on during the alignment process.

2.

Power off the standby OptiX RTN 310s and align the main antennas at both ends.

3.

Power on the standby OptiX RTN 310 at the local end. Retain the position of the main
antenna at the remote end, and adjust the diversity antenna at the local end.

4.

Power on the standby OptiX RTN 310 at the remote end. Retain the position of the
main antenna at the local end, and adjust the diversity antenna at the remote end.

If the microwave link is configured with 1+1 frequency diversity (FD) protection and two
antennas are used at each end, align the antennas in the following sequence:
1.

Power on the main OptiX RTN 310s, power off the standby OptiX RTN 310s, and
align the main antennas at both ends.

2.

Power off the main OptiX RTN 310s, power on the standby OptiX RTN 310s, and
align the diversity antennas at both ends.

Procedure
Step 1 Calculate the voltage value (VBNC) for the RSSI port corresponding to the planned received
signal level (RSL) based on the RSSI and RSL curves.
NOTE

The curve diagram for VBNC and RSL is delivered along with the OptiX RTN 310.

Step 2 Determine the azimuth of the antenna at the local end based on the installation position and
height of the antenna. Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna to the horizontal position.
NOTE

For a special microwave link (for example, a microwave link with one end on a mountain top and the other end
at the foot of the mountain), the inclination between the link and the horizontal line is greater than the half-power
angle of the antenna. Slightly adjust the elevation of the antenna so the main lobes are aligned vertically.

Step 3 Connect a multimeter to the RSSI port on the OptiX RTN 310 at the local end using an RSSI
test fiber and test the voltage value VBNC. Turn the multimeter to the DC power level with the
voltage value 20 V.
TIP

It is recommended that you fix the multimeter to the tower with adhesive tape at your plain view, so that
you can observe the RSSI voltage value while aligning antennas.

Figure 4-6 Testing the RSSI voltage using a multimeter

USB/RSSI/NMS

USB RSSI

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

44

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

Step 4 Adjust the azimuth and elevation of the antenna as follows:


1.

Keep the remote antenna fixed.

2.

Loosen the antenna brackets, rotate the antenna horizontally within a large range, and
observe the value of VBNC on the multimeter. When the value is not 0, secure the antenna
brackets.

3.

Loosen the fine adjustment bolts, rotate the antenna horizontally, and observe the peak
values of VBNC on the multimeter.
Normally, three signal peaks are tracked, as shown in Figure 4-7.
Figure 4-7 Signal peaks
2
1

CAUTION
If the number of tracked signal peaks is fewer than three, even after a wide rotation and
careful observation of the multimeter, refer to 4.7.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes for help
with handling the exception.
4.

Adjust the antenna azimuth until the signal strength reaches position 2 shown in Figure
4-7. When the signal strength is at position 2, the value of VBNC is the peak value.

5.

Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth at point 2 until VBNC reaches the peak value within
the tracked range.

6.

Secure the antenna at the local end.


NOTE

When securing the antenna, ensure that VBNC remains at the peak value.

Step 5 Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 to adjust the antenna at the remote end. When VBNC reaches the peak
value, secure the antenna at the remote end.
Step 6 Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 for two to four times. When VBNC at the local end and VBNC at the
remote end reach the peak value, secure the antennas at both ends.
NOTE

l Perform slight adjustments in this step.


l After the adjustments are complete and antennas at both ends are secured, the VBNC value must reach or
exceed the VBNC value obtained in Step 1.

----End

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

45

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

4.7.3 Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas


When aligning dual-polarized antennas, align the main lobes by adjusting the azimuth and
elevation of the antennas at both ends. Engineers also need to adjust the feed booms of the
antennas so that cross-polarization discrimination (XPD) meets requirements.

Prerequisites
l

The preceding site commissioning items have been completed at both ends of a microwave
link.

The weather conditions at both ends are suitable for outdoor operations, and there is no
threat of rain, snow, fog or other unfavorable conditions that could interfere with the
procedure.

Onsite conditions meet the requirements for antennas to work at their given heights, and
the commissioning personnel are trained to work at these heights.

A properly calibrated multimeter is available.

The automatic transmit power control (ATPC) function has been disabled (this function is
disabled by default).

The adaptive modulation (AM) function has been disabled (this function is disabled by
default).

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l

Adjustable wrench

Interphone

Hex key (delivered with antennas)

North-stabilized indicator

Telescope

Multimeter

Received signal strength indicator (RSSI) test cables (delivered with )

Special spanner for the orthogonal mode transducer (OMT) (delivered with the OMT)

Context
NOTE

The following procedure assumes that the s at both ends are installed separately from antennas. If the s at both
ends need to be connected directly to an OMT, the OMT should be adjusted instead of the antenna feed boom.

Procedure
Step 1 Power off the vertically polarized s and power on the horizontally polarized s at both ends of
the microwave link. Ensure that the antennas at both ends are transmitting horizontally polarized
signals.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

46

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

Vertically polarized RTN 310

Horizontally polarized RTN 310


Switch off

Power
supply

Step 2 Adjust the azimuth angle and elevation angle of the antennas at both ends by referring to 4.7.2
Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas, and ensure that the main lobes of the horizontally
polarized signals are aligned.
Step 3 Measure the received signal level (RSL) of the horizontally polarized signals, that is, P1, at the
local end.
1.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Use a multimeter to measure the RSL at the RSSI port of the horizontally polarized .

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

47

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

Vertically polarized RTN 310

Horizontally polarized RTN 310

3.62

2.

Calculate the RSL of the horizontally polarized signals, that is, P1, by referring to the curve
diagram delivered with the .

Step 4 Adjust the feed boom at the local end, and ensure that the RSL of the vertically polarized signals
reaches the lower threshold (P2).
1.

Power on the vertically polarized at the local end.

2.

Use a multimeter to measure the RSL at the RSSI port of the vertically polarized .

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

48

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

Vertically polarized RTN 310

3.62

Horizontally polarized RTN 310

3.

Calculate the RSL (P2) of the vertically polarized signals by referring to the curve diagram
in the box.

4.

Calculate the XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2).

5.

If...

Then...

The calculated XPD1 is less than 30 dB

Go to the next step.

The calculated XPD1 is greater than or equal to 30 dB

Go to Step 5.

Release the feed boom holder slightly, and turn the feed boom slightly until the RSL reaches
the lower threshold and the calculated XPD1 is greater than or equal to 30 dB.

Step 5 Record the angle (D1) of the current feed boom.


Step 6 At both ends of the microwave link, power off the horizontally polarized s and power on the
vertically polarized s. Ensure that the antennas at both ends are transmitting vertically polarized
signals.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

49

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

Vertically polarized RTN 310

Horizontally polarized RTN 310

Power
supply

Switch off

Step 7 Measure the RSL (P3) of the vertically polarized signals at the local end by referring to Step
3.
Step 8 Adjust the feed boom at the local end, and ensure that the RSL of the horizontally polarized
signals reaches the lower threshold (P4).
1.

Power on the horizontally polarized at the local end.

2.

Use a multimeter to measure the RSL at the RSSI port of the horizontally polarized .

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

50

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

Vertically polarized RTN 310

Horizontally polarized RTN 310

3.62

3.

Calculate the RSL (P4) of the horizontally polarized signals by referring to the curve
diagram delivered with the .

4.

Calculate the XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4).

5.

If...

Then...

The calculated XPD2 is less than 30 dB

Go to the next step.

The calculated XPD2 is greater than or equal to 30 dB

Go to Step 9.

Release the feed boom holder slightly, and turn the feed boom slightly until the RLS reaches
the lower threshold and the calculated XPD2 is greater than or equal to 30 dB.

Step 9 Record the angle (D2) of the current feed boom.


Step 10 Adjust the feed boom slightly (ranging from D1 to D2), and ensure that XPD1 and XPD2 are
greater than or equal to 30 dB.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

51

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

NOTE

If D1 and D2 are the same, you do not need to adjust the feed boom.

Step 11 Tighten all the screws on the antennas.


NOTE

Use the multimeter to measure the RSL at the RSSI port again to ensure that no movement occurred during the
screw tightening process.

----End

Related Information
In practice, you can align vertically polarized antennas first. If XPD can meet requirements after
the vertically polarized antennas are aligned, you do not need to align horizontally polarized
antennas. Otherwise, you need to go on to align the horizontally polarized antennas.

4.8 Checking the Microwave Link Status and Receive Power


After antenna alignment, check whether the status of a microwave link is normal and whether
the receive power meets requirements.

Prerequisites
l

Antennas have been aligned.

The basic data of NEs on the entire network has been configured.

You must be an NM user with NE maintainer rights or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Context
The following procedure checks the microwave link status and receive power.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

52

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

Procedure
Step 1 Check the microwave link status and receive power.

NOTE

If the receive power does not meet design requirements, handle the fault by following instructions in 7.2
The Receive Power Does not Meet the Design Requirements.

----End

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

53

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to


Configure Data)

About This Chapter


Site commissioning using the Web LCT requires that commissioning engineers be capable of
configuring NE data.
The commissioning process is as follows:
5.1 Powering on the Equipment
This section describes how to power on the equipment. By observing the equipment power-on
process, you can determine if the hardware system and power system are functioning properly.
5.2 Connecting the Web LCT to the Equipment
Properly connecting the Web LCT to the equipment is a prerequisite for configuring
commissioning data for the equipment.
5.3 Creating NEs Using the Search Method
The search method is generally used to create an NE during site commissioning.
5.4 Configuring Site Commissioning Data
During site commissioning, you do not need to configure Ethernet service data. By default, the
NE creates an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) service for
transmitting Ethernet services.
5.5 Checking Alarms
Checking alarms generated by equipment helps you to determine whether the equipment is
functioning properly.
5.6 Aligning Antennas
Antenna alignment is the most important activity in site commissioning, as antenna alignment
has a direct effect on microwave link performance.
5.7 Checking the Microwave Link Status and Receive Power
After antenna alignment, check whether the status of a microwave link is normal and whether
the receive power meets requirements.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

54

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

5.1 Powering on the Equipment


This section describes how to power on the equipment. By observing the equipment power-on
process, you can determine if the hardware system and power system are functioning properly.

Prerequisites
l

Hardware installation has been completed and has passed the installation check.

A suitable power supply is available. The voltage, polarity, and fuse capacity of the power
supply have been checked.

The power supply (for example, the cabinet power distribution box) is switched off.

Power cables are connected correctly.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Context
Table 5-1 lists the fuse capacity recommended for OptiX RTN 310.
Table 5-1 Fuse capacity
Chassis

Recommended Fuse Capacity

OptiX RTN 310

6 A to 12 A

Precautions

CAUTION
l If the output voltage of the power supply does not meet test requirements, do not switch on
the power supply and propose rectification suggestions.
l If power cables are connected to the OptiX RTN 310 incorrectly, reconnect the power cables
before switch on the power supply. Otherwise, the circuit breakers in the power distribution
box will be switched off and the power cables will be damaged.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the desired procedure to switch on the power supply based on the actual scenario.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

55

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

2
PWR

P&E

MGMT

P&E
P&E

NMS/COM

P&E

3/P1

EG4P

Power over Ethernet is used.

A DC power supply is used.

Interconnected with OptiX RTN 900

If...

Then...

Power over Ethernet is used

Perform Step 2 and Step 3.

A DC power supply is used

Perform Step 4.

OptiX RTN 310 is interconnected with OptiX


RTN 900

Perform Step 5 to Step 7.

Step 2 Verify that the P&E cable and power injector (PI) power cable are correctly connected. Switch
on the power supply and observe the PI indicators.

Power supply equipment


Blue: -48 V
Black: 0 V ground cable

(-)
(+)

Normally, the DC IN and P&E OUT indicators on the PI are steady green.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

56

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

NOTE

l If the DC IN indicator is steady green but the P&E OUT indicator blinks green, check whether the P&E
cable or OptiX RTN 310 is short-circuited.
l If the DC IN indicator is steady green but the P&E OUT indicator is off, check whether the P&E cable or
PI is faulty.

Step 3 Observe the system indicator on the OptiX RTN 310 to check whether the equipment is
successfully powered on.

System indicator

USB/RSSI/NMS

Normally, the system indicator in the USB/RSSI/NMS port on the OptiX RTN 310 is steady
green.
NOTE

If the system indicator is steady red, check whether the P&E cable or OptiX RTN 310 is faulty.

Step 4 Verify that the DC power cable is correctly connected and switch on the power supply. Observe
the system indicator on the OptiX RTN 310 to check whether the equipment is successfully
powered on.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

57

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

System indicator

PWR

Front view

Positive

Negative

USB/RSSI/NMS

Power supply equipment


Brown: 0 V ground cable

Blue: -48 V

(+)
(-)

Normally, the system indicator in the USB/RSSI/NMS port on the OptiX RTN 310 is steady
green.
NOTE

l If the system indicator is off, check the output voltage and polarity of the power supply. If the output
voltage or polarity is incorrect, locate the fault.
l If the system indicator is steady red, check whether the OptiX RTN 310 is faulty.

Step 5 Power on the OptiX RTN 900, observe the 3/P1 or 4/P2 indicator on the EG4P board on the
OptiX RTN 900 that is connected to the P&E port on the OptiX RTN 310.
If...

Then...

The 3/P1 or 4/P2 indicator on the EG4P board is off

Go to the next step.

The 3/P1 or 4/P2 indicator on the EG4P board is on

Perform Step 7.

Step 6 Connect the Web LCT to the OptiX RTN 900. Enable the power over Ethernet function for the
port on the EG4P board that is connected to the OptiX RTN 310 by using the Web LCT.
1.

In NE Explorer, choose the desired NE from the object tree and choose Configuration >
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from Function Tree.

2.

Click the Advanced Attributes tab.

3.

Set PoE to Enabled for the port on the EG4P board that is connected to the OptiX RTN
310.

4.

Click Apply.

Step 7 Verify that the P&E cable is correctly connected, and observe the system indicator on the OptiX
RTN 310 to check whether the equipment is successfully powered on.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

58

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

System indicator

P&E

USB/RSSI/NMS
NMS/COM

3/P1

4/P1

STAT
SRV
L/A1
L/A2
L/A3
L/A4
P1
P2

EG4P

OUT1/IN1

EG4P

OUT2/IN2

3/P1

4/P1

OUT2/IN2

3/P1

4/P1

L/A4
P1
P2

L/A3

OUT1/IN1

Power over
Ethernet indicators

OUT2/IN2

STAT
SRV
L/A1
L/A2
L/A3
L/A4
P1
P2

STAT
SRV
L/A1
L/A2
L/A3
L/A4
P1
P2

EG4P

RTN 950
OUT1/IN1

EG4P
3/P1

4/P2

The 3/P1 and 4/P2 ports on the EG4P board provide power over Ethernet capabilities. The 3/P1
port is used in this example. Normally, the L/A3 indicator on the EG4P board of the OptiX RTN
900 is steady green or blinks yellow, and the 3/P1 indicator on the EG4P board and the system
indicator in the USB/RSSI/NMS port on the OptiX RTN 310 are steady green.
NOTE

l If the L/A3 indicator on the EG4P board of the OptiX RTN 900 is off, check whether the P&E cable
or OptiX RTN 900 is faulty.
l If the 3/P1 indicator on the EG4P board of the OptiX RTN 900 is off, check whether the power over
Ethernet function is enabled.
l If the system indicator on the OptiX RTN 310 is steady red, check whether the P&E cable or OptiX
RTN 310 is faulty.

----End

5.2 Connecting the Web LCT to the Equipment


Properly connecting the Web LCT to the equipment is a prerequisite for configuring
commissioning data for the equipment.

Prerequisites
OptiX RTN 310s have been powered on.
NOTE

When a USB flash drive is used for data configuration, connect the Web LCT to only one end of the microwave
link.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

59

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 Start the laptop and log in to the operating system.
Step 2 Set the IP address of the laptop.
The IP address must meet the following requirements:
l The IP address is in the same network segment (the default network segment is 129.9.0.0)
as the NE IP address, but is different from the NE IP address.
l The subnet mask is the same as that for the NE IP address (the default subnet mask is
255.255.0.0).
l The default gateway IP address is blank.
Step 3 Connect the Web LCT to an OptiX RTN 310 in an appropriate way based on the site
configuration. For details, see Figure 5-1.

CAUTION
Ensure that each fiber/cable is properly connected to the correct port. Otherwise, the equipment
or the tool may be damaged.

Figure 5-1 Ways for connecting the Web LCT to an OptiX RTN 310

P&E

MGMT

P&E
P&E

USB/RSSI/NMS

NMS/COM

P&E

4/P2

NMS

Fiber

To NodeB
MGMT
P&E

EG4P

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

A network consisting of only OptiX RTN 310s


(using the PI)

A network consisting of both OptiX RTN 310s and


OptiX RTN 900s

A network consisting of only


OptiX RTN 310s

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

60

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

NOTE

l If a site has several cascaded OptiX RTN 310s, connect the laptop to only one of the OptiX RTN 310s.
l Use either a crossover cable or a straight-through cable to connect the laptop to the OptiX RTN 310. For
the wire sequences of crossover cables and straight-through cables, see Cable in the OptiX RTN 310
Microwave Transmission System Product Description.

After the Web LCT and the OptiX RTN 310 are properly connected, the indicator at the Ethernet
port of the laptop is steady green. A message is displayed indicating that the network has
established a local connection if the operating system has been configured to do so. If the
operating system displays a message indicating an IP address conflict, change the IP address of
the laptop.
Step 4 On the desktop, double-click the Start Web LCT icon.
The system displays the USER LOGIN window of the Web LCT.

Step 5 Set User Name, Password, and Verification Code, and click Login.
l User Name: admin
l Password: Changeme_123
If the entered user name and password are correct, the NE List page is displayed.

----End

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

61

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Follow-up Procedure
l

If a site has only OptiX RTN 310s and no PI is configured, remove the P&E cable from
the OptiX RTN 310 after the commissioning is complete.

If you cannot access the USER LOGIN window or the NE List page, configure the Internet
Explorer using the following method:

5.3 Creating NEs Using the Search Method


The search method is generally used to create an NE during site commissioning.

Prerequisites
l

The Web LCT is communicating properly with NEs.

The NE user has Operation Level rights or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Context
The following procedure:
l

Searches for NEs using the NE Search method if the NEs are connected directly to the
Web LCT using Ethernet cables.

Searches for NEs using the IP auto discovery method if the site has multiple NEs.

Procedure
Step 1 Search for NEs using the NE Search method if the NEs are connected directly to the Web LCT
using Ethernet cables.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

62

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Step 2 Search for NEs using the IP auto discovery method if the site has multiple NEs.

----End

5.4 Configuring Site Commissioning Data


During site commissioning, you do not need to configure Ethernet service data. By default, the
NE creates an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) service for
transmitting Ethernet services.

Flowchart
Figure 5-2 shows the flowchart for configuring site commissioning data.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

63

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Figure 5-2 Configuration flowchart

Start

Change the NE ID.

Set NE communication
parameters.

Change the NE name.

Set the VLAN ID and


bandwidth for an inband DCN.

Configure OSPF parameters.

Configuring a LAG.

Configuring a microwave 1+1


protection group.

Configuring a PLA group

Configure data for a hop of


microwave link.
Required
Synchronize the NE time.

Optional

End

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

64

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Process
Table 5-2 Configuration procedure
Step

Operation

Remarks

Changing an NE ID

Required. Set parameters as follows:


l Set New ID according to the DCN plan.
l If a specific extended NE ID is required,
change New Extended ID to the
required one.

Configuring NE
Communications Parameters

Required if special requirements are


imposed on the IP address of the NE.
Configure the IP address and subnet mask
for the NE as required.
NOTE
If the IP address of an NE has not been changed
manually, the IP address changes with the NE
ID and is always 0x81000000 + NE ID.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Changing an NE Name

Optional.

Setting the VLAN ID and


Bandwidth for an Inband
DCN

Required.

Setting OSPF Protocol


Parameters

Optional.

Configuring a link
aggregation group (LAG)

Required when configuring physical link


aggregation (PLA) or 1+1 HSB/FD/SD
with NE-level protection (HSB is short for
hot standby, FD for frequency diversity,
and SD for space diversity).

Configuring a Microwave 1+1


Protection Group

Required when configuring a microwave


link with 1+1 protection.

Configuring a PLA Group

Required when configuring a microwave


link with PLA protection.

Configuring Data for a Hop of


Radio Link

Required.

10

Synchronizing the NE Time

Required. This operation synchronizes NE


time with the time on the computer that
runs the Web LCT.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

65

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

5.4.1 Changing an NE ID
Change the NE ID according to the engineering plan to ensure that each NE ID is unique. This
task does not interrupt services.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator rights or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

The Web LCT also supports this task. The steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Context
The following procedure changes an NE ID to the planned value listed in the following table.
Parameter

Value

New ID

320

Procedure
Step 1

----End

5.4.2 Setting NE Communication Parameters


NE communication parameters include the NE IP address, gateway IP address, and subnet mask.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator rights or higher.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

66

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

The Web LCT also supports this task. The steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Precautions
If multiple parameters need to be set, click Apply after setting each parameter.

Context
The following procedure sets the IP address and subnet mask of an NE to the planned values
listed in the following table.
Parameter

Value

IP Address

129.9.0.1

Subnet Mask

255.255.0.0

Procedure
Step 1

----End

5.4.3 Changing an NE Name


For easier identification of an NE in Main Topology, name the NE according to its geographical
location or the device to which it is connected.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator rights or higher.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

67

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

The Web LCT also supports this task. The steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Context
The following procedure changes an NE name to the planned value listed in the following table.
Parameter

Value

Name

Site2-1

Procedure
Step 1

----End

5.4.4 Setting the VLAN ID and Bandwidth for an Inband DCN


The VLAN ID used by an inband data communication network (DCN) must be different from
the VLAN ID used by services. The bandwidth of an inband DCN must meet the requirements
of the transmission network for managing messages.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator rights or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

The Web LCT also supports this task. The steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Context
The following procedure sets the VLAN ID and bandwidth to the planned values listed in the
following table for an inband DCN.
Parameter

Value

VLAN ID

4092

Bandwidth(Kbit/s)

1000bit/s

Procedure
Step 1

----End

5.4.5 Setting OSPF Protocol Parameters


When the OptiX RTN equipment is interconnected with third-party equipment, routing protocol
interaction works properly after you set Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol parameters
of the OptiX RTN equipment based on related requirements of the third-party equipment.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator rights or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

The Web LCT also supports this task. The steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Context
The following procedure configures OSPF parameters according to the planned parameter values
listed in the following table.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

69

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Parameter

Value

Area

0.0.0.1

OSPF Status

Enabled

Static route

Enabled

LAN Interface

Disabled

Procedure
Step 1

----End

5.4.6 Creating a LAG


If the bandwidth or availability of the Ethernet link between two NEs needs to be improved,
create a link aggregation group (LAG).

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator rights or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

The Web LCT also supports this task. The steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Context
The following procedure:
l

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Creates a non-load sharing LAG to protect the Ethernet link from a UNI-side equipment
to an NE, according to the planned parameter values listed in the following table.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

70

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Parameter

NE

LAG No.

Assign Automatically

LAG Name

LAG_01

LAG Type

Static (default value)

Load Sharing

Non-Sharing

LAG Priority

32768 (default value)

Packet Receive Timeout Period

Long period

LAG Min Active Link Threshold

Main Ports

1-SHXA2-3 (GE2)

Standby Ports

1-SHXA2-2 (GE1)

Creates a load-sharing LAG to increase the Ethernet bandwidth for a link between air
interfaces, according to the planned parameter values listed in the following table.
Parameter

NE

LAG No.

Assign Automatically

LAG Name

LAG_02

LAG Type

Static (default value)

Load Sharing

Sharing

LAG Priority

32768 (default value)

Packet Receive Timeout Period

Long period

LAG Min Active Link Threshold

Main Ports

1-SHXA2-1 (IF)

Standby Ports

1-SHXA2-2 (GE1)

Switch LAG upon Air Interface SD

Enabled

Create a LAG for configuring 1+1 or PLA protection according to the planned parameter
values listed in the following table.
Parameter

NE

LAG No.

Assign Automatically (default value).

LAG type

Static (default value)

Load sharing type

Non-load sharing (default value)

LAG priority

32768 (default value)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

71

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Parameter

NE

Main port

1-SHXA2-2 (GE1)

Procedure
Step 1 Create a non-load sharing LAG.

Step 2 Create a load-sharing LAG.

Step 3 Create a LAG for configuring 1+1 or PLA protection with NE-level protection.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

72

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

----End

5.4.7 Creating a Microwave 1+1 Protection Group


If microwave links are configured with 1+1 hot standby (HSB), frequency diversity (FD), or
space diversity (SD) protection, you need to create a corresponding microwave 1+1 protection
group.

Prerequisites
l

You must be an NM user with NE operator rights or higher.

An enhanced link aggregation group (E-LAG) has been configured.

1+1 protection cannot coexist with cross polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) or
physical link aggregation (PLA).

The Ethernet ports on the active and standby OptiX RTN 310s must both be P&E electrical
ports or GE optical ports, and work in Auto-negotiation mode. A static and non-load
sharing link aggregation group (LAG) has been created on each of the active and standby
OptiX RTN 310s. The LAG has only one member port, which is an Ethernet port.

Ethernet services are received/transmitted through either the GE optical port or the P&E
electrical port of an OptiX RTN 310. If Ethernet services are received/transmitted through
both ports, 1+1 protection cannot be successfully configured.

The COMBO ports on the active and standby OptiX RTN 310s are connected using an
optical fiber.

Logical Port Attribute has been set to Electrical Port if the Ethernet port in the 1+1
protection group is a P&E electrical port.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Context
The following procedure creates a microwave 1+1 protection group according to the planned
parameter values listed in the following table.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

73

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Parameter

Value

Working Mode

HSB

Reversion Mode

Revertive

WTR Time (s)

600 (default value)

Enable Reverse Switching

Enable

Working/Protection Unit Type

Working Unit

Service Port

1-SHXA2-2(GE1)

Procedure
Step 1

----End

5.4.8 Creating a PLA Group


When physical link aggregation (PLA) is required to improve Ethernet service bandwidth or
reliability on microwave links, you need to create a PLA group.

Prerequisites
l

You must be an NM user with NE operator rights or higher.

No Ethernet service has been configured on the slave NE if a PLA group without NE-level
protection will be created.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

74

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Context
The following procedure creates a PLA group according to the planned parameter values listed
in the following table.
Parameter

Value

Protection Type

NE-level LAG protection

NE Role

Slave

IF Port

1-SHXA2-1 (IF)

Service Port

1-SHXA2-2 (GE1)

Cascade Port

1-SHXA2-3 (GE2)

Procedure
Step 1

----End

5.4.9 Configuring a Single Hop of Microwave Link


By performing this task, you can set the basic attributes for the local NE and the peer NE on a
single hop of microwave link.

Prerequisites
l

You must be an NM user with NE operator rights or higher.

The sites at the two ends of a microwave link hop are communicating properly.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

75

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

NOTE

The Web LCT also supports this task. The steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Precautions
The following parameters of the NEs on a hop of microwave link are automatically synchronized:
Link ID, IF Channel Bandwidth, XPIC, AM, Modulation Mode of the Guaranteed AM
Capacity, Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity, Modulation Mode, T/R Spacing
(MHz), and ATPC. That is, if one of the preceding parameters is modified on an NE, the
modification is automatically duplicated on the peer NE.

Context
The following procedure configures basic information for the hop of microwave link shown in
the following figure by configuring NE1. The hop of microwave link is a member of a cross
polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) group.
NE3

NE1

V-polarization

GE

GE

COMBO

COMBO

COMBO

COMBO
H-polarization

GE
NE2

GE
NE4

The planned parameter values are listed in the following table.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

NE ID

9-2327(Local Radio
Terminal)

9-2322(Local Radio
Terminal)

9-2328(Opposite Radio
Terminal)

9-2323(Opposite Radio
Terminal)

Link ID

TX frequency at the TX high


site (MHz)

14920 (NE1)

14920 (NE2)

TX frequency at the TX low


site (MHz)

14500 (NE3)

14500 (NE4)

RF configuration mode

XPIC

XPIC

Polarization direction

V (vertical polarization)

H (horizontal polarization)

Radio working mode

28 MHz

28 MHz

AM

Disabled

Disabled

Modulation Mode

16QAM

16QAM

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

76

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

T/R Spacing (MHz)

420

420

ATPC

Disabled

Disabled

TX power (dBm)

22

22

RX power (dBm)

-26

-26

Procedure
Step 1

----End

5.4.10 Synchronizing NE Time


Adjust the NE time so that it is synchronized with the time on the Web LCT. This ensures that
the NE accurately records the time when an alarm, a performance event, or an abnormal event
occurs.

Prerequisites
l

The basic data of all NEs on the network has been configured.

Time settings on the Web LCT are correct.

You must be an NM user with NE maintainer rights or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Context
The following procedure synchronizes the NE time with the Web LCT time.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

77

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Procedure
Step 1 Synchronize the NE time with the Web LCT time.

----End

5.5 Checking Alarms


Checking alarms generated by equipment helps you to determine whether the equipment is
functioning properly.

Prerequisites
l

The Web LCT has been connected to the equipment.

Basic data has been configured for the equipment.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Context
The following procedure checks the alarms on an NE.

Procedure
Step 1 Check alarms.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

78

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

----End

5.6 Aligning Antennas


Antenna alignment is the most important activity in site commissioning, as antenna alignment
has a direct effect on microwave link performance.

5.6.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes


Before aligning antennas, engineers must be familiar with the following concepts regarding the
main lobe and side lobes.

Definition
The electric field strength of the radiated power of an antenna varies in space. The differences
of the power distribution can be shown in an azimuth diagram. Generally, there are two azimuth
diagrams illustrating the horizontal and vertical sections. These are the horizontal azimuth
diagram and vertical azimuth diagram. Figure 5-3 is a vertical azimuth diagram showing many
lobes. The lobe with the strongest radiated power is the main lobe, while the others are side
lobes. The first side lobe can be used for aligning the antenna.
Figure 5-3 Main lobe and side lobes

Main lobe
First side lobe
Second side lobe

Locating of the Main Lobe


Antenna alignment aligns the main lobe of the local antenna with the main lobe of the opposite
antenna, to achieve the maximum received signal strength at the opposite antenna.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

79

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

The main lobe width of a microwave antenna is narrow, specifically, between 0.6 and 3.7. For
instance, in the case of a 1.2 m antenna at a working frequency of 23 GHz, the azimuth is only
0.9 when the signal level drops from the signal peak to zero. Once a signal is detected, very
small alignment adjustments are required to locate the main lobe.
Antenna movement across the main lobe results in a rapid rise and drop in the signal level.
Whether the main lobe is aligned properly can be verified by comparing the received signal
peaks. Typically, the main lobe signal peak is 20-25 dB higher than the first side lobe signal
peak.
Figure 5-4 shows the head-on view of a free-space model for radio propagation with concentric
rings of side lobe peaks and troughs radiating outward from the main lobe.
Figure 5-4 Horizontal section and front view of the antenna
180o

90o

0o

Center of the main lobe


Outer edge of the main lobe, 3 to
10 dB lower than the main lobe
Trough between the main lobe
and the first side lobe, 30 dB
lower than the main lobe
First side lobe, 20-25 dB
lower than the main lobe

180o

90o

0o
a Horizontal section
of the antenna

b Head-on
view

Trough between the first side lobe


and the second side lobe, 30 dB or
more lower than the main lobe
Second side lobe, where
signals are very weak

Tracking Path
Side lobe signal readings are sometimes mistaken for main lobe readings when signals are
tracked on different elevations (or azimuths). Figure 5-5 shows a horizontal radio propagation
model of an antenna, and signal levels at three different elevation positions (1-7 represent the
measured signal level values of the received signal strength indicator [RSSI] port of the OptiX
RTN 310).

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

80

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Figure 5-5 Three tracking paths


Head-on view of tracking paths for
different elevations

Signal level for each path


6 7

C
1

C'

B'
3

C'

B'

A'

2
1

3
A'

Line AA' indicates that the main lobe of the antenna is almost aligned properly. The main
lobe is at point 2, and the first side lobes are at points 1 and 3. Slightly adjust the azimuth
of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.

Line BB' indicates that the elevation of the antenna slightly deviates from the main lobe.
The signal peaks appear at points 4 and 5. The signal peak at point 4 is higher than the
signal peak at point 5 because of the antenna characteristics. As a result, point 4 may be
mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correct method is to set the azimuth
of the antenna to the middle position between the two signal peaks. Then, adjust the
elevation of the antenna until the three signal peaks of line AA' appear. Slightly adjust the
elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.

Line CC' indicates that the elevation of the antenna completely deviates from the main lobe
and is almost aligned with the first side lobe. The signal peak of the first side lobe at point
6 and the signal peak of the first side lobe at point 7 appear as one signal peak. As a result,
points 6 and 7 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correct
method is to set the azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 6 and 7. Then, adjust
the elevation of the antenna until the three signal peaks of line AA' appear. Slightly adjust
the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.

When the side lobe peak on one side is higher than the side lobe peak at the other side, as shown
in Figure 5-6, a common error is moving the antenna from left to right along line DD', or top
to bottom along line EE'. As a result, point 1 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main
lobe signal. The correct method is to adjust the elevation in the middle of points 1 and 2 or the
azimuth in the middle of points 1 and 3. Several adjustments are required to ensure that the three
signal peaks of line AA' can appear. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at
point 2 as shown in Figure 5-5 until the peak signal appears.
Figure 5-6 Aligning the antenna with the first side lobe
E
1

D'

D
D'
1

3
E'

E'

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

81

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

5.6.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas


When aligning single-polarized antennas, align the main lobes by adjusting the azimuth and
elevation of the antennas at both ends.

Prerequisites
l

The preceding site commissioning items have been completed at both ends of a microwave
link.

The weather conditions at both ends are suitable for outdoor operations, and there is no
threat of rain, snow, fog or other unfavorable conditions that could interfere with the
procedure.

Onsite conditions meet the requirements for antennas to work at their given heights, and
the commissioning personnel are trained to work at these heights.

A properly calibrated multimeter is available.

The automatic transmit power control (ATPC) function has been disabled (this function is
disabled by default).

The adaptive modulation (AM) function has been disabled (this function is disabled by
default).

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l

Adjustable wrench

Interphone

Hex key (delivered with antennas)

North-stabilized indicator

Telescope

Multimeter

Received signal strength indicator (RSSI) test cables (delivered with OptiX RTN 310)

CAUTION
You can change the azimuth and elevation of the antennas by adjusting the nuts or screws. For
details, see the antenna installation guide. Steps provided in this section are for reference only.

Precautions
l

If the microwave link needs to be configured with 1+1 protection, configure 1+1 protection
after antenna alignment.

If the microwave link is configured with 1+1 protection and only one antenna is used at
each end, power off the standby OptiX RTN 310s at both ends before aligning the antennas.
After the antennas are aligned, power on the standby OptiX RTN 310s.

If the microwave link is configured with 1+1 space diversity (SD) protection, align the
antennas in the following sequence:

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

82

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

1.

Power on the main OptiX RTN 310s at both ends. Ensure that they are always powered
on during the alignment process.

2.

Power off the standby OptiX RTN 310s and align the main antennas at both ends.

3.

Power on the standby OptiX RTN 310 at the local end. Retain the position of the main
antenna at the remote end, and adjust the diversity antenna at the local end.

4.

Power on the standby OptiX RTN 310 at the remote end. Retain the position of the
main antenna at the local end, and adjust the diversity antenna at the remote end.

If the microwave link is configured with 1+1 frequency diversity (FD) protection and two
antennas are used at each end, align the antennas in the following sequence:
1.

Power on the main OptiX RTN 310s, power off the standby OptiX RTN 310s, and
align the main antennas at both ends.

2.

Power off the main OptiX RTN 310s, power on the standby OptiX RTN 310s, and
align the diversity antennas at both ends.

Procedure
Step 1 Calculate the voltage value (VBNC) for the RSSI port corresponding to the planned received
signal level (RSL) based on the RSSI and RSL curves.
NOTE

The curve diagram for VBNC and RSL is delivered along with the OptiX RTN 310.

Step 2 Determine the azimuth of the antenna at the local end based on the installation position and
height of the antenna. Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna to the horizontal position.
NOTE

For a special microwave link (for example, a microwave link with one end on a mountain top and the other end
at the foot of the mountain), the inclination between the link and the horizontal line is greater than the half-power
angle of the antenna. Slightly adjust the elevation of the antenna so the main lobes are aligned vertically.

Step 3 Connect a multimeter to the RSSI port on the OptiX RTN 310 at the local end using an RSSI
test fiber and test the voltage value VBNC. Turn the multimeter to the DC power level with the
voltage value 20 V.
TIP

It is recommended that you fix the multimeter to the tower with adhesive tape at your plain view, so that
you can observe the RSSI voltage value while aligning antennas.

Figure 5-7 Testing the RSSI voltage using a multimeter

USB/RSSI/NMS

USB RSSI

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

83

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Step 4 Adjust the azimuth and elevation of the antenna as follows:


1.

Keep the remote antenna fixed.

2.

Loosen the antenna brackets, rotate the antenna horizontally within a large range, and
observe the value of VBNC on the multimeter. When the value is not 0, secure the antenna
brackets.

3.

Loosen the fine adjustment bolts, rotate the antenna horizontally, and observe the peak
values of VBNC on the multimeter.
Normally, three signal peaks are tracked, as shown in Figure 5-8.
Figure 5-8 Signal peaks
2
1

CAUTION
If the number of tracked signal peaks is fewer than three, even after a wide rotation and
careful observation of the multimeter, refer to 4.7.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes for help
with handling the exception.
4.

Adjust the antenna azimuth until the signal strength reaches position 2 shown in Figure
5-8. When the signal strength is at position 2, the value of VBNC is the peak value.

5.

Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth at point 2 until VBNC reaches the peak value within
the tracked range.

6.

Secure the antenna at the local end.


NOTE

When securing the antenna, ensure that VBNC remains at the peak value.

Step 5 Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 to adjust the antenna at the remote end. When VBNC reaches the peak
value, secure the antenna at the remote end.
Step 6 Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 for two to four times. When VBNC at the local end and VBNC at the
remote end reach the peak value, secure the antennas at both ends.
NOTE

l Perform slight adjustments in this step.


l After the adjustments are complete and antennas at both ends are secured, the VBNC value must reach or
exceed the VBNC value obtained in Step 1.

----End

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

84

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

5.6.3 Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas


When aligning dual-polarized antennas, align the main lobes by adjusting the azimuth and
elevation of the antennas at both ends. Engineers also need to adjust the feed booms of the
antennas so that cross-polarization discrimination (XPD) meets requirements.

Prerequisites
l

The preceding site commissioning items have been completed at both ends of a microwave
link.

The weather conditions at both ends are suitable for outdoor operations, and there is no
threat of rain, snow, fog or other unfavorable conditions that could interfere with the
procedure.

Onsite conditions meet the requirements for antennas to work at their given heights, and
the commissioning personnel are trained to work at these heights.

A properly calibrated multimeter is available.

The automatic transmit power control (ATPC) function has been disabled (this function is
disabled by default).

The adaptive modulation (AM) function has been disabled (this function is disabled by
default).

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l

Adjustable wrench

Interphone

Hex key (delivered with antennas)

North-stabilized indicator

Telescope

Multimeter

Received signal strength indicator (RSSI) test cables (delivered with )

Special spanner for the orthogonal mode transducer (OMT) (delivered with the OMT)

Context
NOTE

The following procedure assumes that the s at both ends are installed separately from antennas. If the s at both
ends need to be connected directly to an OMT, the OMT should be adjusted instead of the antenna feed boom.

Procedure
Step 1 Power off the vertically polarized s and power on the horizontally polarized s at both ends of
the microwave link. Ensure that the antennas at both ends are transmitting horizontally polarized
signals.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

85

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Vertically polarized RTN 310

Horizontally polarized RTN 310


Switch off

Power
supply

Step 2 Adjust the azimuth angle and elevation angle of the antennas at both ends by referring to 4.7.2
Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas, and ensure that the main lobes of the horizontally
polarized signals are aligned.
Step 3 Measure the received signal level (RSL) of the horizontally polarized signals, that is, P1, at the
local end.
1.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Use a multimeter to measure the RSL at the RSSI port of the horizontally polarized .

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

86

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Vertically polarized RTN 310

Horizontally polarized RTN 310

3.62

2.

Calculate the RSL of the horizontally polarized signals, that is, P1, by referring to the curve
diagram delivered with the .

Step 4 Adjust the feed boom at the local end, and ensure that the RSL of the vertically polarized signals
reaches the lower threshold (P2).
1.

Power on the vertically polarized at the local end.

2.

Use a multimeter to measure the RSL at the RSSI port of the vertically polarized .

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

87

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Vertically polarized RTN 310

3.62

Horizontally polarized RTN 310

3.

Calculate the RSL (P2) of the vertically polarized signals by referring to the curve diagram
in the box.

4.

Calculate the XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2).

5.

If...

Then...

The calculated XPD1 is less than 30 dB

Go to the next step.

The calculated XPD1 is greater than or equal to 30 dB

Go to Step 5.

Release the feed boom holder slightly, and turn the feed boom slightly until the RSL reaches
the lower threshold and the calculated XPD1 is greater than or equal to 30 dB.

Step 5 Record the angle (D1) of the current feed boom.


Step 6 At both ends of the microwave link, power off the horizontally polarized s and power on the
vertically polarized s. Ensure that the antennas at both ends are transmitting vertically polarized
signals.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

88

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Vertically polarized RTN 310

Horizontally polarized RTN 310

Power
supply

Switch off

Step 7 Measure the RSL (P3) of the vertically polarized signals at the local end by referring to Step
3.
Step 8 Adjust the feed boom at the local end, and ensure that the RSL of the horizontally polarized
signals reaches the lower threshold (P4).
1.

Power on the horizontally polarized at the local end.

2.

Use a multimeter to measure the RSL at the RSSI port of the horizontally polarized .

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

89

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Vertically polarized RTN 310

Horizontally polarized RTN 310

3.62

3.

Calculate the RSL (P4) of the horizontally polarized signals by referring to the curve
diagram delivered with the .

4.

Calculate the XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4).

5.

If...

Then...

The calculated XPD2 is less than 30 dB

Go to the next step.

The calculated XPD2 is greater than or equal to 30 dB

Go to Step 9.

Release the feed boom holder slightly, and turn the feed boom slightly until the RLS reaches
the lower threshold and the calculated XPD2 is greater than or equal to 30 dB.

Step 9 Record the angle (D2) of the current feed boom.


Step 10 Adjust the feed boom slightly (ranging from D1 to D2), and ensure that XPD1 and XPD2 are
greater than or equal to 30 dB.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

90

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

NOTE

If D1 and D2 are the same, you do not need to adjust the feed boom.

Step 11 Tighten all the screws on the antennas.


NOTE

Use the multimeter to measure the RSL at the RSSI port again to ensure that no movement occurred during the
screw tightening process.

----End

Related Information
In practice, you can align vertically polarized antennas first. If XPD can meet requirements after
the vertically polarized antennas are aligned, you do not need to align horizontally polarized
antennas. Otherwise, you need to go on to align the horizontally polarized antennas.

5.7 Checking the Microwave Link Status and Receive Power


After antenna alignment, check whether the status of a microwave link is normal and whether
the receive power meets requirements.

Prerequisites
l

Antennas have been aligned.

The basic data of NEs on the entire network has been configured.

You must be an NM user with NE maintainer rights or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Context
The following procedure checks the microwave link status and receive power.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

91

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Procedure
Step 1 Check the microwave link status and receive power.

NOTE

If the receive power does not meet design requirements, handle the fault by following instructions in 7.2
The Receive Power Does not Meet the Design Requirements.

----End

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

92

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

System Commissioning

About This Chapter


This chapter describes the specific commissioning procedures for all system commissioning
items.
6.1 Configuring Network-wide Service Data
After site commissioning is performed for each hop of microwave link, embedded control
channel (ECC) communication between NEs is normal. Then, you can connect the U2000 to an
NE and configure network-wide service data.
6.2 Testing Ethernet Services
By testing Ethernet services, you can check whether the Ethernet services are available over
microwave links. Ethernet services can be tested using the ETH OAM function, and no dedicated
tester is required.
6.3 Testing AM Shifting
By simulating the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) of received signals, you can determine whether
to trigger AM shifting on OptiX RTN 310.
6.4 Testing Protection Switching
If services on a microwave network are protected, you need to test typical protection schemes
to verify the protection switching function.
6.5 Checking the Clock Status
Checking the clock status for all NEs on a microwave transmission network ensures that the NE
clocks are synchronized.
6.6 Testing the Fade Margin over a Microwave Link
The fade margin over a microwave link can be evaluated by measuring the mean square errors
(MSEs) at different received signal levels (RSLs).
6.7 Testing Ethernet Service Performance
This section describes how to test Ethernet service performance using the NE-inherent test
functions.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

93

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

6.1 Configuring Network-wide Service Data


After site commissioning is performed for each hop of microwave link, embedded control
channel (ECC) communication between NEs is normal. Then, you can connect the U2000 to an
NE and configure network-wide service data.

Context
NOTE

For details about how to configure network-wide service data, see 8 Configuring Networkwide Service
Data.

6.2 Testing Ethernet Services


By testing Ethernet services, you can check whether the Ethernet services are available over
microwave links. Ethernet services can be tested using the ETH OAM function, and no dedicated
tester is required.

6.2.1 Testing Ethernet Services Configured on a Per NE Basis


To test Ethernet services configured on a per NE basis, you must create ETH OAM manually.

Prerequisites
Ethernet services have been configured.
NOTE

If the Ethernet services to be tested are low-priority services, it is recommended that you perform the test when
weather conditions are favorable and the microwave link works in the highest-order modulation scheme.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Test Connection Diagram


The following procedure uses the Ethernet services from GE 1 on NE 1 to GE 1 on NE 2 as an
example, as shown in Figure 6-1.
Figure 6-1 Connection diagram for testing Ethernet services

NE 1

Microwave transmission network

GE 1

NE 2
GE 1

NodeB
VLAN ID = 100

VLAN ID = 100
RNC

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

94

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Procedure
Step 1 Test the Ethernet services between NE1 and NE2.

l If the value of LossRate in Result is 0, the test is successful.


l If the value of LossRate in Result is not 0, handle the problem based on the procedures in
the following table.
Cause

Handling Procedure

Connecting to the peer end fails within the


specified period.

Check whether services are interrupted.

Packets are lost.

Check whether the service traffic is higher


than the transmission bandwidth.
Check the link for bit errors.

----End

6.2.2 Testing Ethernet Services Configured in End-to-End Mode


The ETH OAM that is automatically created by services can be used to test Ethernet services
configured in end-to-end mode.

Prerequisites
Ethernet services have been configured.
NOTE

If the Ethernet services to be tested are low-priority services, it is recommended that you perform the test when
weather conditions are favorable and the microwave link works in the highest-order modulation scheme.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

95

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

NOTE

The Web LCT does not support this operation.

Test Connection Diagram


The following procedure uses the Ethernet services from GE 1 on NE 1 to GE 1 on NE 2 as an
example, as shown in Figure 6-2.
Figure 6-2 Connection diagram for testing Ethernet services

NE 1

Microwave transmission network

GE 1

NE 2
GE 1

NodeB
VLAN ID = 100

VLAN ID = 100
RNC

The following procedure:


1.

Verifies Ethernet line (E-Line) services transmitted in Native Ethernet mode.

2.

Verifies Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services transmitted in Native Ethernet
mode.

Procedure
Step 1 Verify E-Line services transmitted in Native Ethernet mode.

Step 2 Verify E-LAN services transmitted in Native Ethernet mode.


Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

96

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

----End

6.3 Testing AM Shifting


By simulating the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) of received signals, you can determine whether
to trigger AM shifting on OptiX RTN 310.

Prerequisites
l

Antennas have been aligned.

The adaptive modulation (AM) function has been enabled for the microwave link to be
tested.

Weather conditions are favorable.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT
NOTE

The U2000 does not support this operation.

Context
The following procedure tests the AM shifting function on an NE.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the AM attributes.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

97

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Step 2 Test one-click AM shifting.

----End

6.4 Testing Protection Switching


If services on a microwave network are protected, you need to test typical protection schemes
to verify the protection switching function.

6.4.1 Testing ERPS Switching


You can verify the Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) function by checking the port
status of the ERPS protection group before and after switching.

Prerequisites
l

ERPS has been configured for OptiX RTN 310s on a ring network.

Ethernet links on the ring network are connected correctly.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

98

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

The Web LCT also supports this task. The steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Context
The following procedure queries the port status change on the ring protection link (RPL) owner
node in an ERPS protection group before and after switching to check whether the ERPS function
is running properly.

Test Connection Diagram


In Figure 6-3, the Ethernet services between NE 1 and NE 6 are protected by ERPS, and NE 1
is the RPL owner node.
Figure 6-3 Configuration for testing ERPS
NE 4
E: IF
W: GE (GE2)

NE 3
E: GE (GE2)
W: IF

NE 5
E: GE (GE2)
W: IF

NE 6
E: IF
W: GE (GE2)

NE 2
E: IF
W: GE (GE2)

NE 7
E: GE (GE2)
W: IF

NE 8
E: IF
W: GE (GE2)

NE 1
E: GE (GE2)
W: IF
RPL owner

Ethernet cable
Ethernet service direction
Blocked port

Procedure
Step 1 Before switching, query the status of the ERPS protection group that is configured on NE 1.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

99

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Step 2 Test the availability of the Ethernet services. For details, see A.11.1.1 Testing Ethernet Services
Configured on a Per NE Basis.
The value of LossRate in Detection Result should be 0.
Step 3 Set TX Status to mute for NE 6.

Step 4 After switching, query the status of the ERPS protection group that is configured on NE 1.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

100

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Step 5 Test the availability of the Ethernet services. For details, see A.11.1.1 Testing Ethernet Services
Configured on a Per NE Basis.
The value of LossRate in Detection Result should be 0.
Step 6 Set TX Status to unmute for NE 6.

----End

6.4.2 Testing 1+1 Protection Switching


You can verify the 1+1 protection functions by checking the changes of the main and standby
devices before and after switching.

Prerequisites
l

Antenna alignment has been completed.

Ethernet services and 1+1 protection have been configured.

Static link aggregation groups (LAGs) have been configured for third-party devices.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

101

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Test Connection Diagram


Figure 6-4 Test connection diagram
The basic configurations are as follows:
l

Main OptiX RTN 310s: NE 11 and NE 12

Standby OptiX RTN 310s: NE 21 and NE 22


LAG

NE 11

NE 12

LAG

LAG

LAG

COMBO

COMBO

Antenna
NE 21

Antenna
NE 22
LAG

LAG

E-LAG

E-LAG
OptiX RTN 900
Ethernet link

Microwave link
Optical fiber

The Ethernet services protected by 1+1 hot standby (HSB) between NE 11 and NE 12 shown in
Figure 6-4 are tested.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure Reversion Mode for the 1+1 HSB protection group on NE 11.
1.

In NE Explorer, choose NE 11 from the object tree and choose Configuration > IF 1+1
Protection from Function Tree.

2.

In Protection Group, select the desired protection group and set Reversion Mode to NonRevertive.

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Click Close.

Step 2 Query the protection group status on NE 11 before switching.


1.

In NE Explorer, choose NE 11 from the object tree and choose Configuration > IF 1+1
Protection from Function Tree.

2.

In Protection Group, select the desired protection group and click Query.

3.

Ensure that Active NE of Device in Protection Group is NE 11.

Step 3 Test availability of the tested Ethernet services before switching. For details, see A.11.1 Testing
Ethernet Services. The value of LossRate in Test Result should be 0.
Step 4 Cold reset NE 11.
1.

Optional: Double-click the subnet to which NE 11 belongs.

2.

Double-click NE 11 in Main Topology.


The NE panel is displayed.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

102

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

3.

Select the SHXA2 board, right-click, and choose Cold Reset from the shortcut menu.
The Warning dialog box is displayed.

4.

Click OK.

Step 5 After NE 11 is cold reset (which takes about 3 minutes), query the protection group status on
NE 11.
1.

In NE Explorer, choose NE 11 from the object tree and choose Configuration > IF 1+1
Protection from Function Tree.

2.

In Protection Group, select the desired protection group and click Query.

3.

Ensure that Active NE of Device in Protection Group is NE 21.

Step 6 Test availability of the tested Ethernet services after switching. For details, see A.11.1 Testing
Ethernet Services. The value of LossRate in Test Result should be 0, indicating that the 1+1
protection switching is successful.
Step 7 Restore Reversion Mode to the original value.
----End

6.4.3 Testing PLA Protection Switching


You can verify the physical link aggregation (PLA) function by checking the changes of devices
and links in a PLA group before and after switching.

Prerequisites
l

Antenna alignment has been completed.

PLA protection has been configured.

Enhanced link aggregation groups (E-LAGs) have been configured for OptiX RTN 310s,
and static LAGs have been configured for third-party devices.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

103

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Test Connection Diagram


Figure 6-5 Test connection diagram
LAG

NE 11

NE 12

LAG

LAG

LAG

COMBO

COMBO

Antenna
NE 21

Antenna
NE 22
LAG

LAG

E-LAG

E-LAG
Microwave link

OptiX RTN 900


Ethernet link

Optical fiber

As shown in the preceding figure, the basic configurations are as follows:


l

NE 11 and NE 12 form a hop of microwave link.

NE 21 and NE 22 form a hop of microwave link.

The PLA configuration with E-LAG is used as an example.

Procedure
Step 1 Test the availability of the tested Ethernet services before switching. For details, see A.11.1
Testing Ethernet Services. The value of LossRate in Test Result should be 0.
Step 2 Set TX Status to mute for NE 11.
1.

In NE Explorer, choose NE 11 from the object tree and choose Configuration >
Microwave Link Configuration from Function Tree.

2.

In RF, set TX Status to mute.

3.

Click Apply.

Step 3 Test the availability of the tested Ethernet services after switching. For details, see A.11.1
Testing Ethernet Services. The value of LossRate in Test Result should be 0, indicating that
the PLA protection switching is successful.
Step 4 Set TX Status to unmute for NE 11.
1.

In NE Explorer, choose NE 11 from the object tree and choose Configuration >
Microwave Link Configuration from Function Tree.

2.

In RF, set TX Status to unmute.

3.

Click Apply.

----End
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

104

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

6.5 Checking the Clock Status


Checking the clock status for all NEs on a microwave transmission network ensures that the NE
clocks are synchronized.

Prerequisites
l

Clock configuration has been completed.

The links that transmit clock signals are functioning properly.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

The Web LCT also supports this task. The steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Context
The following procedure checks the clock status of NEs on a network.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the clock status of an NE.

Step 2 Repeat Step 1 to check the clock status of the other NEs on the network.
----End

6.6 Testing the Fade Margin over a Microwave Link


The fade margin over a microwave link can be evaluated by measuring the mean square errors
(MSEs) at different received signal levels (RSLs).
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

105

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Prerequisites
l

Weather conditions are favorable.

Antennas have been aligned, and the RSLs at both ends of the microwave link and the crosspolarization discrimination (XPD) meet requirements.

The configured transmit power is the same as the actual transmit power.

Context
The procedure for testing the fade margin is as follows:
l

Test the mapping between RSLs and MSEs at multiple sites.

Calculate the RSL corresponding to the MSE demodulation threshold to determine the
receiver sensitivity.

Subtract the receiver sensitivity from the current RSL to obtain the fade margin.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

The Web LCT also supports this task. The steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Context
The following procedure tests the fade margin over a microwave link.

Precautions
1.

When the fade margin is being tested, all the services carried on the microwave link may
be interrupted.

2.

For microwave links configured with 1+1 protection, lock the standby link before testing
the main link. Forcibly switch services to the standby link before testing it. The main and
standby links are tested simultaneously. Therefore, the fade margins of the main and
standby OptiX RTN 310s are reported at the same time.

3.

For cross polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) links, the links in the vertical
polarization direction and horizontal polarization direction are tested simultaneously.
Therefore, the fade margins of the main and standby OptiX RTN 310s are reported at the
same time.

Procedure
Step 1 Disable the adaptive modulation (AM) and automatic transmit power control (ATPC) functions
on the microwave link between two sites.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

106

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Step 2 Test the fade margin over the microwave link.

Step 3 Enable the AM and ATPC functions for the microwave link base on Step 1.
NOTE

Restore Modulation Mode of the Guaranteed AM Capacity and Modulation Mode of the Full AM
Capacity to their initial values when enabling the AM function.

----End

6.7 Testing Ethernet Service Performance


This section describes how to test Ethernet service performance using the NE-inherent test
functions.

6.7.1 Testing the Latency, Throughput, and Packet Loss Ratio


This section describes how to test the latency, throughput, and packet loss ratio of VLAN-based
Ethernet line (E-Line) services with different frame lengths.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

107

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Prerequisites
l

Antenna alignment has been completed.

The source and sink NEs of the Ethernet services have been configured with VLAN-based
E-Line services.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Context

CAUTION
l The source and sink ports (test ports) of the tested Ethernet services must be Ethernet ports.
During the test, all Ethernet services over the test ports are interrupted.
l If the tested Ethernet services contain quality of service (QoS), OAM, link aggregation group
(LAG), inband data communication network (DCN), or other data, the test results may be
inaccurate. It is recommended that you disable the functions before performing the test.
l If the source port of the tested services carries other services, the test results may be
inaccurate. It is recommended that you disable the other services at the source port before
performing the test.

Test Connection Diagram


The Ethernet services between PORT 2 on NE(92396) and PORT 2 on NE(92398) shown in
Figure 6-6 are tested. Both NE(92396) and NE(92398) are configured with VLAN-based ELine services.
Figure 6-6 Test connection diagram

PORT 2
NodeB

NE(9-2396)

NE(9-2398)

VLAN ID = 100

PORT 2
VLAN ID = 100

Microwave network

RNC

The Ethernet services between NE(92396) and NE(92398) carry the VLAN ID 100.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the TAG attributes for the test ports.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

108

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Step 2 Configure a sink NE for the test.

Step 3 Configure a source NE for the test and initiate the test.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

109

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

NOTE

l The test results may deviate from the actual values, as compared with the results of a test performed using
a meter. When the bandwidth of tested services is less than 70 Mbit/s, the deviation of the packet loss ratio
is less than 1%. When the bandwidth of tested services is higher than or equal to 70 Mbit/s, the deviation of
the packet loss ratio is less than 0.2%. If the packet loss ratio is not 0 and its deviation is within these ranges,
perform the test multiple times. If the results of the multiple tests show that a few packets are lost and the
packet loss ratio of services with long frames is higher than that of services with short frames, you can
consider that no packet is lost.
l The throughput test result of services with long frames deviates from the actual result by less than 5%.

----End

6.7.2 Testing the Long-term Packet Loss Ratio


This section describes how to test the long-term packet loss ratio of VLAN-based Ethernet line
(E-Line) services with different frame lengths.

Prerequisites
l

Antenna alignment has been completed.

The source and sink NEs of the Ethernet services have been configured with VLAN-based
E-Line services.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Context

CAUTION
l During the Ethernet service test, all Ethernet services over the test ports are interrupted.
l If the tested Ethernet services contain quality of service (QoS), OAM, link aggregation group
(LAG), inband data communication network (DCN), or other data, the test results may be
inaccurate. It is recommended that you disable the functions before performing the test.
l If the source port of the tested services carries other services, the test results may be
inaccurate. It is recommended that you disable the other services at the source port before
performing the test.

Test Connection Diagram


The Ethernet services between PORT 2 on NE(92396) and PORT 2 on NE(92398) shown in
Figure 6-7 are tested. Both NE(92396) and NE(92398) are configured with VLAN-based ELine services.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

110

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Figure 6-7 Test connection diagram

PORT 2
NodeB

NE(9-2396)

NE(9-2398)

VLAN ID = 100

PORT 2
VLAN ID = 100

Microwave network

RNC

The Ethernet services between NE(92396) and NE(92398) carry the VLAN ID 100.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the TAG attributes for the test ports.

Step 2 Configure a sink NE for the test.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

111

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Step 3 Configure a source NE for the test and initiate the test.

NOTE

The test results may deviate from the actual values. When the number of received packets and that of sent packets
are different and the difference is less than a millionth, you can consider that no packet is lost.

----End

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

112

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

7 Handling of Common Faults During Site Deployment

Handling of Common Faults During Site


Deployment

About This Chapter


This chapter describes how to handle common faults during site deployment.
7.1 When a USB Flash Drive Is Used for Loading Commissioning Data, Some Commands Fail
to Be Loaded
This section describes how to handle a command loading failure that occurs when a USB flash
drive is used for loading commissioning data.
7.2 The Receive Power Does not Meet the Design Requirements
This section describes how to handle the fault of receive power failing to meet the design
requirements.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

113

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

7 Handling of Common Faults During Site Deployment

7.1 When a USB Flash Drive Is Used for Loading


Commissioning Data, Some Commands Fail to Be Loaded
This section describes how to handle a command loading failure that occurs when a USB flash
drive is used for loading commissioning data.

Fault Symptom
When a USB flash drive is used for loading commissioning data, the indicator on the USB flash
drive is steady red after the loading is complete.

Cause Analysis
Steady red indicates that some commands fail to be loaded. You can locate these commands in
NE operation logs.

Procedure
Step 1 Browse NE operation logs. For details, see A.4.4 Querying NE Operation Logs.
Step 2 Record Operation Object in the logs with Result being Operation Failed, and send the
recorded information to the engineers responsible for generating data scripts.
NOTE

If commissioning engineers are able to configure NE data on the Web LCT, they can re-configure data related
to the failed commands based on the logs using the Web LCT.

Step 3 After correct scripts are generated, arrange personnel to load the commissioning data using a
USB flash drive. For details, see 4.2 Loading Commissioning Data Using a USB Flash
Drive.
----End

7.2 The Receive Power Does not Meet the Design


Requirements
This section describes how to handle the fault of receive power failing to meet the design
requirements.

Fault Symptom
No hardware alarm is reported on an NE. However, the receive power is at least 3 dB less than
the designed receive power, and the microwave link reports an MW_LOF alarm.

Cause Analysis
No hardware alarm is reported, so the equipment is running normally. Diagnose the fault from
the following aspects:
l
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

NE configurations
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

114

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

7 Handling of Common Faults During Site Deployment

Link transmission conditions and network plan

Hardware installation and antenna alignment

Procedure
Step 1 Check NE configurations by browsing the configuration data of the microwave link according
to A.5.1 Configuring a Single Hop of Microwave Link.
l Verify that the actual transmit and receive frequencies at both ends of the link match and
meet the network plan requirements.
l Verify that the channel bandwidths and modulation schemes at both ends of the link are the
same and meet the network plan requirements.
l Verify that the transmit power at both ends of the link meets the network plan requirements.
l Verify that the adaptive modulation (AM) and automatic transmit power control (ATPC)
functions are disabled during antenna alignment.
Step 2 Check the link transmission conditions and network plan.
l Verify that antennas are aligned under favorable weather conditions, free from the impact of
rainfall, snow, or fog.
l Verify the line of sight (LOS) on the microwave link based on a map and observation.
l Verify that the antenna positions and directions meet the network plan requirements by using
a compass.
l Verify that the height difference between the antennas is within the adjustment range and
that the network design parameters are correct by consulting network planning engineers.
Step 3 Check hardware installation and antenna alignment.
l Verify that the polarization directions of the antennas meet the network plan requirements.
When an OptiX RTN 310 or hybrid coupler is being installed, the polarization directions of
feed ports are the same.
l Verify that the main lobes of the antennas are aligned.
----End

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

115

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Configuring Networkwide Service Data

About This Chapter


This document uses configuration examples to describe the flow and procedure for configuring
the equipment. With this document, you can get familiar with the data configuration methods
and complete various configuration tasks in actual application.
8.1 Configuration Preparations
Before configuring the NE data, you must make the required preparations.
8.2 U2000 Quick Start
U2000 Quick Start describes basic operations on the U2000 client.
8.3 General Configuration Process
Select a proper configuration process based on the actual configuration scenarios.
8.4 Common Configuration Scenarios of Microwave Transmission Networks
This section describes two initial configuration scenarios: configuration on a microwave chain
network and configuration on a microwave ring network. To simply the description of
configuration examples of OptiX RTN 310, all initial configuration examples in this document
are based on the microwave chain network or the microwave ring network.
8.5 Configuring the Network Topology
You can manage a transport network by using the U2000 only after configuring the network
topology.
8.6 Configuring Microwave Links
Before configuring services on a microwave link, you need to configure the microwave link.
8.7 Configuring Native Ethernet Services
Native Ethernet services include Native Ethernet line (E-Line) services and Native Ethernet local
area network (E-LAN) services.
8.8 Configuring Clocks
To ensure that clocks of all the nodes on the transmission network are synchronized, configure
the clocks for these nodes according to a unified clock synchronization policy.
8.9 Adding and Modifying Configuration Data

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

116

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

During the equipment commissioning and operating phases, you need to add or modify certain
configuration data according to the actual requirements.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

117

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.1 Configuration Preparations


Before configuring the NE data, you must make the required preparations.

8.1.1 Preparing Documents and Tools


Related documents and tools must be available to ensure the proper configuration of data.

Documents
l

Network planning documents

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide

A computer where the U2000 server software is installed

A computer where the U2000 client software is installed

Tools

NOTE

For requirements and methods for installing U2000 software and hardware, see the documents that accompany
the U2000.

8.1.2 Checking Configuration Conditions


Before beginning the configuration process, confirm that local conditions meet requirements.

Context
Ensure that the following requirements are met:
l
l

All the NEs on the network must be powered on properly.

Data communication network (DCN) communication between the gateway NE and the
non-gateway NEs must be normal.

The network communication between the U2000 server and the gateway NE must be
normal.

The U2000 client can log in to the U2000 server and has network operator rights or higher.

8.2 U2000 Quick Start


U2000 Quick Start describes basic operations on the U2000 client.

8.3 General Configuration Process


Select a proper configuration process based on the actual configuration scenarios.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

118

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Initial Configuration
Initial configuration of a microwave network refers to initial configuration of network-wide
service data using the network management system (NMS) after site commissioning is complete.
Figure 8-1 shows the configuration flowchart.
Figure 8-1 Flowchart for initial configuration

Start

Required
Optional

Configure the network


topology.
Configure microwave
links.

Configure Native
Ethernet services.

Configure the clock.

End

The steps in the configuration flowchart are described in Table 8-1.


Table 8-1 Initial configuration

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Operation

Remarks

8.5 Configuring the Network


Topology

Required.

8.6 Configuring Microwave Links

Required.

8.7 Configuring Native Ethernet


Services

Required.

8.8 Configuring Clocks

Required.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

119

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

NOTE

The configuration sequence provided in Table 8-1 is for reference only and needs to be adjusted based on actual
scenarios. For detailed configuration methods based on local scenarios, see the configuration examples
corresponding to 8.4.1 Microwave Chain Network or 8.4.2 Microwave Ring Network.

Network Adjustment
Network adjustment involves adding and adjusting configuration data during the equipment
commissioning and operation phases. You can determine a task collection based on the actual
network adjustment requirements and then find the corresponding configuration operations from
the task collection.
Table 8-2 Network adjustment
Common Task Collection

Description

8.9.1 Common Task Collection


(Network Topology)

Lists configuration operations associated with NE


attributes, including changing the ID and IP address
of an NE.

8.9.2 Common Task Collection


(Microwave Links)

Lists configuration operations associated with


microwave links, including changing the basic
attributes and radio frequency (RF) attributes of
microwave links.

8.9.3 Common Task Collection


(Ethernet Services)

Lists configuration operations associated with


Ethernet services, including configuring or
modifying Ethernet port parameters and creating link
aggregation groups (LAGs).

8.4 Common Configuration Scenarios of Microwave


Transmission Networks
This section describes two initial configuration scenarios: configuration on a microwave chain
network and configuration on a microwave ring network. To simply the description of
configuration examples of OptiX RTN 310, all initial configuration examples in this document
are based on the microwave chain network or the microwave ring network.

8.4.1 Microwave Chain Network


Configuration examples are based on a microwave chain network that consists of OptiX RTN
310s and OptiX RTN 900s.

Network Topology
Figure 8-2 shows the networking diagram of the microwave chain network. On the network,
NE11, NE21, and NE23 receive Ethernet services, and NE99_1 and NE99_2 receive services
from the local backhaul network.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

120

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-2 Networking diagram of a microwave chain network


NMS

LAN switch
NE11
P&E

P&E

GE
NodeB 1

NE99_1

NE13
V-polarization

GE

Local backhaul
network

COMBO

COMBO

COMBO

XPIC&PLA

COMBO

GE

GE

RNC

P&E
NE12

H-polarization

NE14

P&E
GE

P&E

GE
P&E

NodeB 2
NE21

NE22

NE24

NE99_2

NE23

NodeB 3

OptiX RTN 900

Microwave link

Ethernet link

XPIC cable

NOTE

l NE99_1 and NE99_2 are OptiX RTN 900 NEs and they receive services from NE13 and NE24 through
the P&E ports on the EG4P boards. Configurations of NE99_1 and NE99_2 are not described in this
example.
l In the scenarios described in this section, 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection is not configured. For details
about the configuration process, see Feature Description.

Configuration Examples
Table 8-3 provides examples for configuration on the microwave chain network.
Table 8-3 Configuration examples

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Step

Operation

Configuration Example

Configuring
the network
topology

8.5.3 Configuration Example (Microwave Chain


Network Topology)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

121

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step

Operation

Configuration Example

Configuring
microwave
links

8.6.3 Configuration Example (Microwave Links on a


Microwave Chain Network)

Configuring
Native Ethernet
services

8.7.5 Configuration Example (Transparently


Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Services)
8.7.6 Configuration Example (VLAN-based E-Line
Service)
8.7.8 Configuration Example (IEEE 802.1Q Bridgebased E-LAN Service)

Configuring
clocks

8.8.3 Configuration Example (Clock on a Microwave


Chain Network)

8.4.2 Microwave Ring Network


Configuration examples are based on a microwave ring network that contains six OptiX RTN
310 NEs on three sites.

Network Topology
Figure 8-3 shows the networking diagram of the microwave ring network. On the network,
NE36 and NE33 receive Ethernet services, and NE35 receives services from the local backhaul
network.
Figure 8-3 Networking diagram of a microwave ring network
NMS
NodeB 1
P&E
GE
NE31

LAN switch

GE
NE36
P&E

Local backhaul
network
RNC

GE

GE NE35

NE32
GE

GE

P&E
NodeB 2

NE33

Microwave link

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

NE34

Ethernet link

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

122

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Configuration Examples
Table 8-4 provides examples for configuration on the microwave ring network.
Table 8-4 Configuration examples
Step

Operation

Configuration Example

Configuring the network


topology

8.5.4 Configuration Example (Microwave


Ring Network Topology)

Configuring microwave links

8.6.4 Configuration Example (Microwave


Links on a Microwave Ring Network)

Configuring Native Ethernet


services

8.7.7 Configuration Example (IEEE


802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service)

Configuring clocks

8.8.4 Configuration Example (Clock on a


Microwave Ring Network)

8.5 Configuring the Network Topology


You can manage a transport network by using the U2000 only after configuring the network
topology.

8.5.1 Basic Concepts


Before configuring the network topology, familiarize yourself with the basic concepts.

8.5.1.1 DCN
To manage and maintain an NE, the U2000 needs to communicate with the NE through the data
communication network (DCN).
On a DCN, the U2000 and all the NEs are considered as nodes. The DCN between the U2000
and all the NEs is considered as the external DCN, and the DCN between the NEs is considered
as the internal DCN. OptiX RTN 310 supports the HWECC and IP DCN solutions. By default,
the IP DCN solution is used.
IP DCN is a DCN solution provided by Huawei. In this solution, network management system
(NMS) messages are encapsulated in the standard IP protocol stack and transmitted over DCN
channels between NEs so that the NMS can manage these NEs.
Figure 8-4 shows how NMS messages are transmitted using the IP DCN solution.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

123

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-4 Application of the IP DCN solution


3rd-party Msg
IP stack
NM-ETH

OptiX Msg
IP stack
DCC

Third-party
NMS

OptiX Msg
IP stack
DCC

3rd-party Msg
IP stack
NM-ETH

Third-party
equipment

External DCN

NMS

OptiX Msg
IP stack
Inband DCN

OptiX Msg
IP stack
NM-ETH

OptiX Msg
IP stack
Inband DCN

Ethernet link

OptiX Msg
IP stack
Inband DCN

OptiX Msg
IP stack
Inband DCN

Microwave link

As shown in the preceding figure, different vendors' NMS messages encapsulated in the IP
protocol stack can be transmitted over the following DCN channels:
l

DCCs in microwave links

Ethernet service channels in radio or GE links

Ethernet NMS ports

8.5.1.2 Access Control


The access control function enables an OptiX RTN 310 to connect to a network management
system (NMS) through its GE port.

Connecting to an NMS Through a Third-Party Service Network


Figure 8-5 illustrates a typical scenario in which an OptiX RTN 310 connects to an NMS through
a third-party service network. When transmitting Ethernet services, the packet switched network
(PSN) also transmits data communication network (DCN) packets between the NMS and the
gateway NE. In this instance, the access control function can be enabled on the GE port of the
gateway NE.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

124

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-5 Access control (OptiX RTN 310 connecting to an NMS through a third-party service
network)
NMS

DCN packets

LAN switch

PSN
GE port
Access control
enabled

Router

Ethernet services

After you enable the access control function on the GE port:


l

The GE port functions as an NMS port on the gateway NE.

You can specify the IP address of the GE port according to the requirements of the PSN.
This IP address cannot be on the same segment as the IP address of the local NE.

The DCN packets transmitted/received at the GE port carry a VLAN ID used for inband
DCN. Before a DCN packet arrives at the NMS, its VLAN ID needs to be stripped off by
an NE such as the LAN switch in Figure 8-5.

The NMS can communicate with the gateway NE based on the IP address of the GE port
on which the access control function is enabled.

Connecting to a Web LCT Through a GE Port


Figure 8-6 illustrates a typical scenario in which an OptiX RTN 310 connects to a Web LCT
through its GE port. Generally, a Web LCT is used for OptiX RTN 310 onsite maintenance. At
sites that do not have power injectors (PIs) installed, maintenance personnel must climb towers
to connect OptiX RTN 310s to Web LCTs. To avoid climbing towers, maintenance personnel
can instead disconnect the Ethernet service cable between an OptiX RTN 310 and a NodeB,
connect the Ethernet service cable to a Web LCT, and then enable access control on the GE port
on the OptiX RTN 310.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

125

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-6 Access control (OptiX RTN 310 connecting to a Web LCT through its GE port)

NodeB 1
GE port
Access control
enabled

Web LCT
GE port

NOTE

l An OptiX RTN 310 can connect to a Web LCT through its GE port only if its GE port functions as an
electrical port.
l A VLAN ID can be added to and stripped from DCN packets only after you install a drive and specify
the VLAN ID on the computer on which the Web LCT is installed.

8.5.1.3 GNE and Non-GNE


A gateway NE (GNE) refers to an NE whose application layer communicates directly with the
network management system (NMS) application layer. A non-GNE refers to an NE whose
application layer communicates with the NMS application layer by forwarding data through the
GNE application layer.

GNE
Generally, a GNE is connected to the NMS through a local area network (LAN) or through a
wide area network (WAN). Its application layer can directly communicate with the NMS
application layer. One set of NMS needs to be connected to one or more GNEs.
Embedded control channel (ECC) communication between the GNEs may create an oversized
data communication network (DCN). To prevent this, disable extended ECC for the GNEs.

Non-GNE
A non-GNE communicates with the GNE through the DCN channels between NEs.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

126

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.5.1.4 NE ID and NE IP Address


An NE on the DCN is identified by its ID and IP address.

NE ID
At the application layer of each DCN solution, an OptiX NE uses its NE ID as the NE address.
Therefore, each NE must have a unique NE ID on the DCN and all the NE IDs must be planned
in a unified manner.
The NE ID has 24 bits. The most significant eight bits represent the subnet ID (or the extended
ID) and the least significant 16 bits represent the basic ID. For example, if an NE ID is 0x090001,
the subnet ID is 9 and the basic ID is 1.

NE IP Address
An NE uses an IP address as its unique identifier during TCP/IP communication.
In the HWECC solution, the IP addresses of the NEs on the DCN are used in the following
scenarios:
l

A gateway NE (GNE) communicates with the U2000 over TCP/IP. The IP address of the
GNE must be planned as required by the external DCN.

Different NEs communicate with each other over extended embedded control channels
(ECCs). In this scenario, NE IP addresses must be on the same network segment. By default,
NE IP addresses are on the 129.9.0.0 network segment.

In the DCN solution (for example, IP DCN) where network management messages are
transmitted over TCP/IP, an NE IP address is used as the NE address at the network layer.
Therefore, each NE IP address on the DCN must be unique and all these NE IP addresses must
be planned in a unified manner.
By default (which indicates that an NE IP address is never manually changed), this NE IP address
is automatically changed to 0x81000000 + ID if the NE ID is changed. For example, if an NE
IP address is never manually changed, this NE IP address is automatically changed to 129.9.0.1
when the NE ID is changed to 0x090001. Once an NE IP address is manually changed, the
interlocking relationship between the NE ID and NE IP address no longer takes effect.

8.5.1.5 Fiber/Cable Types


You can obtain the clear fiber/cable connection relationship between NEs by using the fiber
management function of the U2000. You can also use the U2000 to manage fibers and cables,
including Ethernet fibers/cables, microwave links, extended ECC cables, and back-to-back radio
connections.
l

Ethernet fibers/cables
Ethernet fibers/cables refer to the Ethernet fiber/cable connections between Ethernet
optical/electrical ports on different sets of equipment.

Microwave links
Microwave links refer to the radio connections between different sets of radio equipment.
That is, the microwave links indicate the connection relationship between different IF ports.

l
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Extended ECC cables


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

127

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Extended ECC cables refer to the extended ECC channels between the NEs. That is, the
extended ECC cables indicate the connection relationship between the NEs.
l

Back-to-back radio connections


Back-to-back radio connections refer to the NE cascading relationship. That is, the backto-back radio connections indicate the connection relationship between the NEs.
NOTE

Fibers and cables are topological objects on the U2000. Therefore, operations on the fibers or cables do not
affect the normal running of the NEs.

8.5.1.6 Subnet
NEs in the same domain or with similar attributes can be allocated to the same subnet. In this
manner, they can be displayed and managed as a whole on the U2000, which facilitates NE
management.
Subnets are topological objects on the U2000, but do not physically exist on networks. Therefore,
operations on subnets do not affect the normal running of NEs. Subnets simplify the main
topology on the U2000.

8.5.2 Configuration Process (Network Topology)


This section describes the processes of configuring the four topological objects: NEs, boards,
fibers/cables, and subnets.
Figure 8-7 shows the flowchart for configuring the network topology.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

128

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-7 Flowchart for configuring the network topology

Required

Start

Optional
Create an NE.

Set NE attributes.

Set the DCN channel.

Synchronize the NE time.

Set the NE performance


monitoring status.
Create fibers/cables and
subnets.

End

NOTE

When the Web LCT is used for configuration, there is no need to create fibers/cables and subnets.

The steps in the configuration flowchart are described as follows:

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

129

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Creating NEs
Table 8-5 Process of creating NEs
Step

Operation

Creating NEs
on the U2000

Remarks
A.3.1.1
Creating an
NE by Using
the Search
Method

It is recommended that you perform this


operation to add one or more NEs to a large
existing network on the U2000.
To achieve Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
communication between the network
management system NMS and the gateway
NE, Connection Mode needs to be set to
Security SSL.

A.3.1.2
Creating an
NE Manually

It is recommended that you perform this


operation to create NEs on the U2000 in other
cases. The following parameters need to be
set:
l Set Search Mode to Search for NE.
l Search Domain: When the IP address of
the gateway NE (GNE) is known, it is
recommended that you set the IP address
range of the GNE as the search domain.
In the case of initial configuration, it is
recommended that you set the
129.9.255.255 network segment as the
search domain.
l Search for NE: It is recommended that
you select Create NE after search, and
Upload after create. By default, NE
User is root and Password is password.
l Connection Mode: This parameter
specifies the connection mode between
the NMS and the gateway NE. For SSL
connection, set this parameter to Security
SSL.

A.3.2.1 Uploading NE Data

If you select Upload after create during A.


3.1.2 Creating an NE Manually, skip this
operation.

NOTE

The NE creation steps on the Web LCT are different from those on the U2000. When the Web LCT is used:
1. Skip A.3.2.1 Uploading NE Data.
2. If an NE is not logged in after being created, perform A.3.1.3 Logging In to an NE.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

130

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Configuring NE Attributes
Table 8-6 Process of configuring NE attributes
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.3.1.4
Changing
an NE ID

Required. Set parameters as follows:


l Change New ID to be the NE ID specified during the data
communication network (DCN) planning.
l If the extended NE ID is required, change New Extended
ID.

A.3.1.5
Changing
an NE
Name

Optional.

Configuring DCCs
Table 8-7 Process of configuring DCCs
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.3.6.1
Setting NE
Communica
tion
Parameters

Required. Set parameters as follows:


l In the case of the GNE, set IP and Subnet Mask according
to the planning of the external DCN.
l In the case of the GNE, set Gateway IP if the external
DCN requires.
l Generally, it is recommended that you set Connection
Mode to Common + Security SSL. If you need to set the
gateway NE to allow for NMS access only in SSL
connection mode, set Connection Mode to Security
SSL.
l In the case of non-GNEs, it is recommended that you set
IP Address to 0x81000000 + NE ID. That is, if the NE ID
is 0x090001, set IP Address to 129.9.0.1. Set Subnet
Mask to 255.255.0.0.
NOTE
If the IP address of an NE is not changed manually, the IP address
changes according to the NE ID and is always 0x81000000 + NE ID.
In this case, the IP address of a non-GNE does not need to be changed
manually.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

A.3.6.2
Configuring
DCCs

Disable related DCCs when using inband DCN channels.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

131

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.3.6.7
Configuring
Extended
ECCs

Disable the automatic extended embedded control channel


(ECC) function for NEs that communicate with the NMS
through NMS ports.

A.3.6.3
Setting the
VLAN ID
and
Bandwidth
for an
Inband
DCN

Required if the OptiX RTN 310 equipment uses the inband


DCN solution and if the VLAN ID and bandwidth planned
for this inband DCN do not assume their default values (the
default VLAN ID is 4094 and the default bandwidth is 512
kbit/s).

A.3.6.5
Setting a
Port for an
Inband
DCN

Required. Set parameters as follows:

A.3.6.9
Setting
OSPF
Protocol
Parameters

Optional. When a network consists of only OptiX RTN 310


NEs and uses a single Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) area,
it is recommended that you retain the default values for the
parameters.

A.3.6.6
Configuring
Access
Control

Optional.

l If inband DCN channels use the HWECC protocol, set


Protocol Type to HWECC. If inband DCN channels use
the IP protocol, set Protocol Type to IP.
l It is recommended that you set Enabled Status to
Disabled for the ports connected to customers' equipment.

When a gateway NE is connected to the NMS through a thirdparty network, enable the access control function for the
Ethernet port connected to the third-party network on the
gateway NE. In addition, set IP address and Subnet mask
for the port according to the network plan.

NOTE

The preceding DCN configuration process applies to a typical IP DCN solution configuration in a single OSPF
area. For the configuration process for an IP DCN solution containing special requirements or for another DCN
solution, see related descriptions in the Feature Description.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

132

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Synchronizing NE Time
Table 8-8 Process of synchronizing NE time
Step

Operation

Synchroni
zing the
NE time

Remarks
A.3.1.6
Synchron
izing the
NE Time

Required.
l To synchronize the NEs with the NMS server, set
the relevant parameters as follows:
Set Synchronous Mode to NM.
Right-click and choose the operation from the
shortcut menu to ensure that the NE are
synchronized with the NMS time
immediately.
Set the synchronization parameters according
to the requirements. It is recommended that
the parameters adopt the default values.
l To synchronize the NEs with the Network Time
Protocol (NTP) server, set the relevant
parameters as follows:
Set Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP.
Set Standard NTP Authentication
according to the requirements for the NTP
server.
It is recommended that you set the upper level
NTP server that the NEs trace as follows:
In the case of the GNE, set the external
NTP server to the upper level NTP server.
Set Standard NTP Server Flag to IP and
set Standard NTP Server to the IP
address of the external NTP server.
In the case of a non-GNE, set the GNE to
the upper level NTP server. If the nonGNE needs to communicate with the GNE
through the HWECC protocol, set
Standard NTP Server Flag to NE ID and
set Standard NTP Server to the NE ID
of the GNE. If the non-GNE needs to
communicate with the GNE through the
IP protocol, set Standard NTP Server
Flag to IP and set Standard NTP
Server to the IP address of the GNE.
Set Standard NTP Server Key according
to the requirements for the NTP server.

A.3.1.7
Localizin
g the NE
Time

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Required if daylight saving time (DST) is used at the


local area.
Set the parameters according to the planning of DST
at the local area.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

133

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Step

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Operation

Remarks
A.3.1.8
Configuri
ng a
Standard
NTP Key

Required if the standard NTP authentication is used


to synchronize the NEs with the NTP server.
Set the parameters according to the identification
authentication of the NTP.
NOTE
When the Web LCT is used, skip this operation because
this operation is included in A.3.1.6 Synchronizing the
NE Time.

Setting the Performance Monitoring Status


Table 8-9 Process of setting the performance monitoring status
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.3.3
Setting the
Performanc
e
Monitoring
Status for
an NE

If the 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring


functions are set to Disabled, enable these performance
monitoring functions.

Creating Fibers/Cables and Subnets


Table 8-10 Process of creating fibers/cables and subnets
Step

Operation

Creating
fibers/
cables

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Remarks
A.3.4.1
Creating
a Fiber/
Cable by
Using the
Search
Method

It is recommended that you perform this operation


to create fibers/cables.

A.3.4.2
Creating
a Fiber/
Cable
Manually

It is recommended that you perform this operation


to create fibers/cables that cannot be created using
the search method (for example, when the fiber/
cable has not been connected).

A.3.4.4 Creating a
Back-to-back Radio
Connection

Optional when there are cascading NEs on the


network.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

134

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Step

Operation

Configuri
ng the
subnet

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Remarks
A.3.5.1
Creating
a Subnet

Optional.

A.3.5.2
Copying a
Topology
Object

Optional.

A.3.5.3
Moving a
Topology
Object

Optional.

8.5.3 Configuration Example (Microwave Chain Network


Topology)
This section provides an example of how to configure a microwave chain network topology
according to the network plan.

8.5.3.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking of NEs.
Figure 8-8 shows a microwave chain network configured according to the following
requirements:
l

The U2000 manages the microwave links on the network that consists of OptiX RTN
310s and OptiX RTN 900s.

The local backhaul network is a third-party network and cannot be managed together with
the OptiX RTN equipment. Therefore, NE99_1 and NE99_2 are set to be the gateway NEs
and they communicate with the U2000 using the access control function.

The NEs use the D1 to D3 bytes in microwave links or use part of the Ethernet bandwidth
in GE links for internal data communication network (DCN) communication which is
implemented using the IP protocol.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

135

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-8 Networking diagram (microwave chain network topology)


NMS

LAN switch
NE11
P&E

P&E

GE
NodeB 1

NE99_1

NE13
V-polarization

GE

Local backhaul
network

COMBO

COMBO

COMBO

XPIC&PLA

COMBO

GE

GE

RNC

P&E
NE12

H-polarization

NE14

P&E
GE

P&E

GE
P&E

NodeB 2
NE21

NE22

NE99_2

NE24
NE23

NodeB 3

OptiX RTN 900

Microwave link

Ethernet link

XPIC cable

NOTE

On the NMS, the logical port of a microwave port is 1-SHXA2-1(IF).

On the NMS, the logical port of a COMBO port that functions as an optical GE port is 1-SHXA2-2
(GE1).

On the NMS, the logical port of a P&E port is 1-SHXA2-2(GE1), when the COMBO port does not
function as an optical GE port.

On the NMS, the logical port of a GE port is 1-SHXA2-3(GE2).

On the NMS, the logical port of a COMBO port that functions as a 1+1 concatenation port is 1SHXA2-4. This port is valid only when DCN is being configured.

8.5.3.2 Service Planning


This section describes the parameters required for configuring a microwave chain network
topology.
l

This example uses the IP data communication network (DCN) solution.

To prevent adverse impact on base stations, the inband DCN function for service ports that
receive services from base stations must be disabled on all NEs.

The management VLAN ID and bandwidth of inband DCN are planned for each NE.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

136

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

The management VLAN ID takes the default value 4094, which is unique on the
network.
The inband DCN bandwidth takes the default value 512 kbit/s.
l

Figure 8-9 shows the ID and IP address that are allocated to each NE according to the DCN
plan.

Figure 8-9 Allocated IDs and IP addresses (microwave chain network)


NMS

LAN switch
NE11
9-11
129.9.0.11
0.0.0.0

NE13
9-13
129.9.0.13
0.0.0.0

9-12
129.9.0.12
0.0.0.0
NE12

9-14
129.9.0.14
0.0.0.0
NE14

9-21
129.9.0.21
0.0.0.0
NE21

9-22
129.9.0.22
0.0.0.0
NE22

Microwave link

Ethernet link

NE99_1

10.0.0.100

9-91
129.9.0.91
0.0.0.0

Local backhaul
network

RNC

9-24
129.9.0.24
0.0.0.0
9-23
129.9.0.23
0.0.0.0

NE24

9-92
129.9.0.92
0.0.0.0
NE99_2

NE23

XPIC cable

Extended ID-Basic ID
IP address
Gateway

NOTE

l The subnet mask for each NE IP address takes the same value 255.255.0.0.
l The access control function is enabled for the Ethernet port (IP address: 10.0.0.91) on NE99_1 and
the Ethernet port (IP address: 10.0.0.92) on NE99_2.
l The IP address allocated to each NE interlocks with the NE ID. Therefore, if the IP address of an NE
has not been changed manually, the NE automatically changes the IP address to the planned value
after the NE ID is changed.
l NE99_1 and NE99_2 are OptiX RTN 900 NEs, and therefore their configurations are not detailed in
this example.

The Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol parameters take their default values.

In this example, the policy of synchronizing the NE with the network management system
(NMS) server is used. The automatic synchronization period is one day. Daylight saving
time (DST) is not used in the local area.

The 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring functions are enabled for all NEs.

In this configuration example, no subnet needs to be configured.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

137

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.5.3.3 Configuration Procedure


This section describes the procedure for configuring the network topology.

Precautions
If the NE ID and the NE communication parameter values were changed and the logical boards
were configured during the NE commissioning, skip these operations.

Procedure
Step 1 Create NEs manually. For details, see A.3.1.2 Creating an NE Manually.
This table provides parameter values for creating an NE manually.
Parameter

Value

Search Domain

Search for NE

IP Address

129.9.255.255

Search User

root

Create NE after search

Selected

Upload after create

Selected

NE User

root

Password

password

NOTE

The configuration example assumes that the IP address of the gateway NE has not been changed manually and
is unknown. The NEs are searched for by using the 129.9.255.255 network segment as the search domain. If the
IP address of the gateway NE is known, it is recommended that you use the IP address of the gateway NE as
the search domain.

The icons of NE11 to NE14 and NE21 to NE24 should be displayed on Main Topology and all
the NE data should be uploaded successfully.
Step 2 Change the NE IDs. For details, see A.3.1.4 Changing an NE ID.
This table provides parameter values for NE11 to NE14.
Parameter

Value
NE11

NE12

NE13

NE14

New ID

11

12

13

14

New Extended
ID

9 (default value)

9 (default value)

9 (default value)

9 (default value)

This table provides parameter values for NE21 to NE24.


Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

138

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Parameter

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Value
NE21

NE22

NE23

NE24

New ID

21

22

23

24

New Extended
ID

9 (default value)

9 (default value)

9 (default value)

9 (default value)

Step 3 Set communication parameters for the NEs. For details, see A.3.6.1 Setting NE
Communication Parameters.
This table provides parameter values for NE11 to NE14.
Parameter

Value
NE11

NE12

NE13

NE14

IP

129.9.0.11

129.9.0.12

129.9.0.13

129.9.0.14

Gateway IP

0.0.0.0 (default
value)

0.0.0.0 (default
value)

0.0.0.0 (default
value)

0.0.0.0 (default
value)

Subnet Mask

255.255.0.0
(default value)

255.255.0.0
(default value)

255.255.0.0
(default value)

255.255.0.0
(default value)

Extended ID

Connection
Mode

Common
+Security SSL

Common
+Security SSL

Common
+Security SSL

Common
+Security SSL

This table provides parameter values for NE21 to NE24.


Parameter

Value
NE21

NE22

NE23

NE24

IP

129.9.0.21

129.9.0.22

129.9.0.23

129.9.0.24

Gateway IP

0.0.0.0 (default
value)

0.0.0.0 (default
value)

0.0.0.0 (default
value)

0.0.0.0 (default
value)

Subnet Mask

255.255.0.0
(default value)

255.255.0.0
(default value)

255.255.0.0
(default value)

255.255.0.0
(default value)

Extended ID

Connection
Mode

Common
+Security SSL

Common
+Security SSL

Common
+Security SSL

Common
+Security SSL

Step 4 Configure ports for the inband data communication network (DCN). For details, see A.3.6.5
Setting a Port for an Inband DCN.
This table provides parameter values for NE11, NE21, and NE23.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

139

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Parameter

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Value

Enabled/Disabled

1-SHXA2-2

Other Ports

Disabled

Enabled (default value)

Step 5 Synchronize the NE time. For details, see A.3.1.6 Synchronizing the NE Time.
This table provides parameter values for synchronizing the NE time.
Parameter

Value
All the Ports on All the NEs

Synchronous Mode

NM

Period (days)

Step 6 Create fibers/cables by using the search method. For details, see A.3.4.1 Creating a Fiber/Cable
by Using the Search Method.
Normally, all the microwave link and Ethernet fibers/cables are created successfully on Main
Topology.
Step 7 Create a back-to-back radio connection. For details, see A.3.4.4 Creating a Back-to-back
Radio Connection.
This table provides parameter values for creating a back-to-back radio connection.
Parameter

Value

Source NE

NE22

Sink NE

NE23

----End

8.5.4 Configuration Example (Microwave Ring Network Topology)


This section provides an example of how to configure a microwave ring network topology
according to the network plan.

8.5.4.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking of NEs.
Figure 8-10 shows the network topology of a microwave ring network configured according to
the following requirements:
l

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

The network contains six OptiX RTN 310 NEs located at three sites. The NEs are managed
by the U2000.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

140

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

The local backhaul network is a third-party network and cannot be managed together with
the OptiX RTN equipment. Therefore, NE35 is configured as the gateway NE and it
communicates with the U2000 using the access control function.

The NEs use the D1 to D3 bytes in microwave links or use part of the Ethernet bandwidth
in GE links for internal data communication network (DCN) communication which is
implemented using the IP protocol.

Figure 8-10 Networking diagram (microwave ring network topology)

NMS
NodeB 1
P&E
GE
NE31

LAN switch

GE
NE36
P&E

Local backhaul
network
RNC

GE

GE NE35

NE32
GE

GE

P&E
NodeB 2

NE33

Microwave link

NE34

Ethernet link

NOTE

On the NMS, the logical port of a microwave port is 1-SHXA2-1(IF).

On the NMS, the logical port of a COMBO port that functions as an optical GE port is 1-SHXA2-2
(GE1).

On the NMS, the logical port of a P&E port is 1-SHXA2-2(GE1), when the COMBO port does not
function as an optical GE port.

On the NMS, the logical port of a GE port is 1-SHXA2-3(GE2).

On the NMS, the logical port of a COMBO port that functions as a 1+1 concatenation port is 1SHXA2-4. This port is valid only when DCN is being configured.

8.5.4.2 Service Planning


This section describes the parameters required for configuring a microwave ring network
topology.
l
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

This example uses the IP data communication network (DCN) solution.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

141

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

To prevent adverse impact on base stations, the inband DCN function for service ports that
receive services from base stations must be disabled on all NEs.

The management VLAN ID and bandwidth of inband DCN are planned for each NE.
The management VLAN ID takes the default value 4094, which is unique on the
network.
The inband DCN bandwidth takes the default value 512 kbit/s.

Figure 8-11 shows the ID and IP address that are allocated to each NE according to the
DCN plan.

Figure 8-11 Allocated IDs and IP addresses (microwave ring network)


NMS

NE31
9-31
129.9.0.31
0.0.0.0

NE36
LAN switch

9-36
129.9.0.36
0.0.0.0

9-32
129.9.0.32
0.0.0.0

10.0.0.100

9-35
129.9.0.35
0.0.0.0

NE32

Local backhaul
network

NE35

9-33
129.9.0.33
0.0.0.0

9-34
129.9.0.34
0.0.0.0

NE33

NE34

Microwave link

Ethernet link

RNC

Extended ID-Basic ID
IP address
Gateway

NOTE

l The subnet mask for each NE IP address takes the same value 255.255.0.0.
l The access control function for port GE1 (IP address: 10.0.0.35) of NE35 is enabled.
l The IP address allocated to each NE interlocks with the NE ID. Therefore, if the IP address of an NE
has not been changed manually, the NE automatically changes the IP address to the planned value
after the NE ID is changed.

The Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol parameters take their default values.

In this example, the policy of synchronizing the NE with the network management system
(NMS) server is used. The automatic synchronization period is one day. Daylight saving
time (DST) is not used in the local area.

The 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring functions are enabled for all NEs.

In this configuration example, no subnet needs to be configured.

8.5.4.3 Configuration Procedure


This section describes the procedure for configuring a microwave ring network topology.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

142

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Precautions
If the NE ID and the NE communication parameter values were changed and the logical boards
were configured during the NE commissioning, skip these operations.

Procedure
Step 1 Create NEs manually. For details, see A.3.1.2 Creating an NE Manually.
This table provides parameter values for creating an NE.
Parameter

Value

Search Domain

Search for NE

IP Address

129.9.255.255

Search User

root

Create an NE after it is
found.

Selected

Upload after create

Selected

NE User

root

Password

password

NOTE

In this configuration example, it is assumed that the IP address of the gateway NE has not been changed manually
and is unknown. The NEs are searched for by using the 129.9.255.255 network segment as the search domain.
If the IP address of the gateway NE is known, it is recommended that you use the IP address of the gateway NE
as the search domain.

Normally, the icons of NE31 to NE36 are displayed on Main Topology and all the NE data are
uploaded successfully.
Step 2 Change the NE IDs. For details, see A.3.1.4 Changing an NE ID.
This table provides parameter values for changing the NE IDs.
Paramete
r

Value
NE31

NE32

NE33

NE34

NE35

NE36

New ID

31

32

33

34

35

36

New
Extended
ID

9 (default
value)

9 (default
value)

9 (default
value)

9 (default
value)

9 (default
value)

9 (default
value)

Step 3 Set communication parameters for the NEs. For details, see A.3.6.1 Setting NE
Communication Parameters.
This table provides communication parameter values.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

143

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Paramete
r

Value
NE31

NE32

NE33

NE34

NE35

NE36

IP

129.9.0.31

129.9.0.32

129.9.0.33

129.9.0.34

129.9.0.35

129.9.0.36

Gateway
IP

0.0.0.0
(default
value)

0.0.0.0
(default
value)

0.0.0.0
(default
value)

0.0.0.0
(default
value)

0.0.0.0
(default
value)

0.0.0.0
(default
value)

Subnet
Mask

255.255.0.
0 (default
value)

255.255.0.
0 (default
value)

255.255.0.
0 (default
value)

255.255.0.
0 (default
value)

255.255.0.
0 (default
value)

255.255.0.
0 (default
value)

Extended
ID

Connectio
n Mode

Common
+Security
SSL

Common
+Security
SSL

Common
+Security
SSL

Common
+Security
SSL

Common
+Security
SSL

Common
+Security
SSL

Step 4 Configure access control. For details, see A.3.6.6 Configuring Access Control.
This table provides parameter values for configuring access control for NE35.
Parameter

Value
1-SHXA2-2

Enabled/Disabled

Enabled

IP

10.0.0.35

Subnet Mask

255.255.0.0

Step 5 Configure ports for the inband data communication network (DCN). For details, see A.3.6.5
Setting a Port for an Inband DCN.
This table provides parameter values for NE33 and NE36.
Parameter

Value

Enabled/Disabled

1-SHXA2-2

Other Ports

Disabled

Enabled (default value)

Step 6 Synchronize the NE time. For details, see A.3.1.6 Synchronizing the NE Time.
This table provides parameter values for synchronizing the NE time.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

144

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Parameter

Value
All the Ports on All the NEs

Synchronous Mode

NMS

Period (days)

Step 7 Create fibers/cables by using the search method. For details, see A.3.4.1 Creating a Fiber/Cable
by Using the Search Method.
Normally, all the microwave link and Ethernet fibers/cables are created successfully on Main
Topology.
Step 8 Create a back-to-back radio connection. For details, see A.3.4.4 Creating a Back-to-back
Radio Connection.
This table provides parameter values for creating a back-to-back radio connection.
Parameter

Value
Connection 1

Connection 2

Connection 3

Source NE

NE31

NE32

NE34

Sink NE

NE36

NE33

NE35

----End

8.6 Configuring Microwave Links


Before configuring services on a microwave link, you need to configure the microwave link.

8.6.1 Basic Concepts


Before configuring a microwave link, familiarize yourself with the basic concepts.

8.6.1.1 Adaptive Modulation


Adaptive modulation (AM) technology automatically adjusts the modulation scheme based on
channel quality.
When AM technology is enabled and the same channel spacing is used, the available radio
service bandwidth varies according to the modulation scheme: the higher the modulation
efficiency, the higher the bandwidth of the transmitted services. With quality of service (QoS)
technology, packet services are groomed to queues with different priorities. Services in different
queues are then transmitted to the microwave port after the queue-scheduling algorithm has been
run. The service capacity varies according to the modulation scheme regardless of channel
conditions.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

145

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

When channel conditions are favorable (such as on sunny days), the equipment uses a
higher-order modulation scheme to transmit more user services. This improves
transmission efficiency and spectrum utilization of the system.

When channel conditions are unfavorable (such as on stormy or foggy days), the equipment
uses a lower-order modulation scheme to ensure that higher-priority services are
transmitted first. If some lower-priority queues become congested due to a lack of available
bandwidth, some or all interfaces in these queues are discarded. This method improves the
anti-interference capabilities of a microwave link and ensures link availability for highpriority services.

Figure 8-12 shows how the modulation scheme shifts step by step according to weather changes
and how modulation schemes affect service throughput and reliability. In this example, the
modulation scheme of guaranteed AM capacity is QPSK Strong and the modulation scheme of
full AM capacity is 256QAM.
Figure 8-12 Adaptive modulation

256
QAM

128
64
32
QAM QAM
QAM

16
16
32
16
16 QAM
QAM
QAM
QPSK
QAM Strong
Strong QAM
QPSK
QPSK
Strong

128
64
QAM QAM

RSL

Availability
99.5%

256 QAM
128 QAM

99.9%

64 QAM

99.92%

32 QAM

99.96%

16 QAM
16 QAM strong

256
QAM

Low-priority
service

Low-priority
service

99.99%
99.995%
99.998%

QPSK

99.999%

QPSK strong

High-priority service
Time

The AM technology used by OptiX RTN 310 has the following features:
l

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Uses QPSK Strong, QPSK, 16QAM Strong, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM,
256QAM, 512QAM, 512QAM Light, 1024QAM, 1024QAM Light, and 2048QAM
modulation schemes. Compared with QPSK/16QAM, QPSK Strong/16QAM Strong, using
different parameters in forward error correction (FEC) coding, has stronger error correction
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

146

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

capability, and therefore has better receiver sensitivity. It has, however, less air interface
bandwidth. Compared with 512QAM/1024QAM, 512QAM Light/1024QAM Light, using
different parameters in forward error correction (FEC) coding, has weaker error correction
capability, and therefore has worse receiver sensitivity. It has, however, higher air interface
bandwidth.
l

Can configure both the lowest-order modulation scheme (also called reference scheme or
modulation scheme of guaranteed AM capacity) and the highest-order modulation scheme
(also called nominal scheme or modulation scheme of full AM capacity).

Can switch modulation schemes without changing the transmit frequency, receive
frequency, or channel spacing.

Switches modulation schemes step-by-step.

Features hitless switching. When the modulation scheme is downshifted, high-priority


services are not affected while low-priority services are discarded. Switching is successful
even when 100 dB/s channel fast fading occurs.

8.6.1.2 CCDP and XPIC


Co-channel dual polarization (CCDP) and cross polarization interference cancellation (XPIC)
have been developed based on the characteristics of microwave polarization. CCDP doubles
transmission capacity by transmitting two channels of signals over two orthogonally polarized
waves, and XPIC eliminates interference between the two waves.
Microwave transmission can be classified as single-polarized transmission and CCDP
transmission.
l

In single-polarized transmission, one channel of signals is transmitted over a horizontally


or vertically polarized wave. See Figure 8-13.

In CCDP transmission, two channels of signals of the same frequency are transmitted over
the horizontally polarized wave and the vertically polarized wave on a channel. See Figure
8-14.

The capacity of CCDP transmission is twice that of single-polarized transmission.


Figure 8-13 Single-polarized transmission

Figure 8-14 CCDP transmission

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

147

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

If conditions were perfect, there would be no interference between the two channels of signals,
and the receiver could easily recover the original signals. In reality, however, there is always
interference caused by antenna cross-polarization discrimination (XPD) and channel
deterioration. XPIC eliminates this interference and enables a receiver to recover the original
signals.

8.6.1.3 RF Configuration Modes


OptiX RTN 310 supports four basic radio frequency (RF) configurations: 1+0 non-protection
configuration, 1+1 protection configuration, 2+0 non-protection configuration, and cross
polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) configuration.

1+0 Non-Protection Configuration


The 1+0 non-protection configuration indicates that the microwave link has one working channel
and no protection channel.
Figure 8-15 Typical configuration of 1+0 non-protection

NE2

NE1

1+1 Protection Configuration


The 1+1 protection configuration indicates that the microwave link has one working channel
and one protection channel.
The 1+1 protection configuration is classified into 1+1 hot standby (HSB), 1+1 frequency
diversity (FD), and 1+1 space diversity (SD).
l

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

1+1 HSB provides 1+1 hot standby protection for the OptiX RTN 310 at the two ends of
a microwave link hop.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

148

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-16 Typical configuration of 1+1 HSB protection


RNC
RAN
LAG

LAG

NE1

LAG

COMBO

COMBO

COMBO

COMBO

LAG

NE4

NE2

OptiX RTN 900

NE3

Radio link

LAG

LAG

Ethernet link

1+1 FD uses two channels with a frequency spacing in between to receive and transmit the
same services. The receive end selects the channel with better quality service signals. With
1+1 FD protection, the impact of signal transmission fading is reduced.
The 1+1 FD protection also supports the 1+1 HSB protection.

Figure 8-17 Typical configuration of 1+1 FD protection


RNC
RAN
LAG

LAG

LAG

NE1

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

LAG

COMBO

COMBO

COMBO

COMBO

NE4

NE2

OptiX RTN 900

NE3

Radio link

LAG

LAG

Ethernet link

1+1 SD uses two antennas at different heights to receive the same services. The receive
end selects the channel with better quality service signals. With 1+1 SD protection, the
impact of signal transmission fading is reduced.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

149

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

The 1+1 SD protection also supports the 1+1 HSB protection.


Figure 8-18 Typical configuration of 1+1 SD protection
RNC
RAN
LAG

LAG

LAG

NE1

NE3

LAG

COMBO

COMBO

COMBO

COMBO

NE4

NE2

OptiX RTN 900

Radio link

LAG

LAG

Ethernet link

2+0 Non-Protection Configuration


The 2+0 non-protection configuration indicates that the microwave link has two working
channels and no protection channel.
Figure 8-19 Typical configuration of 2+0 non-protection (with PLA configured with NE-level
protection)

RNC
RAN
LAG

NE3 LAG

LAG NE1

GE

GE

GE

GE

LAG NE2
OptiX RTN 900

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

NE4
Radio link

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

LAG

LAG
Ethernet link

150

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

NOTE

PLA protection is often configured for NEs in a 2+0 non-protection group.

XPIC Configuration
The XPIC adopts both the horizontally polarized wave and the vertically polarized wave over
one channel to transmit two channels of signals. Therefore, the microwave link capacity in XPIC
configuration is double the microwave link capacity in 1+0 configuration.
Figure 8-20 Typical configuration of the XPIC
V-polarization

COMBO

COMBO

COMBO

COMBO
Antenna

Antenna

H-polarization

8.6.1.4 PLA
Physical Link Aggregation (PLA) aggregates all Ethernet bandwidth across several microwave
links between two NEs into a logical path to achieve higher Ethernet bandwidth.
Different from air-interface link aggregation group (LAG), PLA dynamically allocates Ethernet
traffic, based on the Ethernet service bandwidth over each member microwave link, to achieve
load sharing between member microwave links. PLA can use the load sharing mode regardless
of whether member microwave links use the same Ethernet frame type or length or provide the
same Ethernet bandwidth. PLA ensures equivalent Ethernet bandwidth utilization between
member microwave links even when the Ethernet bandwidth on each member link changes.
Figure 8-21 PLA

Microwave link 1
Ethernet
channel
GE

PLA

GE
Ethernet
channel
Microwave link 2

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

151

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

OptiX RTN 310 supports two configuration modes: PLA with NE-level protection and PLA
without NE-level protection. The protection scopes of the two configuration modes are different.
l

PLA without NE-level protection protects microwave links, but not radio equipment.

In PLA with NE-level protection, LAG is configured for the service source and equipment
protection is configured for access equipment. Both microwave links and access equipment
are protected. This configuration requires the service source (an IDU or UNI equipment)
to provide two access ports and to support a static LAG. The LAG of the service source
and the equipment protection on the OptiX RTN 310 equipment cooperate to implement
protection switching for both equipment and Ethernet access links.

8.6.1.5 E-LAG
When switching occurs on the NEs in a 1+1 HSB/SD/FD or physical link aggregation (PLA)
group, an enhanced link aggregation group (E-LAG) is required to implement switching for
active and standby GE access links (HSB is short for hot standby, SD for space diversity, and
FD for frequency diversity).

Introduction
E-LAG is a mechanism that implements multi-chassis link aggregation using the Link
Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). It enhances Ethernet link reliability from the port level
to the equipment level.
As shown in Figure 8-22, two OptiX RTN 310s form a 1+1 HSB/FD/SD or PLA group. A static
link aggregation group (LAG) that has only the master port is configured on each of the OptiX
RTN 310s. The master and slave OptiX RTN 310s exchange 1+1 HSB/FD/SD or PLA protection
protocol packets so that the LAGs on them form a multi-chassis E-LAG. A static, non-load
sharing, and non-revertive LAG must be configured on the IDU (or UNI equipment) connected
to the OptiX RTN 310s. This LAG works with the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD or PLA group to implement
switching for the active and standby GE access links.
Figure 8-22 E-LAG application
LAG
LAG

LAG

GE

GE
Cascade
cable

IDU

GE

LAG

Cascade
cable
Antenna

GE

Antenna

LAG
E-LAG

IDU

LAG
E-LAG

Principles
NOTE

This section describes the E-LAG implementation at the transmit end shown in Figure 8-22. The E-LAG
implementation at the receive end is similar.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

152

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1.

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Before E-LAG switching


NE 1 is the master NE in the 1+1 HSB/SD/FD or PLA group. In normal cases, the 1+1
HSB/FD/SD or PLA protection protocol sets the highest LAG system priority on NE 1 and
a lower LAG system priority on NE 2. Manually set the LAG system priority on the IDU
to be much lower than the LAG system priorities set on NE 1 and NE 2 (it is recommended
that the value of the LAG system priority on the IDU be greater than 1000). According to
the LACP negotiation results, the link between NE 1 and the IDU is in the Selected state,
and the link between NE 2 and the IDU is in the Unselected state. As a result, the IDU
transmits services only to NE 1.

Figure 8-23 Before E-LAG switching


NE1
Master
Ethernet
service
Master port
GE

Ethernet
service

GE
IDU

Slave port

LAG 1
Protection
protocol
packets
LAG 2

LAG 3

Antenna
E-LAG
NE 2
Slave

LAG of the highest


system priority

2.

E-LAG switching
When switching occurs on NE 1 and NE 2, they exchange the LAG system priorities, and
the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD or PLA protection protocol sets the highest LAG system priority on
NE 2. According to the LACP renegotiation results, the link between NE 1 and the IDU is
in the Unselected state, and the link between NE 2 and the IDU is in the Selected state. As
a result, the IDU transmits services only to NE 2.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

153

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-24 E-LAG switching


NE 1
Master

Master port
GE

Ethernet
service

GE
IDU

Slave port

LAG 1

Protection
protocol
packets

LAG 2

LAG 3
Ethernet
service

Antenna
E-LAG
NE 2
Slave

LAG of the highest


system priority

Feature Dependencies and Limitations


l

The ports at both ends of each GE access link must have the same ID and type (optical port
or electrical port). The ports must work in auto-negotiation mode.

The IDU (or UNI equipment) connected to NE 1 and NE 2 must be configured with a static,
non-load sharing, and non-revertive LAG. It is recommended that the value of the LAG
system priority on the IDU be greater than 1000.

8.6.1.6 Hop Management


The U2000 supports the hop management function, which allows for the simultaneous
modification of the NEs at the two ends of a hop.
Hop management applies to microwave links using either the 1+0 non-protection configuration
or the cross polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) configuration. If a microwave link is
not working correctly, the basic information about the peer NE is not displayed.
The following parameters on the local and peer NEs on a microwave link hop are automatically
correlated: Link ID, IF Channel Bandwidth, AM, Modulation Mode of the Guaranteed AM
Capacity, Modulation Mode of the Full AM, and T/R Spacing (MHz). If any of the preceding
parameters is modified on one NE, the corresponding parameter is automatically modified on
the peer NE.
The following figure shows the window for configuring the hop management function.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

154

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.6.2 Configuration Process (Microwave Links)


This section describes the processes of configuring the hop management function, power,
IEEE-1588 timeslot status (enabled or disabled), and other parameters for a microwave link.
Figure 8-25 shows the flowchart for configuring microwave links.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

155

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-25 Flowchart for configuring microwave links


Required

Start

Optional
Create a microwave 1+1 protection group.

Create a PLA group.

Configure a hop of microwave link.

Configure Ethernet frame header


compression and errored frame discarding
over air interfaces.

Set the maximum transmit power and the


power thresholds.

Enable/Disable IEEE-1588 timeslots.

Create a microwave link after it is found.

End

The steps in the flowchart are described as follows:

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

156

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Configuring Microwave Links


Table 8-11 Process of configuring microwave links
Step

Operation

Creating a
microwave
1+1
protection
group

Remarks
Deleting the
Ethernet
port that
does not
participate in
1+1
protection
from the
bridge of the
E-LAN
service or
deleting the
E-Line
service on the
Ethernet
port that
does not
participate in
1+1
protection

Required when 1+1 protection is required for


microwave links.

A.7.2.1
Creating a
LAG

Required when 1+1 protection is required for


microwave links.

Required. Do not configure Ethernet services


on the Ethernet port that does not participate
in 1+1 protection. If you configure Ethernet
services on the Ethernet port, 1+1 protection
configuration will fail.
NOTE
By default, an OptiX RTN 310 creates a bridgebased E-LAN service. All ports of the OptiX RTN
310 are mounted to the bridge. Therefore, you must
delete the Ethernet port that does not participate in
1+1 protection from the bridge. If an E-Line service
has been configured on the Ethernet port that does
not participate in 1+1 protection, delete the E-Line
service.

Required. Configure a LAG on each of the


main OptiX RTN 310s and each of the standby
OptiX RTN 310s. The LAG has only one
member port that receives and transmits
Ethernet services.
Set parameters as follows:
l Set LAG Type to Static.
l Set Reversion Mode to Non-Revertive.
l Set Load Balancing to Non-Sharing.
l Set Master Port to the port that receives
and transmits Ethernet services. Do not set
Standby Ports.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

157

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Step

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Operation

Remarks
Creating a
Microwave 1
+1 Protection
Group

Optional. Set parameters as follows:


l Set Working Mode according to the
network plan.
l Set Working/Protection Unit Type to
Working Unit for the main OptiX RTN
310 and Protection Unit for the standby
OptiX RTN 310.
l It is recommended that you set Reversion
Mode to the default value Revertive
Mode.
l WTR Time(s) is available only when
Reversion Mode is set to Revertive
Mode.
l It is recommended that you set Enable
Reverse Switching to Disabled, and then
to Enabled after the 1+1 protection status
is stable.
l Set Service port to the same value as
Master Port that you set during link
aggregation group (LAG) creation.
l Set Working Mode, Reversion Mode,
WTR Time(s), and Enable Reverse
Switching to the same values for the OptiX
RTN 310s at both ends of the hop of
microwave link.
NOTE
If 1+1 protection configuration fails, check that:
l Working Mode is set to the default value AutoNegotiation for Service port on the main and
standby OptiX RTN 310s.
l Logical Port Attribute of the P&E electrical
port (1-SHXA2-2) takes the default value
Electrical Port.
l Ethernet services are configured only on
Service port involved in 1+1 protection.
l No feature that conflicts with 1+1 protection,
such as cross polarization interference
cancellation (XPIC) or physical link
aggregation (PLA), is configured.
l The COMBO ports on the main and standby
OptiX RTN 310s are properly connected using
an optical fiber.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

158

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Step

Operation

Creating a
PLA group

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Remarks
Deleting the
Ethernet
port that
does not
participate in
1+1
protection
from the
bridge of the
E-LAN
service or
deleting the
E-Line
service on the
Ethernet
port that
does not
participate in
1+1
protection

Required.

A.7.2.1
Creating a
LAG

Required when a microwave link requires


PLA with NE-level protection. Set parameters
as follows:

Delete Ethernet services on the cascade ports


between the master and slave NEs before
configuring PLA, because Ethernet services
are not allowed on the ports during PLA
configuration.

l Set LAG Type to Static.


l Set Reversion Mode to Non-Revertive.
l Set Load Balancing to Non-Sharing.
l Set Master Port to the port that receives
and transmits Ethernet services. Do not set
Standby Ports.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

159

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Step

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Operation

Remarks
Creating a
PLA Group

Required when a microwave link requires


PLA. Set parameters as follows:
l If NE-level protection is required, set
Protection Type to NE-level LAG
protection. Set Service Port to the same
port ID for the master and slave NEs, and
ensure that the ports are both GE electrical
ports or GE optical ports. Set Working
Mode to Auto-Negotiation.
l If NE-level protection is not required, set
Protection Type to No NE-level
protection, and set Service Port only for
the master NE.
l Set NE Role to Active and Standby for the
master and slave NEs respectively.
l Set Cascade Port to the same port ID for
the master and slave NEs, and ensure that
the ports are both GE electrical ports or GE
optical ports.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

160

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.5.1 Configuring a Single


Hop of Microwave Link

Required. Set parameters as follows:


l Link ID, IF Channel Bandwidth, AM,
Modulation Mode of the Guaranteed
AM Capacity, Modulation Mode of the
Full AM, and T/R Spacing (MHz) of the
local NE and the peer NE on a hop of
microwave link are automatically
correlated. If any of the preceding
parameters is modified on one NE, the
parameter on the peer NE is automatically
modified accordingly.
l Set Link ID, TX Frequency (MHz), TX
Power (dBm), and T/R Spacing (MHz)
according to the network plan.
l Set the transmit status to unmute.
l Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the
received signal level specified in the
network plan. The antenna non-alignment
indication function is enabled only after
this parameter is set. When the antenna
misalignment indicating function is
enabled, if the actual receive power is 3 dB
lower than the power expected to be
received, the RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH
alarm is reported. After the antennas are
aligned for consecutive 30 minutes, the NE
automatically disables the antenna nonalignment indication function.
NOTE
l All parameters on the main and standby NEs in
a 1+1 HSB or space diversity (SD) protection
group must be set consistently.
l IF parameters on the main and standby NEs in
a 1+1 frequency (FD) protection group must be
set consistently. The radio frequency (RF)
parameters can be set differently.
l Data on the two main NEs at the ends of a hop
of microwave link must correspond with each
other. So does the data on the standby NEs.

Configuring Ethernet
frame header compression
and errored frame
discarding over air
interfaces

Required when the Ethernet frame header


compression function is enabled for air
interfaces or errored Ethernet frames are
configured not to be discarded.
Set the parameters according to the service
plan.
NOTE
Configurations on the main and standby NEs in a
PLA/1+1 protection group must be the same.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

161

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.5.10 Setting the


Maximum Transmit Power
and the Power Thresholds

Optional.
Set Maximum Transmit Power according to
the network plan when the ATPC function is
enabled. If you want to calculate how long the
transmit/receive power remains within the
maximum and minimum power thresholds,
you can set the power thresholds.
NOTE
Configurations on the main and standby NEs in a 1
+1 protection group must be the same.

A.8.2.1 Enabling/Disabling
the IEEE-1588 Timeslot for
a Microwave Port

Required when the microwave port transmits


IEEE 1588v2 packets.
Set Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot to
Enabled.
NOTE
Configurations on the main and standby NEs in a
PLA/1+1 protection group must be the same.

A.3.4.1 Creating a Fiber/


Cable by Using the Search
Method

In normal cases, Main Topology displays the


previously created microwave links.

NOTE

l The preceding parameters need to be set separately but set to the same values for the microwave links in the
vertical and horizontal polarization directions.
l The MW_CFG_MISMATCH alarm is reported if the adaptive modulation (AM) status (enabled or disabled),
1588 timeslot status (enabled or disabled), or modulation scheme is set inconsistently at the two ends of a
microwave link. This alarm should be cleared immediately. Otherwise, services may be configured
unsuccessfully or interrupted.

8.6.3 Configuration Example (Microwave Links on a Microwave


Chain Network)
This section provides an example of how to configure microwave links on a microwave chain
network according to the network plan.

8.6.3.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking of NEs.
Based on 8.5.3 Configuration Example (Microwave Chain Network Topology), configure
the microwave links on a microwave chain network according to the following requirements.
Figure 8-26 shows the networking diagram.
l

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

To increase the bandwidth for transmitting services from NodeB, enable the cross
polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) function for the microwave links between
NE11 and NE13 and between NE12 and NE14.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

162

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

To balance the Ethernet bandwidth utilization on links, configure PLA for the microwave
links between NE11 and NE13 and for those between NE12 and NE14. The PLA for NE11
and NE12 does not need to provide NE-level protection whereas the PLA for NE13 and
NE14 does.

Enable adaptive modulation (AM) for all microwave links except for the links configured
with the XPIC function. All microwave links carry Ethernet services.

The service capacity transmitted by each NodeB is provided in Table 8-12.


Table 8-12 Service capacity transmitted by each NodeB
Service Capacity

NodeB 1

NodeB 2

NodeB 3

Capacity of highpriority Ethernet


services (Mbit/s)

90

15

24

Capacity of lowpriority Ethernet


services (Mbit/s)

NOTE

High-priority services require transmission guarantees and must not be discarded in modulation scheme
shifts. Low-priority services do not require transmission guarantees and can be discarded in modulation
scheme shifts. Common service priorities are provided in Table 8-13.

Table 8-13 Common service priorities

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Service Type

Priority

Voice, signaling, and O&M Ethernet


services

High

Streaming media, background, and


interactive Ethernet services, for example,
Internet services

Low

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

163

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-26 Networking diagram (microwave links on a microwave chain network)


NMS

101
14930 MHz
14510 MHz
28 MHz
1+0
V-polarization

NE11
P&E
GE
NodeB 1

TX high site

LAN switch
NE13
P&E
GE

TX low site

COMBO

COMBO

COMBO

COMBO

TX high site TX low site


GE
NE12

102
14930 MHz
14510 MHz
28 MHz
1+0
H-polarization

TX low site

Local backhaul
network

NE99_1

GE
P&E

RNC

NE14
TX high site
TX low site

TX high site

NE99_2

NE24

NodeB 2
NE21

NE22
201
14947 MHz
14527 MHz
7 MHz
1+0
V-polarization

OptiX RTN 900

NE23

202
14952 MHz
14532 MHz
14 MHz
1+0
H-polarization
Link ID
TX frequency at a TX high site
TX frequency at a TX low site
Channel spacing
RF configuration
Polarization

NodeB 3

Microwave link

Ethernet link

XPIC cable

8.6.3.2 Service Planning


This section describes the parameters required for configuring microwave links on a microwave
chain network.

Basic Information About Microwave Links


You can obtain basic information about microwave links based on the spectrum allocation on
the microwave network and the required radio transmission capacity, as listed in Table 8-14.
Table 8-14 Basic information about microwave links

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Link ID

101

102

201

202

TX high site

NE11

NE12

NE21

NE23

TX low site

NE13

NE14

NE22

NE24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

164

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

TX frequency
at the TX high
site (MHz)

14930

14930

14947

14952

TX frequency
at the TX low
site (MHz)

14510

14510

14527

14532

T/R Spacing
(MHz)

420

420

420

420

Radio working
mode

28

28

14

RF
configuration
mode

XPIC

XPIC

1+0

1+0

Polarization
direction

V (vertical
polarization)

H (horizontal
polarization)

V (vertical
polarization)

H (horizontal
polarization)

AM Attribute Information
You can compute adaptive modulation (AM) attribute information based on Ethernet service
capacity and availability requirements, as listed in Table 8-15.
Table 8-15 AM attribute information
Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

AM

Disabled

Disabled

Enabled

Enabled

Modulation
Mode of the
Guaranteed
AM Capacity

QPSK Strong

QPSK Strong

Modulation
Mode of the
Full AM

32QAM

64QAM

Modulation
Mode

128QAM

128QAM

NOTE

Both the radio capacity and the AM function require a corresponding license file.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

165

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Power and ATPC Information


You can obtain information about the microwave link power and automatic transmit power
control (ATPC) by using microwave network planning software such as Pathloss, as listed in
Table 8-16.
Table 8-16 Power and ATPC information
Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

TX power
(dBm)

16 (NE11)

16 (NE12)

16.5 (NE21)

20 (NE23)

16 (NE13)

16 (NE14)

16.5 (NE22)

20 (NE24)

RX power
(dBm)

-46 (NE11)

-46 (NE12)

-43 (NE21)

-48 (NE23)

-46 (NE13)

-46 (NE14)

-43 (NE22)

-48 (NE24)

ATPC

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

ATPC upper
threshold
(dBm)

ATPC lower
threshold
(dBm)

NOTE

l The transmit power and receive power are calculated in the modulation scheme of guaranteed AM capacity.
l In this example, the ATPC function is disabled.

Configuration Information About XPIC Groups


Table 8-17 lists the cross polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) configuration
information for NE11, NE12, NE13, and NE14.
Table 8-17 Configuration information about XPIC groups
Parameter

V (vertical polarization)

H (horizontal
polarization)

XPIC group

NE11

NE12

NE13

NE14

Configuration Information About PLA Groups


Table 8-18 lists the physical link aggregation (PLA) configuration information for NE11, NE12,
NE13, and NE14.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

166

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Table 8-18 Configuration information about PLA groups


Parameter

NE11

NE12

NE13

NE14

PLA ID

1 (default value)

1 (default value)

1 (default value)

1 (default value)

IF Port

1-SHXA2-1
(IF)

1-SHXA2-1
(IF)

1-SHXA2-1
(IF)

1-SHXA2-1
(IF)

Service Port

1-SHXA2-2
(GE1)

1-SHXA2-2
(GE1)

1-SHXA2-2
(GE1)

Cascade Port

1-SHXA2-3
(GE2)

1-SHXA2-3
(GE2)

1-SHXA2-3
(GE2)

1-SHXA2-3
(GE2)

NE Role

Active

Standby

Active

Standby

Protection
Type

No NE-level
protection

No NE-level
protection

NE-level LGA
protection

NE-level LGA
protection

Minimum
Active Link

1 (default value)

1 (default value)

1 (default value)

1 (default value)

LAG NO

Assign
automatically

Assign
automatically

LAG Name

LAG_01

LAG_01

LAG Type

Static

Static

Load
Balancing

Non-Sharing

Non-Sharing

Reversion
Mode

Non-Revertive

Non-Revertive

System
Priority

32768

32768

8.6.3.3 Configuration Procedure


This section describes the procedure for configuring microwave links on a microwave chain
network.

Procedure
Step 1 Delete the Ethernet port that does not participate in 1+1 protection from the bridge of the
Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) service, or delete the Ethernet line (E-Line) service
on the Ethernet port that does not participate in 1+1 protection.
Step 2 Create a link aggregation group (LAG).
This table provides parameter values for NE13 and NE14.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

167

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Parameter

Value
NE13

NE14

LAG NO

Select Assign
automatically.

Select Assign
automatically.

LAG Name

LAG_01

LAG_01

LAG Type

Static

Static

Load Balancing

Non-Sharing

Non-Sharing

Reversion Mode

Non-Revertive

Non-Revertive

System Priority

32768

32768

Main Port

1-SHXA2

1-SHXA2

Standby Port

Step 3 Create a physical link aggregation (PLA) group.


This table provides parameter values for NE11 to NE14.
Parameter

NE11

NE12

NE13

NE14

PLA ID

1 (default value)

1 (default value)

1 (default value)

1 (default value)

IF Port

1-SHXA2-1

1-SHXA2-1

1-SHXA2-1

1-SHXA2-1

Service Port

1-SHXA2-2

1-SHXA2-2

1-SHXA2-2

1-SHXA2-2

Cascade Port

1-SHXA2-3

1-SHXA2-3

1-SHXA2-3

1-SHXA2-3

NE Role

Active

Standby

Active

Standby

Protection
Type

No NE-level
protection

No NE-level
protection

NE-level LGA
protection

NE-level LGA
protection

Minimum
Active Link

1 (default value)

1 (default value)

1 (default value)

1 (default value)

Step 4 Configure microwave links. For details, see A.5.1 Configuring a Single Hop of Microwave
Link.
l This table provides parameter values for NE11 to NE14.
Basic parameters
Parameter

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Value
NE11

NE12

NE13

NE14

XPIC

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Link ID-V

101

101

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

168

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Parameter

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Value
NE11

NE12

NE13

NE14

102

102

NE11

NE12

NE13

NE14

IF Channel
Bandwidth

28M

28M

28M

28M

AM

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Modulation
Mode

128QAM

128QAM

128QAM

128QAM

NE11

NE12

NE13

NE14

TX
Frequency
(MHz)

14930

14930

14510

14510

T/R Spacing
(MHz)

420

420

420

420

APTC

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

ATPC Upper
Threshold
(dBm)

ATPC Lower
Threshold
(dBm)

TX Power
(dBm)

16

16

16

16

Power to Be
Received
(dBm)

-46

-46

-46

-46

TX Status

unmute

unmute

unmute

unmute

Link ID-H

IF parameters
Parameter

Value

Radio frequency (RF) parameters


Parameter

Value

l This table provides parameter values for NE21 to NE24.


Basic parameters
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

169

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Parameter

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Value
NE21

NE22

NE23

NE24

Link ID

201

201

202

202

XPIC

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

NE21

NE22

NE23

NE24

IF Channel
Bandwidth

7M

7M

14M

14M

AM

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Modulation
Mode of the
Guaranteed
AM Capacity

QPSK Strong

QPSK Strong

QPSK Strong

QPSK Strong

Modulation
Mode of the
Full AM

32QAM

32QAM

64QAM

64QAM

NE21

NE22

NE23

NE24

TX
Frequency
(MHz)

14947

14527

14952

14532

T/R Spacing
(MHz)

420

420

420

420

APTC

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

ATPC Upper
Threshold
(dBm)

ATPC Lower
Threshold
(dBm)

TX Power
(dBm)

16.5

16.5

20

20

IF parameters
Parameter

Value

RF parameters
Parameter

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Value

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

170

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Parameter

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Value
NE21

NE22

NE23

NE24

Power to Be
Received
(dBm)

-43

-43

-48

-48

TX Status

unmute

unmute

unmute

unmute

----End

8.6.4 Configuration Example (Microwave Links on a Microwave


Ring Network)
This section provides an example of how to configure microwave links on a microwave ring
network according to the network plan.

8.6.4.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking of NEs.
Based on 8.5.4 Configuration Example (Microwave Ring Network Topology), configure the
radio ring links according to the following requirements. Figure 8-27 shows the networking
diagram.
l

Enable adaptive modulation (AM) for all microwave links, because all microwave links
carry Ethernet services.

The service capacity transmitted by each NodeB is provided in Table 8-19.


Table 8-19 Service capacity transmitted by each NodeB
Service Capacity

NodeB 1

NodeB 2

Capacity of high-priority
Ethernet services (Mbit/s)

10

Capacity of low-priority
Ethernet services (Mbit/s)

20

15

NOTE

High-priority services require transmission guarantees and must not be discarded in modulation scheme
shifts. Low-priority services do not require transmission guarantees and can be discarded in modulation
scheme shifts. Common service priorities are provided in Table 8-20.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

171

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Table 8-20 Common service priorities


Service Type

Priority

Voice, signaling, and O&M Ethernet


services

High

Streaming media, background, and


interactive Ethernet services, for example,
Internet services

Low

Figure 8-27 Networking diagram (microwave links on a microwave ring network)

NMS
NodeB 1

301
14930 MHz
14510 MHz
14 MHz
1+0
V-polarization

303
14967 MHz
14547 MHz
14 MHz
1+0
V-polarization
NE31

LAN switch

NE36
Local backhaul
network
RNC
NE35

NE32

NodeB 2

NE33

NE34
302
14950 MHz
14530 MHz
14 MHz
1+0
H-polarization

Microwave link

Link ID
TX frequency at a TX high site
TX frequency at a TX low site
Channel spacing
RF configuration
Polarization

Ethernet link

8.6.4.2 Service Planning


This section describes the parameters required for configuring microwave links on a microwave
ring network

Basic Information About Microwave Links


You can obtain basic information about microwave links based on the spectrum allocation on
the microwave network and the required radio transmission capacity, as listed in Table 8-21.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

172

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Table 8-21 Basic information about microwave links


Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link ID

301

302

303

TX high site

NE31

NE33

NE35

TX low site

NE32

NE34

NE36

TX frequency at the
TX high site (MHz)

14930

14950

14967

TX frequency at the
TX low site (MHz)

14510

14530

14547

T/R Spacing (MHz)

420

420

420

Radio working
mode

14

14

14

RF configuration
mode

1+0

1+0

1+0

Polarization
direction

V (vertical
polarization)

H (horizontal
polarization)

V (vertical
polarization)

AM Attribute Information
You can compute adaptive modulation (AM) attribute information based on Ethernet service
capacity and availability requirements, as listed in Table 8-22.
Table 8-22 AM attribute information
Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

AM

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Modulation Mode
of the Guaranteed
AM Capacity

16QAM

16QAM

16QAM

Modulation Mode
of the Full AM

128QAM

128QAM

128QAM

NOTE

Both the radio capacity and the AM function require a corresponding license file.

Power and ATPC Information


You can obtain information about the microwave link power and automatic transmit power
control (ATPC) by using microwave network planning software such as Pathloss, as listed in
Table 8-23.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

173

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Table 8-23 Power and ATPC information


Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

TX power (dBm)

16 (NE31)

16 (NE33)

16.5 (NE35)

16 (NE32)

16 (NE34)

16.5 (NE36)

-46 (NE31)

-45 (NE33)

-43 (NE35)

-46 (NE32)

-45 (NE34)

-43 (NE36)

ATPC

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

ATPC upper
threshold (dBm)

ATPC lower
threshold (dBm)

RX power (dBm)

NOTE

l The transmit power and receive power are calculated in the modulation scheme of guaranteed AM capacity.
l In this example, the ATPC function is disabled.

8.6.4.3 Configuration Procedure


This section describes the procedure for configuring microwave links on a microwave ring
network.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure microwave links. For details, see A.5.1 Configuring a Single Hop of Microwave
Link.
l This table provides parameter values for NE31 to NE36.
Basic parameters
Paramet
er

Value
NE31

NE32

NE33

NE34

NE35

NE36

Link ID

301

301

302

302

303

303

XPIC

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

IF parameters

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

174

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Paramet
er

Value
NE31

NE32

NE33

NE34

NE35

NE36

IF
Channel
Bandwid
th

14M

14M

14M

14M

14M

14M

AM

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Modulati
on Mode
of the
Guarant
eed AM
Capacity

16QAM

16QAM

16QAM

16QAM

16QAM

16QAM

Modulati
on Mode
of the
Full AM

128QAM

128QAM

128QAM

128QAM

128QAM

128QAM

Radio frequency (RF) parameters

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Paramet
er

Value
NE31

NE32

NE33

NE34

NE35

NE36

TX
Frequen
cy (MHz)

14930

14510

14950

14530

14967

14547

T/R
Spacing
(MHz)

420

420

420

420

420

420

APTC

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

ATPC
Upper
Threshol
d (dBm)

ATPC
Lower
Threshol
d (dBm)

TX
Power
(dBm)

16

16

16

16

16.5

16.5

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

175

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Paramet
er

Value
NE31

NE32

NE33

NE34

NE35

NE36

Power to
Be
Received
(dBm)

-46

-46

-45

-45

-43

-43

TX
Status

unmute

unmute

unmute

unmute

unmute

unmute

----End

8.7 Configuring Native Ethernet Services


Native Ethernet services include Native Ethernet line (E-Line) services and Native Ethernet local
area network (E-LAN) services.

8.7.1 Basic Concepts


Before configuring Native Ethernet services, familiarize yourself with the basic concepts.

8.7.1.1 Auto-negotiation
The auto-negotiation function allows network equipment to send information about its supported
working mode to the opposite end and to receive corresponding information back.

Auto-negotiation Function of GE Electrical Ports


GE electrical ports on OptiX RTN 310 support four working modes: 10M full-duplex, 100M
full-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation. Table 8-24 lists auto-negotiation rules
for GE electrical ports.
Table 8-24 Auto-negotiation rules for GE electrical ports (when the local GE electrical port
works in auto-negotiation mode)

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Working Mode of the Opposite GE


Electrical Port

Auto-negotiation Result

Auto-negotiation (GE electrical port)

1000M full-duplex

Auto-negotiation (FE electrical port)

100M full-duplex

10M half-duplex

10M half-duplex

10M full-duplex

10M half-duplex

100M half-duplex

100M half-duplex

100M full-duplex

100M half-duplex

1000M full-duplex

1000M full-duplex

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

176

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

NOTE

As provided in Table 8-24, when the opposite GE electrical port works in 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex
mode, auto-negotiation does not necessarily achieve full matching between the two ends. As a result, some
packets are lost. Therefore, when the opposite GE electrical port works in 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex
mode, set the working mode of the local GE electrical port to 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex.

When the GE electrical ports at both ends work in auto-negotiation mode, the equipment at both
ends can negotiate flow control.

Auto-negotiation Function of GE Optical Ports


GE optical ports support only the 1000M full-duplex working mode. Auto-negotiation of GE
optical ports is used only for negotiating flow control.

8.7.1.2 Flow Control Function


When equipment fails to handle the traffic received at the port due to poor data processing/
transferring capability, the line becomes congested. This also causes buffer overflow and
therefore some packets are discarded. To reduce the number of packets to be discarded, take
appropriate flow control measures.
Half-duplex Ethernet uses a back-pressure mechanism to control flow. Full-duplex Ethernet uses
PAUSE frames to control flow. Currently, half-duplex Ethernet is not widely applied; therefore,
the flow control function is currently implemented for full-duplex Ethernet.
The flow control function on the equipment is classified into two types: auto-negotiation flow
control and non-auto-negotiation flow control.

Auto-negotiation Flow Control


When an Ethernet port works in auto-negotiation mode, use auto-negotiation flow control. The
auto-negotiation flow control modes include the following:
l

Asymmetric PAUSE toward the link partner


The port can transmit PAUSE frames in case of congestion but cannot process received
PAUSE frames.

Symmetric PAUSE
The port can transmit PAUSE frames and process received PAUSE frames.

Both asymmetric and symmetric PAUSE


The port has the following capabilities:
Transmits and processes PAUSE frames.
Transmits PAUSE frames but cannot process received PAUSE frames.
Processes received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE frames.

Disabled
The port does not transmit or process PAUSE frames.
NOTE

OptiX RTN 310 supports only two auto-negotiation flow control modes: Disabled and Symmetric Pause, which
correspond to Disabled and Enable Symmetric Flow Control on the network management system (NMS)
respectively.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

177

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Non-auto-negotiation Flow Control


When an Ethernet port works in a fixed working mode, use non-auto-negotiation flow control.
The non-auto-negotiation flow control modes include the following:
l

Send only
The port can transmit PAUSE frames in case of congestion but cannot process received
PAUSE frames.

Receive only
The port can process received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE frames in case
of congestion.

Symmetric
The port can transmit PAUSE frames and can also process received PAUSE frames.

Disabled
The port does not transmit or process PAUSE frames.
NOTE

OptiX RTN 310 supports only two auto-negotiation flow control modes: Disabled and Symmetric Pause, which
correspond to Disabled and Enable Symmetric Flow Control on the NMS respectively.

8.7.1.3 Ethernet Port Description


An OptiX RTN 310 provides two GE service ports for transmitting radio services carried by the
Native Ethernet.
Figure 8-28 shows the physical Ethernet ports on an OptiX RTN 310.
Figure 8-28 Ethernet ports on an OptiX RTN 310

GE

COMBO

P&E

Table 8-25 lists the logical ports corresponding to the physical Ethernet ports of an OptiX RTN
310 on the network management system (NMS).
Table 8-25 Mapping between physical ports and logical ports for an OptiX RTN 310
Physical Port

Logical Port

Description

COMBO (when used as an Ethernet


optical port)

1-SHXA2-2(GE1)

l A GE1 port can be a COMBO


port or a P&E port.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

178

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Physical Port

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Logical Port

Description
l When a COMBO port functions
as a GE optical port, it can
function as a GE1 port to receive
Ethernet services.
l A COMBO port can also
function as a cross polarization
interference cancellation (XPIC)
port to receive XPIC signals or a
1+1 cascade port to receive 1+1
cascade signals. A COMBO port
can be used as only one type of
port at a time.
l A P&E port can function as a GE
electrical port.
l When a P&E port functions as a
GE electrical port and a COMBO
port functions as a GE optical
port, the two ports share the same
service channel which can
transmit Ethernet services to
only one port at a time. By
default, services are transmitted
to the GE electrical port.

P&E

GE

1-SHXA2-3 (GE2)

A GE port with a small form-factor


pluggable (SFP) module can
function as a GE optical port.

8.7.1.4 MAC Address Table Management


Entries in a MAC address table show the mapping between MAC addresses and ports. Entries
can be classified into dynamic entries, static entries, and blacklist entries.
Table 8-26 Entries in a MAC address table

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Entry

Description

Dynamic entry

A dynamic entry is learned by a bridge in SVL or IVL mode. A


dynamic entry will be aged out. It is lost after the Ethernet processing
unit is cold reset.

Static entry

A static entry is manually added by a network administrator to the


MAC address table on the network management system (NMS).
Generally, a static entry is configured for a port connected to a device
that has a known MAC address and that carries constant and heavy
traffic. A static entry will not be aged out. It is not lost after the
Ethernet processing unit is reset.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

179

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Entry

Description

Blacklist entry

A blacklist entry is also called a MAC disabled entry or a black hole


entry. It is configured by a network administrator. An Ethernet frame
whose source or destination MAC address is specified in a blacklist
entry is discarded. A blacklist entry will not be aged out. It is not
lost after the Ethernet processing unit is reset.

NOTE

If no new packet is received from a MAC address within a specified period of time, the corresponding
entry is automatically deleted. This mechanism is called aging and the specified period of time is called
aging time.

8.7.1.5 VLAN Forwarding Tables for E-Line Services


Generally, the VLAN ID carried by a VLAN-based Ethernet line (E-Line) service does not need
to be changed. If it is necessary to change a VLAN ID, you must configure a VLAN forwarding
table.
If VLAN ID change is required for a VLAN-based E-Line service, you must specify the source
VLAN ID and sink VLAN ID, as shown in the E-Line service information table in Figure
8-29. In addition, you must configure a VLAN forwarding table to allow VLAN switching
between the source and the sink.
In Figure 8-29, service 1 from NodeB 1 and service 2 from NodeB 2 are transmitted through
NE 3 to the radio network controller (RNC). Services 1 and 2 have the same VLAN ID of 100.
To prevent a VLAN ID conflict on NE 3, you can configure a VLAN forwarding table on NE
2 so that the VLAN ID of service 2 changes from 100 to 200 on NE 2.
Figure 8-29 Application of the VLAN forwarding table for an E-Line service (on NE 2)
Service 1
VLAN ID: 100

Service 1
VLAN ID: 100
Service 2
VLAN ID: 200

Port 2

E-Line

Port 1

NE 3
Port 1

RNC

NE 1

E-Line
E-Line

NodeB 1
Port 2
Port 3

Service 1
VLAN ID: 100

Transmission
network
NE 2
Port 2

E-Line

Port 1
Service 2
NodeB 2 VLAN ID: 100

Service 2
VLAN ID: 200

VLAN forwarding table


Source
Port
Port 1

Source
VLAN ID
100

Port 2

200

Port 2

Sink
VLAN ID
200

Port 1

100

Sink Port

E-Line service information table

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Source
Port

Source
VLAN ID

Sink Port

Sink
VLAN ID

Port 1

100

Port 2

200

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

180

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.7.1.6 Split Horizon Groups


To separate services that converge and to prevent broadcast storms resulting from service loops,
configure a split horizon group for Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services at specified
nodes. The logical ports within the same split horizon group cannot forward packets to each
other.
Figure 8-30 shows a typical application of a split horizon group. Each NE on the network is
configured with E-LAN services, and the microwave port and two GE ports on each NE are
configured as bridge-mounted logical ports. If a split horizon group is not configured on NE1,
its microwave port and the GE port connected to NE4 forward packets to each other, causing a
service loop and a broadcast storm. If a split horizon group is configured on NE1 and if its
microwave port and the GE port connected to NE4 are configured as members of the split horizon
group, the two ports do not forward packets to each other.
Figure 8-30 Split horizon group

NE 2

NE 1
RNC

NodeB 1
Split
horizon
group

NE 3

NE 4
NodeB 3

NodeB 2
Microwave link

Ethernet link

NOTE

l Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) prevents service loops on ring networks. If ERPS has already
been enabled for a ring network, do not configure a split horizon group because it may affect ERPS
functionality.
l OptiX RTN 310 allows only physical ports to be configured into a split horizon group. If a physical port is
mapped into several logical ports and one of those logical ports is a member of a split horizon group, the
other logical ports are added to the split horizon group automatically.

8.7.1.7 Protection for Native Ethernet Services


OptiX RTN 310 supports two protection modes for Native Ethernet services: Ethernet ring
protection switching (ERPS) and link aggregation group (LAG).
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

181

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

ERPS
ERPS is applicable to ring physical networks and can provide protection for the Ethernet local
area network (E-LAN) services between all the ring network nodes. Generally, when a ring
network is configured with ERPS, the RPL node blocks the RPL port on one side so that all the
services are transmitted through the ports on the other side. In this manner, service loops are
prevented. When a link fails or an NE becomes faulty, the RPL node unblocks its RPL port so
that services can be switched from the faulty point to the RPL port for transmission. In this
manner, protection for the ring network is achieved.
The Ethernet ring network shown in Figure 8-31 is configured with ERPS. Normally, NE1
blocks its GE port connected to NE2 to prevent a loop. When links between NE4 and NE5 are
faulty, NE1 unblocks its GE port. Services between NE4 and NE5 are switched to the route NE4NE3-NE2-NE1-NE8-NE7-NE6-NE5.
Figure 8-31 Implementation of ERPS
NE4

NE3
NE2

NE5

NodeB
RNC
NodeB
NE6

NE1
NE8

NE7

NodeB

NodeB

Protection switching

NE4

NE3

Failure
NE5

NE2

NodeB

RNC

NodeB
NE1

NE6
NE7

Ethernet cable

NE8

NodeB

NodeB

Ethernet service direction


Blocked port

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

182

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

LAG
Link aggregation allows multiple links that are attached to the same equipment to be aggregated
to form a link aggregation group (LAG) so that the bandwidths and availability of the links
increase. The aggregated links can be considered as a single logical link.
As shown in Figure 8-32, the LAG feature provides the following functions:
l

Increased link capacity


The LAG feature provides users with a cost-effective method for increasing link bandwidth.
Users obtain data links with higher bandwidths by combining multiple physical links into
one logical link without having to upgrade existing equipment. The bandwidth of the logical
link is equal to the sum of the bandwidths of the physical links. The aggregation module
distributes traffic to different members by using a load balancing algorithm, achieving load
balancing at the link level.

Improved link availability


The links in a LAG provide backup for one another dynamically. When a link fails, another
link in the LAG quickly takes over.

Figure 8-32 LAG


Link 1
Link 2
Ethernet packet

Ethernet packet
Link aggregation group

8.7.2 Native Ethernet Service Types


Native Ethernet services are classified into four types.

8.7.2.1 Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Service


The transparently transmitted point-to-point Ethernet line (E-Line) service is the basic E-Line
model. Point-to-point transmission does not involve service bandwidth sharing, service
isolation, or service distinguishing. Instead, Ethernet services are transparently transmitted
between two service access points.

Service Model
Table 8-27 describes the transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service model.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

183

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Table 8-27 Transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service model


Service Model

Traffic Flow

Service Direction

Encapsulation
Type

Description

Model 1

PORT (source)

UNI-UNI

Null (source)

The source port


transparently
transmits all the
received Ethernet
frames to the sink
port.

PORT (sink)

Null (sink)

Model 2

PORT (source)

NOTE
In service model 2,
ports process the
received Ethernet
frames according to
their TAG attributes.
Therefore, service
model 2 is not a real
transparent
transmission model
and is not
recommended.

PORT (sink)

UNI-UNI

802.1Q (source)
802.1Q (sink)

The source port


processes the
incoming Ethernet
frames based on its
TAG attribute, and
then sends the
processed Ethernet
frames to the sink
port. The sink port
processes the
Ethernet frames
based on its TAG
attribute, and then
exports the
processed Ethernet
frames.

Typical Application
Figure 8-33 shows the typical application of service model 1.
Figure 8-33 Typical application of service model 1
NE 1

Service 1

Port 1

E-Line

NE 2
Port 2

Transmission
network

Port 2

E-Line

Port 1

Service 1

In model 1, Ethernet service 1 is transmitted to NE1 through port 1, regardless of whether the
Ethernet service carries an unknown VLAN ID or no VLAN ID. Port 1 transparently transmits
Ethernet service 1 to port 2. Port 2 transmits Ethernet service 1 to NE2. Service processing on
NE2 is the same as that on NE1.
In model 2, Ethernet service 1 is transmitted to NE1 through port 1, regardless of whether the
Ethernet service carries an unknown VLAN ID or no VLAN ID. Port 1 and Port 2 process the
incoming packets based on their own TAG attributes. Then, Port 2 sends Ethernet service 1 to
NE2. Service processing on NE2 is the same as that on NE1.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

184

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.7.2.2 VLAN-based E-Line Service


You can use VLANs to separate Ethernet line (E-Line) services, which allows the E-Line
services to share one physical transmission channel. E-Line services separated in this manner
are called VLAN-based E-Line services.

Service Model
Table 8-28 provides information about the VLAN-based E-Line service model.
Table 8-28 VLAN-based E-Line service model
Service Type

Service Flow

Service Direction

Encapsulation
Type at a Port

Service
Description

VLAN-based ELine service

PORT+VLAN
(source)

UNI-UNI (UNI
stands for user-tonetwork interface.)

IEEE 802.1Q
(source)

The source port


processes incoming
Ethernet frames
based on its tag
attribute, and then
sends Ethernet
frames containing a
specific VLAN ID
to the sink port. The
sink port processes
the Ethernet frames
based on its tag
attribute, and then
transmits the
processed Ethernet
frames.

PORT+VLAN
(sink)

IEEE 802.1Q (sink)

Typical Application
Figure 8-34 shows a typical application of the VLAN-based E-Line service model. Services 1,
2, 3, and 4 from four NodeBs converge through a transmission network to a radio network
controller (RNC).
l

Services 1, 2, 3, and 4 carry different VLAN IDs.

On NE 1, services 1 and 2 are received at port 2 and port 3, respectively, and forwarded
through port 1. They share the same channel but are isolated by VLANs.

On NE 2, services 3 and 4 are received at port 2 and port 3, respectively, and forwarded
through port 1. They share the same channel but are isolated by VLANs.

On NE 3, services 1 and 2 are received at port 2, services 3 and 4 are received at port 3,
and all four services are forwarded through port 1. All the services share the same channel
but are isolated by VLANs.

Ports 2 and 3 on NE 1, NE 2, and NE 3 process incoming Ethernet frames based on their


tag attributes and transmit the Ethernet frames to port 1. Port 1 processes outgoing Ethernet
frames based on its tag attribute. Because the services have different VLAN IDs, they can
share ports 1 on NE 1, NE 2, and NE 3.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

185

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-34 VLAN-based E-Line service model


Service 1
VLAN ID: 100
Service 2
VLAN ID: 200
Service 3
VLAN ID: 300
Service 4
VLAN ID: 400

Service 1
VLAN ID: 100
Service 2
VLAN ID: 200
Port 1
NE 3
Port 1

E-Line
E-Line

RNC

NE 1
E-Line
E-Line

Port 2
Port 3

Port 2

Port 1
Service 3
VLAN ID: 300
Service 4
VLAN ID: 400

E-Line

NodeB 1

Port 3
Service 2
VLAN ID: 200
NodeB 2

Transmission
network
E-Line

Service 1
VLAN ID: 100

Port 2
Port 3

Service 3
NodeB 3 VLAN ID: 300

NE 2

Service 4
VLAN ID: 400
NodeB 4

8.7.2.3 IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Services


Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services that are forwarded based only on the MAC address
table are called IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services.

Service Model
Table 8-29 shows the IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service model.
Table 8-29 IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service model
Service Type

Tag Type

Encapsulation
Type at a Port

Logical Port
Type

Learning
Mode

Switching
Sub-domain

IEEE 802.1D
bridge-based ELAN service

TagTransparent

Null

PORT

SVL

None

Typical Application
Figure 8-35 shows a typical application of the IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service model.
Services from NodeB 1 and NodeB 2 converge at NE1 and then are transmitted to the radio
network controller (RNC). The services do not need to be separated; therefore, an IEEE 802.1D
bridge is used at NE1 to schedule services.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

186

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-35 IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service model


NE 2
Port 1

Port 2

NodeB 1

802.1D
bridge

NE 1
Port 1

Port 2

Transmission network

Port 3
RNC

NE 3

802.1D
bridge

Port 1
Port 2

NodeB 2
802.1D
bridge

8.7.2.4 IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services


You can use VLANs to separate Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services and divide an
IEEE 802.1Q bridge into multiple independent switching sub-domains. E-LAN services
separated in this manner are called IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services.

Service Model
Table 8-30 provides information about the IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service model.
Table 8-30 IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service model
Service Type

Tag Type

Encapsulation
Type at a Port

Logical Port
Type

Learning
Mode

Switching
Sub-domain

IEEE 802.1Q
bridge-based ELAN service

C-Aware

IEEE 802.1Q

PORT+VLAN

Independent
VLAN learning
(IVL)

A bridge divided
into switching
sub-domains by
VLAN

Typical Application
Figure 8-36 shows a typical application of the IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service model.
Services 1, 2, 3, and 4 from four NodeBs converge through a transmission network to a radio
network controller (RNC).
l

Services 1 and 2 have the same VLAN ID of 100, and services 3 and 4 have the same VLAN
ID of 200.

Because the VLAN ID of services 1 and 2 is different from that of services 3 and 4, IEEE
802.1Q bridges are configured: one each for NE 1, NE 2, and NE 3. The bridges are divided
into switching sub-domains by VLAN for service isolation over each bridge.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

187

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-36 IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service model


NE 2

Port 1

Service 1
VLAN ID: 100

Port 2
NodeB 1

Service 1, 2
VLAN ID: 100
Service 3, 4
VLAN ID: 200

VLAN 100

Port 1

NE 1

VLAN 100

VLAN 200

Port 3

RNC
802.1Q bridge

Port 3

Port 2
Domain 1
(VLAN ID: 100)

802.1Q bridge

Transmission network
NE
NE 3 VLAN 200
2
Port 2

Port 1
Domain 2
(VLAN ID: 200)

Service 2
VLAN ID: 100
NodeB 2

NodeB 3

Service 3
VLAN ID: 200

Port 3

802.1Q bridge

NodeB 4

Service 4
VLAN ID: 200

8.7.3 Typical Mobile Bearer Network Topologies for Ethernet


Services
Ethernet services are typically transmitted in three mobile bearer network topologies.

8.7.3.1 Networking of VLAN-based E-Line Services


VLANs can be used to separate Ethernet line (E-Line) services. With the VLAN technology,
multiple E-Line services can share one physical channel.
On the mobile bearer network shown in Figure 8-37, the VLAN IDs carried by received NodeB
services are planned in a unified manner and are unique globally. The NodeB services share the
Ethernet service bandwidth on the network (NE1 to NE8) and are isolated from each other by
means of VLAN IDs. The NodeB services are aggregated at NE1 and then transmitted through
the local backhaul network to the RNC. Therefore, in this example, services on the microwave
network of the mobile bearer network are configured as VLAN-based E-Line services.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

188

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-37 Networking diagram of VLAN-based E-Line services

NodeB 1
VLAN 1

NE3

NE4

NE7

NE1
Local backhaul
network
NodeB 2
VLAN 2

Transmission network
GE
NE8
NE2

NodeB 3
VLAN 3

NE6

Microwave link

RNC

NE5

Ethernet link

8.7.3.2 Networking of IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Services


In the case of IEEE 802.1D bridge-based Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) service
networking, data is forwarded based on MAC addresses instead of VLAN IDs.
As shown in Figure 8-38, the mobile bearer network does not need to sense whether the received
NodeB services carry any VLAN IDs. Services from each NodeB are aggregated at NE1 and
then transmitted through the local backhaul network to the radio network controller (RNC).
Therefore, in this example, the services on the radio equipment (NE1 to NE8) of the mobile
bearer network are configured as IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services. The microwave
network checks the destination ports in the MAC address table according to the destination MAC
addresses carried by the NodeB services and then forwards NodeB services to the ports.
NOTE

Because IEEE 802.1D bridge-based packets are forwarded based only on MAC addresses, the packets are
broadcast to all ports mounted to the bridge. Ports that do not require communication with one another can be
allocated to a split horizon group so that the ports are isolated from each other.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

189

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-38 Networking diagram (IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services)

NodeB 1
VLAN 1

NE3

NE4

NE7

NE1
Local backhaul
network

NodeB 2
VLAN 2

Transmission network
GE
NE8

NodeB 3
VLAN 3

NE2
NE6

Split horizon group

RNC

NE5

Microwave link

Ethernet link

8.7.3.3 Networking of IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services


In the case of IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) service
networking, services are isolated by means of VLAN IDs. That is, the IEEE 802.1Q bridge is
divided into multiple sub-switching domains, which are isolated from each other.
On the mobile bearer network shown in Figure 8-39, the VLAN IDs carried by received NodeB
services are planned in a unified manner and are unique within each domain. NodeB services in
different domains are isolated from each other by means of VLAN IDs and NodeBs in the same
domain can communicate with each other. The NodeB services are aggregated at NE1 and then
transmitted through the local backhaul network to the radio network controller (RNC).
Therefore, in this example, the services on the radio equipment of the mobile bearer network
are configured as IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services. The microwave network checks
the destination ports in the MAC address table according to the destination MAC addresses and
VLAN IDs carried by the NodeB services and then forwards NodeB services to the ports.
NOTE

IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service packets can be broadcast within each domain. Therefore, isolate the
ports that do not require communication with one another by adding the ports into a split horizon group.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

190

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-39 Networking diagram of IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services

NE7

NE4

NodeB 1
VLAN 1

NE1

Domain 1
VLAN 1 NE4

NE3
Local backhaul
network

NodeB 2
VLAN 1
Domain 2
VLAN 2

GE
NodeB 3
VLAN 2

NE2
NE6

NE5
RNC

NE8

Split horizon group

Microwave link

Ethernet link

8.7.3.4 Comparison Between the Three Networking Modes


The three networking modes differ from each other.
Table 8-31 compares the three networking modes.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

191

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Table 8-31 Comparison between the three networking modes


Networkin
g Mode

Application Scenario
Applicable
Network
Size

Applicable
VLAN ID
Allocation

Networking
of VLANbased
Ethernet line
(E-Line)
services

This
networking
mode is
applicable to
all network
sizes.

l The VLAN IDs


carried by
received base
transceiver
station (BTS)
services are
planned in a
unified manner
and are unique
globally.
l BTS services
share Ethernet
service
bandwidths and
are isolated by
means of VLAN
IDs.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Service
Stabilit
y

Service
Security

Configurati
on
Complexity

Network
Scalability

High

l Very
high

l Services
with a
certain
VLAN ID
are
transmitte
d over a
fixed
service
trail.

l The
network is
difficult
to expand.

l Servic
es
from
differe
nt
BTSs
are
isolate
d from
each
other.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l The OAM
capability
is strong
and only
point-topoint
configurat
ion is
supported.

l To add the
new
VLAN ID
after a
BTS is
added,
you must
change
the ELine
configurat
ions on all
the NEs
that the
new
service
path
traverses.

192

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Networkin
g Mode

Application Scenario
Applicable
Network
Size

Applicable
VLAN ID
Allocation

Networking
of IEEE
802.1D
bridge-based
Ethernet local
area network
(E-LAN)
services

It is
recommended
that the
network
contain less
than 50 BTSs.

l The network
does not need to
sense whether
the received BTS
services carry
any VLAN IDs.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

l Services do not
need to be
isolated between
different ports
connected to the
same bridge.a

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Service
Stabilit
y

Service
Security

Configurati
on
Complexity

Network
Scalability

Medium

l Low

l A service
trail is set
up by
means of
MAC
address
selflearning,
and is
variable.

l The
network is
easy to
expand.

l The
service
packet
s can
be
broadc
ast on
the
entire
networ
k.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l Point-tomultipoint
configurat
ion is
supported.
The OAM
capability
is
relatively
weak.

l After a
BTS is
added,
you do not
need to
change
the
configurat
ions of
other NEs
on the
network.
Instead,
you only
need to
change
the
mounted
ports on
the NE
connected
to the base
station.

193

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Networkin
g Mode

Application Scenario
Applicable
Network
Size

Applicable
VLAN ID
Allocation

Networking
of IEEE
802.1Q
bridge-based
E-LAN
services

This
networking
mode is
applicable to
all network
sizes,
especially to a
network that is
divided into
several
domains.

l The VLAN IDs


carried by
received BTS
services are
planned in a
unified manner
and are unique
within each
domain.
l The BTS
services from
different
domains are
isolated from
each other by
means of VLAN
IDs.
l BTS services
within a domain
do not need to be
isolated from
each other.a

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Service
Stabilit
y

Service
Security

Configurati
on
Complexity

Network
Scalability

Medium

l High

l Service
trails are
learned
based on
MAC
addresses
and
VLAN
IDs and
are not
fixed.

l The
network is
easy to
expand.

l The
service
packet
s are
broadc
ast
within
each
domai
n and
are
isolate
d
betwee
n
differe
nt
domai
ns.

l Point-tomultipoint
configurat
ion is
supported.
The OAM
capability
is
relatively
weak.

l After a
BTS is
added in a
domain,
you do not
need to
change
the
configurat
ions of the
other NEs
in the
domain or
the
configurat
ions of
NEs in the
other
domains.
Instead,
you only
need to
change
the
mounted
ports and
VLAN
IDs on the
NE
connected
to the base
station.

NOTE

a: To block communication between certain ports connected to a bridge, you must add the ports into a split
horizon group.

8.7.4 Configuration Process


The service configuration process differs according to the specific service type.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

194

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.7.4.1 Per-NE Configuration Process (Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point ELine Services)


This section describes the processes of configuring the service information, port information,
protection information, and quality of service (QoS) information of a transparently transmitted
point-to-point Ethernet service (E-Line) services and the process of verifying the service
configurations.

Flowchart
Figure 8-40 shows the flowchart for configuring transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line
services.
Figure 8-40 Flowchart for configuring transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line services

Required

Start

Optional
Configure a LAG.

Configure E-Line
services.

Set port attributes.

Configure QoS.

Verify Ethernet
services.

End

The steps in the configuration flowchart are described as follows:

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

195

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Configuring LAG for Ethernet Ports


Table 8-32 Process of configuring LAG for Ethernet ports
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.2.1
Creating a
LAG

When the Ethernet link between an OptiX RTN 310 NE and


UNI-side equipment requires higher bandwidth or active/
standby protection. Set parameters as follows:
l Set LAG Type to the same value on the NE and on the
UNI-side equipment. The recommended value is Static.
l Set Load Sharing to the same value on the NE and on the
UNI-side equipment. Set Load Sharing to Sharing if the
Ethernet link requires higher bandwidth, or NonSharing if the Ethernet link does not require higher
bandwidth.
l Load Sharing Hash Algorithm takes the default value of
Automatic. This parameter is valid only to load-sharing
LAGs.
l Set Reversion Mode to the same value as that for the
opposite equipment. The recommended value is
Revertive. This parameter is valid only to non-load
sharing LAGs.
l Set WTR Time(min) to the same value on the NE and on
the UNI-side equipment. It is recommended that this
parameter take its default value. This parameter is valid
only to revertive LAGs.
l Set the main and slave ports according to the network plan.
It is recommended that you set the main and slave ports of
the LAG at both ends consistently.

A.7.2.2
Setting
Parameters
for a LAG

Optional.

Configuring Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Services


Table 8-33 Process of configuring transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line services

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.3.11
Deleting an
E-LAN
Service

Required when an NE is being initially configured.


NOTE
Because an OptiX RTN 310 carries IEEE 802.1D bridge-based
Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services by default, you need
to delete the default services manually before you configure
transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line services on it.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

196

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.3.1
Creating a
Point-toPoint
Transparen
tly
Transmitte
d E-Line
Service

Required.
Set the service parameters as follows:
l Set Source and Sink according to the network plan.
l Leave VLAN ID empty for both the source and sink.
Set parameters for the source and sink ports as follows:
l Set Port Enable to Enabled.
l Set Encapsulation Type to Null.
l When the port is an Ethernet port connected to the UNIside equipment, set Working Mode to the same value on
the NE and on the UNI-side equipment. Normally, this
parameter is set to Auto-Negotiation on the UNI-side
equipment. If the port is an Ethernet port used for internal
connection, it is recommended that you set Working
Mode to Auto-Negotiation for related ports.

Setting Port Attributes


Table 8-34 Process of setting port attributes

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Step

Operation

Setting
parameter
s for an
Ethernet
port

Remarks
A.6.1.1
Setting
the Basic
Attribute
s for an
Ethernet
Port

Optional.
Set Max Frame Length (byte) to the length of the
longest frame that the port may receive. It is
recommended that this parameter take the default
value of 9600.

A.6.1.2
Configuri
ng the
Traffic
Control
Function
for an
Ethernet
Port

Required when the flow control function is enabled


on the external equipment to which the Ethernet port
is connected. Set parameters as follows:
l When the external equipment uses the non-autonegotiation flow control function, set NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode to
Enable Symmetric Flow Control.
l When the external equipment uses the autonegotiation flow control function, set
Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode to
Enable Symmetric Flow Control.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

197

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Step

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Operation

Setting
parameter
s for a
microwav
e port

Remarks
A.6.1.4
Setting
the
Advanced
Attribute
s for an
Ethernet
Port

Optional.

A.6.2.1
Setting
Basic
Attribute
s for a
Microwav
e Port

Optional.

A.6.2.3
Setting
Advanced
Attribute
s for a
Microwav
e Port

Optional.

NOTE

Because the Web LCT does not provide a window specifically for configuring microwave ports, configure
microwave port parameters in the window for configuring Ethernet port parameters.

Configuring QoS
Table 8-35 Process of configuring QoS
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.6.1
Modifying
the
Mapping
for a DS
Domain

Required if the default mappings for the Differentiated


Services (DS) domain are inapplicable.

A.7.6.2
Changing
the Packet
Type
Trusted by a
Port

Required if the priority type of an Ethernet service is not


CVLAN, which is the default packet type trusted by the
DiffServ domain.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Set related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

198

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.6.4
Setting
Egress
Queue
Scheduling
Policies

Required if a port is required to schedule traffic according to


a certain queue scheduling policy in the case of traffic
congestion. The default queue scheduling mode is SP+WRR
(SP is short for strict priority and WRR for weighted round
robin). AF1 to AF4 queues are WRR queues (allocated the
same weight) and the other queues are SP queues.
Set the parameters according to the network plan.

A.7.6.5
Setting
Traffic
Shaping for
Egress
Queues

Required if the bandwidth for egress port queues needs to be


restricted.

A.7.6.6
Setting the
Congestion
Manageme
nt Mode for
Egress
Queues

Required if a certain congestion management mode is


required for queues at an egress port. The default mode is tail
drop.

A.7.6.3
Configuring
Port
Shaping

Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an


Ethernet service occupies.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Set related parameters according to the network plan.

Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations


Table 8-36 Process of verifying Ethernet service configurations
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.7.1
Creating an
MD

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved
in the service test are located. Set parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name and Maintenance
Domain Level to the same values for the NEs.
l For an Ethernet service between two edge nodes on the
transport network, it is recommended that Maintenance
Domain Level takes its default value of 4. For an Ethernet
service between two internal NEs on the transport
network, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value
smaller than 4. For an Ethernet service between two
Ethernet ports on the same NE, set Maintenance Domain
Level to a value smaller than the value that is set in the
test of an Ethernet service between two internal NEs on
the transport network.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

199

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.7.2
Creating an
MA

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved
in the service test are located. Set parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of
Maintenance Domain Name that is set in the preceding
step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the same value
for the NEs.
l Set Relevant Service to the same service for the NEs.
l It is recommended that you set CC Test Transmit
Period to 1s.

A.7.7.3
Creating an
MEP

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved
in the service test are located. Set parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of
Maintenance Association Name that is set in the
preceding step.
l Set Port to the Ethernet ports that are involved in the
service test.
l Set MP ID to different values for maintenance association
end points (MEPs) in the same maintenance domain (MD).
l If the OAM information initiated by the MEP travels
through the packet switching unit on the local NE, set
Direction of the MEP to Ingress. Otherwise, set
Direction to Egress.
l Set CC Status to Active, as the MEP ID is used to identify
the MEP during the loopback (LB) test.

A.7.7.4
Creating a
Remote
MEP in an
MA

Required for the NE where the Ethernet ports involved in the


OAM operation are located. Set parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of
Maintenance Domain Name that is set in the preceding
step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of
Maintenance Association Name that is set in the
preceding step.
l To ensure that an MEP can respond to the OAM operations
initiated by the other MEPs in the same maintenance
association (MA), you need to set the other MEPs as the
remote MEPs.
NOTE
When two MEPs are on the same NE, you do not need to configure
remote MEPs.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

A.7.7.7
Performing
an LB Test

Required.
The LB test result should show that no packet loss occurs.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

200

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.7.4.2 End-to-End Configuration Process (Transparently Transmitted Point-toPoint E-Line Services)


This section describes the processes of configuring the service information, port information,
protection information, and quality of service (QoS) information for a transparently transmitted
point-to-point Ethernet line (E-Line) service in end-to-end mode and the process of verifying
the service configurations.

Flowchart
Figure 8-41 shows the flowchart for configuring transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line
services.
Figure 8-41 Flowchart for configuring transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line services

Required

Start

Optional
Set port attributes.

Configure a LAG.

Configure E-Line
services.

Configure QoS.

Verify Ethernet
services.

End

The steps in the configuration flowchart are described as follows:

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

201

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Setting Port Attributes


Table 8-37 Process of setting port attributes
Step

Operation

Setting
Parameter
s for an
Ethernet
Port

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Setting
Parameter
s for a
Microwav
e Port

Remarks
A.6.1.1
Setting
the Basic
Attribute
s for an
Ethernet
Port

Required.

A.6.1.2
Configuri
ng the
Traffic
Control
Function
for an
Ethernet
Port

Required when the flow control function is enabled


on the external equipment to which the Ethernet port
is connected. Set parameters as follows:

A.6.1.4
Setting
the
Advanced
Attribute
s for an
Ethernet
Port

Optional.

A.6.2.1
Setting
Basic
Attribute
s for a
Microwav
e Port

Required.
Set Port Mode to Layer 2 and set Encapsulation
Type to Null.

A.6.2.3
Setting
Advanced
Attribute
s for a
Microwav
e Port

Optional.

l Set Port Mode to Layer 2 and set


Encapsulation Type to Null.
l Set Max Frame Length (byte) to the length of
the longest frame that the port may receive. It is
recommended that this parameter take the default
value of 9600.

l When the external equipment uses the non-autonegotiation flow control function, set NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode to
Enable Symmetric Flow Control.
l When the external equipment uses the autonegotiation flow control function, set
Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode to
Enable Symmetric Flow Control.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

202

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Configuring LAG for Ethernet Ports


Table 8-38 Process of configuring LAG for Ethernet ports
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.2.1
Creating a
LAG

When the Ethernet link between an OptiX RTN 310 NE and


UNI-side equipment requires higher bandwidth or active/
standby protection. Set parameters as follows:
l Set LAG Type to the same value on the NE and on the
UNI-side equipment. The recommended value is Static.
l Set Load Sharing to the same value on the NE and on the
UNI-side equipment. Set Load Sharing to Sharing if the
Ethernet link requires higher bandwidth, or NonSharing if the Ethernet link does not require higher
bandwidth.
l Load Sharing Hash Algorithm takes the default value of
Automatic. This parameter is valid only to load-sharing
LAGs.
l Set Reversion Mode to the same value as that for the
opposite equipment. The recommended value is
Revertive. This parameter is valid only to non-load
sharing LAGs.
l Set WTR Time(min) to the same value on the NE and on
the UNI-side equipment. It is recommended that this
parameter take its default value. This parameter is valid
only to revertive LAGs.
l Set the main and slave ports according to the network plan.
It is recommended that you set the main and slave ports of
the LAG at both ends consistently.

A.7.2.2
Setting
Parameters
for a LAG

Optional.

Configuring Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Services


Table 8-39 Process of configuring transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line services

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.3.11
Deleting an
E-LAN
Service

Required when an NE is being initially configured.


NOTE
Because an OptiX RTN 310 carries IEEE 802.1D bridge-based
Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services by default, you need
to delete the default services manually before you configure
transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line services on it.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

203

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.3.4.1
Creating a
Fiber/Cable
by Using the
Search
Method

Perform this task to create microwave links or Ethernet fibers/


cables for service paths if they have not been created on Main
Topology of the U2000.
Set Automatically Allocate Address to No when creating
Ethernet fiber/cable.

A.10.2
Creating a
Point-toPoint
Transparen
tly
Transmitte
d E-Line
Service

Required.
Set related parameters according to the service planning
information and parameter planning information.

Configuring QoS
Table 8-40 Process of configuring QoS
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.6.1
Modifying
the
Mapping
for a DS
Domain

Required if the default mappings for the Differentiated


Services (DS) domain are inapplicable.

A.7.6.2
Changing
the Packet
Type
Trusted by a
Port

Required if the priority type of an Ethernet service is not


CVLAN, which is the default packet type trusted by the
DiffServ domain.

A.7.6.4
Setting
Egress
Queue
Scheduling
Policies

Required if a port is required to schedule traffic according to


a certain queue scheduling policy in the case of traffic
congestion. The default queue scheduling mode is SP+WRR
(SP is short for strict priority and WRR for weighted round
robin). AF1 to AF4 queues are WRR queues (allocated the
same weight) and the other queues are SP queues.

Set related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

204

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.6.5
Setting
Traffic
Shaping for
Egress
Queues

Required if the bandwidth for egress port queues needs to be


restricted.

A.7.6.6
Setting the
Congestion
Manageme
nt Mode for
Egress
Queues

Required if a certain congestion management mode is


required for queues at an egress port. The default mode is tail
drop.

A.7.6.3
Configuring
Port
Shaping

Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an


Ethernet service occupies.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Set related parameters according to the network plan.

Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations


Table 8-41 Process of verifying Ethernet service configurations
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.10.6
Verifying a
Native
Ethernet
Service

Required.
The loopback (LB) test result should show that no packet loss
occurs.

8.7.4.3 Per-NE Configuration Process (VLAN-based E-Line Services)


This section describes the processes of configuring the service information, port information,
protection information, and quality of service (QoS) information for a VLAN-based Ethernet
line (E-Line) service and the process of verifying the service configurations.

Flowchart
Figure 8-42 shows the flowchart for configuring VLAN-based E-Line services.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

205

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-42 Flowchart for configuring VLAN-based E-Line services

Required

Start

Optional
Configure a LAG.

Configure E-Line
services.

Set port attributes.

Configure QoS.

Verify Ethernet
services.

End

The steps in the configuration flowchart are described as follows:

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

206

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Configuring LAG for Ethernet Ports


Table 8-42 Process of configuring LAG for Ethernet ports
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.2.1
Creating a
LAG

When the Ethernet link between an OptiX RTN 310 NE and


UNI-side equipment requires higher bandwidth or active/
standby protection. Set parameters as follows:
l Set LAG Type to the same value on the NE and on the
UNI-side equipment. The recommended value is Static.
l Set Load Sharing to the same value on the NE and on the
UNI-side equipment. Set Load Sharing to Sharing if the
Ethernet link requires higher bandwidth, or NonSharing if the Ethernet link does not require higher
bandwidth.
l Load Sharing Hash Algorithm takes the default value of
Automatic. This parameter is valid only to load-sharing
LAGs.
l Set Reversion Mode to the same value as that for the
opposite equipment. The recommended value is
Revertive. This parameter is valid only to non-load
sharing LAGs.
l Set WTR Time(min) to the same value on the NE and on
the UNI-side equipment. It is recommended that this
parameter take its default value. This parameter is valid
only to revertive LAGs.
l Set the main and slave ports according to the network plan.
It is recommended that you set the main and slave ports of
the LAG at both ends consistently.

A.7.2.2
Setting
Parameters
for a LAG

Optional.

Configuring VLAN-based E-Line Services


Table 8-43 Process of configuring VLAN-based E-Line services

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.3.11
Deleting an
E-LAN
Service

Required when an NE is being initially configured.


NOTE
Because an OptiX RTN 310 carries IEEE 802.1D bridge-based
Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services by default, you need
to delete the default services manually before you configure VLANbased E-Line services on it.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

207

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.3.2
Creating a
VLANbased ELine Service

Required.
Set the service parameters as follows:
l Set Source and Sink according to the network plan.
l Set VLAN ID for the source and sink according to the
network plan.
Set parameters for the source and sink ports as follows:
l Set Port Enable to Enabled.
l Set Encapsulation Type to 802.1Q.
l When the port is an Ethernet port connected to the UNIside equipment, set Working Mode to the same value on
the NE and on the UNI-side equipment. Normally, this
parameter is set to Auto-Negotiation on the UNI-side
equipment. If the port is an Ethernet port used for internal
connection, it is recommended that you set Working
Mode to Auto-Negotiation for related ports.
l Set Tag according to the following principles:
If all the accessed services carry VLAN tags (tagged
frames), set Tag to Tag Aware.
If none of the accessed services carries VLAN tags
(untagged frames), set Tag to Access, and set Default
VLAN ID and VLAN Priority according to the
network plan.
When the accessed services contain tagged frames and
untagged frames, set Tag to Hybrid, and set Default
VLAN ID and VLAN Priority according to the
network plan.
NOTE
If PLA without NE-level protection has been configured, Ethernet
services do not need to be configured for the standby NE. If 1+1
protection or PLA with NE-level protection has been configured,
configure Ethernet services for the main and standby NEs
consistently.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

A.7.3.3
Creating an
E-Line
Service for
Transmittin
g Layer 2
Protocol
Packets

Required when Layer 2 protocol packets need to be


transparently transmitted.

A.7.3.4
Creating
VLAN
Forwarding
Table
Entries

Required when the VLAN tags of the Ethernet service need


to be switched at the source and sink.
The parameters need to be set according to the network plan.
NOTE
The corresponding VLAN forwarding table items need to be
configured for the source port and sink port.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

208

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Setting Port Attributes


Table 8-44 Process of setting port attributes
Step

Operation

Setting the
parameter
s of
Ethernet
ports

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Setting the
parameter
s of
microwav
e ports

Remarks
A.6.1.1
Setting
the Basic
Attribute
s for an
Ethernet
Port

Optional.
Set Max Frame Length (byte) to the length of the
longest frame that the port may receive. It is
recommended that this parameter take the default
value of 9600.

A.6.1.2
Configuri
ng the
Traffic
Control
Function
for an
Ethernet
Port

Required when the flow control function is enabled


on the external equipment to which the Ethernet port
is connected. Set parameters as follows:

A.6.1.4
Setting
the
Advanced
Attribute
s for an
Ethernet
Port

Optional.

A.5.8
Configuri
ng
Ethernet
Frame
Header
Compress
ion and
Errored
Frame
Discardin
g Over
Air
Interfaces

Optional.

l When the external equipment uses the non-autonegotiation flow control function, set NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode to
Enable Symmetric Flow Control.
l When the external equipment uses the autonegotiation flow control function, set
Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode to
Enable Symmetric Flow Control.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

209

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Step

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Operation

Remarks
A.6.2.2
Setting
Layer 2
Attribute
s for a
Microwav
e Port

Optional.

A.6.2.3
Setting
Advanced
Attribute
s for a
Microwav
e Port

Optional.

NOTE

Because the Web LCT does not provide a window specifically for configuring microwave ports, configure
microwave port parameters in the window for configuring Ethernet port parameters.

Configuring QoS
Table 8-45 Process of configuring QoS
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.6.1
Modifying
the
Mapping
for a DS
Domain

Required if the default mappings for the Differentiated


Services (DS) domain are inapplicable.

A.7.6.2
Changing
the Packet
Type
Trusted by a
Port

Required if the priority type of an Ethernet service is not


CVLAN, which is the default packet type trusted by the
DiffServ domain.

A.7.6.4
Setting
Egress
Queue
Scheduling
Policies

Required if a port is required to schedule traffic according to


a certain queue scheduling policy in the case of traffic
congestion. The default queue scheduling mode is SP+WRR
(SP is short for strict priority and WRR for weighted round
robin). AF1 to AF4 queues are WRR queues (allocated the
same weight) and the other queues are SP queues.

Set related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

210

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.6.5
Setting
Traffic
Shaping for
Egress
Queues

Required if the bandwidth for egress port queues needs to be


restricted.

A.7.6.6
Setting the
Congestion
Manageme
nt Mode for
Egress
Queues

Required if a certain congestion management mode is


required for queues at an egress port. The default mode is tail
drop.

A.7.6.3
Configuring
Port
Shaping

Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an


Ethernet service occupies.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Set related parameters according to the network plan.

Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations


Table 8-46 Process of verifying Ethernet service configurations
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.7.1
Creating an
MD

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved
in the service test are located. Set parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name and Maintenance
Domain Level to the same values for the NEs.
l For an Ethernet service between two edge nodes on the
transport network, it is recommended that Maintenance
Domain Level takes its default value of 4. For an Ethernet
service between two internal NEs on the transport
network, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value
smaller than 4. For an Ethernet service between two
Ethernet ports on the same NE, set Maintenance Domain
Level to a value smaller than the value that is set in the
test of an Ethernet service between two internal NEs on
the transport network.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

211

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.7.2
Creating an
MA

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved
in the service test are located. Set parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of
Maintenance Domain Name that is set in the preceding
step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the same value
for the NEs.
l Set Relevant Service to the same service for the NEs.
l It is recommended that you set CC Test Transmit
Period to 1s.

A.7.7.3
Creating an
MEP

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved
in the service test are located. Set parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of
Maintenance Association Name that is set in the
preceding step.
l Set Port to the Ethernet ports that are involved in the
service test.
l Set MP ID to different values for maintenance association
end points (MEPs) in the same maintenance domain (MD).
l If the OAM information initiated by the MEP travels
through the packet switching unit on the local NE, set
Direction of the MEP to Ingress. Otherwise, set
Direction to Egress.
l Set CC Status to Active, as the MEP ID is used to identify
the MEP during the loopback (LB) test.

A.7.7.4
Creating a
Remote
MEP in an
MA

Required for the NE where the Ethernet ports involved in the


OAM operation are located. Set parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of
Maintenance Domain Name that is set in the preceding
step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of
Maintenance Association Name that is set in the
preceding step.
l To ensure that an MEP can respond to the OAM operations
initiated by the other MEPs in the same maintenance
association (MA), you need to set the other MEPs as the
remote MEPs.
NOTE
When two MEPs are on the same NE, you do not need to configure
remote MEPs.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

A.7.7.7
Performing
an LB Test

Required.
The LB test result should show that no packet loss occurs.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

212

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.7.4.4 End-to-End Configuration Process (VLAN-based E-Line Services)


This section describes the processes of configuring the service information, port information,
protection information, and quality of service (QoS) information for a VLAN-based Ethernet
line (E-Line) service in end-to-end mode and the process of verifying the service configurations.

Flowchart
Figure 8-43 shows the flowchart for configuring VLAN-based E-Line services.
Figure 8-43 Flowchart for configuring VLAN-based E-Line services

Required

Start

Optional
Set port attributes.

Configure a LAG.

Configure E-Line
services.

Configure QoS.

Verify Ethernet
services.

End

The steps in the configuration flowchart are described as follows:

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

213

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Setting Port Attributes


Table 8-47 Process of setting port attributes
Step

Operation

Setting the
parameter
s of
Ethernet
ports

Remarks
A.6.1.1
Setting
the Basic
Attribute
s for an
Ethernet
Port

Required.

A.6.1.2
Configuri
ng the
Traffic
Control
Function
for an
Ethernet
Port

Required when the flow control function is enabled


on the external equipment to which the Ethernet port
is connected. Set parameters as follows:

A.6.1.3
Setting
the Layer
2
Attribute
s for an
Ethernet
Port

Required. Set parameters as follows:

l Set Port Mode to Layer 2 and set


Encapsulation Type to 802.1Q.
l Set Max Frame Length (byte) to the length of
the longest frame that the port may receive. It is
recommended that this parameter take the default
value of 9600.

l When the external equipment uses the non-autonegotiation flow control function, set NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode to
Enable Symmetric Flow Control.
l When the external equipment uses the autonegotiation flow control function, set
Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode to
Enable Symmetric Flow Control.

l If all the accessed services carry VLAN tags


(tagged frames), set Tag to Tag Aware.
l If none of the accessed services carries VLAN
tags (untagged frames), set Tag to Access, and
set Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority
according to the network plan.
l When the accessed services contain tagged
frames and untagged frames, set Tag to
Hybrid, and set Default VLAN ID and VLAN
Priority according to the network plan.

A.6.1.4
Setting
the
Advanced
Attribute
s for an
Ethernet
Port

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Optional.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

214

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Step

Operation

Setting the
parameter
s of
microwav
e ports

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Remarks
A.5.8
Configuri
ng
Ethernet
Frame
Header
Compress
ion and
Errored
Frame
Discardin
g Over
Air
Interfaces

Required.
Set Port Mode to Layer 2 and set Encapsulation
Type to 802.1Q.

A.6.2.2
Setting
Layer 2
Attribute
s for a
Microwav
e Port

Required. Set parameters as follows:


l If all the accessed services carry VLAN tags
(tagged frames), set Tag to Tag Aware.
l If none of the accessed services carries VLAN
tags (untagged frames), set Tag to Access, and
set Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority
according to the network plan.
l When the accessed services contain tagged
frames and untagged frames, set Tag to
Hybrid, and set Default VLAN ID and VLAN
Priority according to the network plan.

A.6.2.3
Setting
Advanced
Attribute
s for a
Microwav
e Port

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Optional.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

215

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Configuring LAG for Ethernet Ports


Table 8-48 Process of configuring LAG for Ethernet ports
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.2.1
Creating a
LAG

When the Ethernet link between an OptiX RTN 310 NE and


UNI-side equipment requires higher bandwidth or active/
standby protection. Set parameters as follows:
l Set LAG Type to the same value on the NE and on the
UNI-side equipment. The recommended value is Static.
l Set Load Sharing to the same value on the NE and on the
UNI-side equipment. Set Load Sharing to Sharing if the
Ethernet link requires higher bandwidth, or NonSharing if the Ethernet link does not require higher
bandwidth.
l Load Sharing Hash Algorithm takes the default value of
Automatic. This parameter is valid only to load-sharing
LAGs.
l Set Reversion Mode to the same value as that for the
opposite equipment. The recommended value is
Revertive. This parameter is valid only to non-load
sharing LAGs.
l Set WTR Time(min) to the same value on the NE and on
the UNI-side equipment. It is recommended that this
parameter take its default value. This parameter is valid
only to revertive LAGs.
l Set the main and slave ports according to the network plan.
It is recommended that you set the main and slave ports of
the LAG at both ends consistently.

A.7.2.2
Setting
Parameters
for a LAG

Optional.

Configuring VLAN-based E-Line Services


Table 8-49 Process of configuring VLAN-based E-Line services

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.3.11
Deleting an
E-LAN
Service

Required when an NE is being initially configured.


NOTE
Because an OptiX RTN 310 carries IEEE 802.1D bridge-based
Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services by default, you need
to delete the default services manually before you configure VLANbased E-Line services on it.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

216

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.3.4.1
Creating a
Fiber/Cable
by Using the
Search
Method

Perform this task to create microwave links or Ethernet fibers/


cables for service paths if they have not been created on Main
Topology of the U2000.
Set Automatically Allocate Address to No when creating
Ethernet fiber/cable.

A.10.3
Creating a
VLANbased ELine Service

Required.

A.7.3.3
Creating an
E-Line
Service for
Transmittin
g Layer 2
Protocol
Packets

Required when Layer 2 protocol packets need to be


transparently transmitted.

A.7.3.4
Creating
VLAN
Forwarding
Table
Entries

Required when the VLAN tags of the Ethernet service need


to be switched at the source and sink.

Set related parameters according to the service planning


information and parameter planning information.

The parameters need to be set according to the network plan.


NOTE
The corresponding VLAN forwarding table items need to be
configured for the source port and sink port.

Configuring QoS
Table 8-50 Process of configuring QoS
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.6.1
Modifying
the
Mapping
for a DS
Domain

Required if the default mappings for the Differentiated


Services (DS) domain are inapplicable.

A.7.6.2
Changing
the Packet
Type
Trusted by a
Port

Required if the priority type of an Ethernet service is not


CVLAN, which is the default packet type trusted by the
DiffServ domain.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Set related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

217

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.6.4
Setting
Egress
Queue
Scheduling
Policies

Required if a port is required to schedule traffic according to


a certain queue scheduling policy in the case of traffic
congestion. The default queue scheduling mode is SP+WRR
(SP is short for strict priority and WRR for weighted round
robin). AF1 to AF4 queues are WRR queues (allocated the
same weight) and the other queues are SP queues.
Set the parameters according to the network plan.

A.7.6.5
Setting
Traffic
Shaping for
Egress
Queues

Required if the bandwidth for egress port queues needs to be


restricted.

A.7.6.6
Setting the
Congestion
Manageme
nt Mode for
Egress
Queues

Required if a certain congestion management mode is


required for queues at an egress port. The default mode is tail
drop.

A.7.6.3
Configuring
Port
Shaping

Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an


Ethernet service occupies.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Set related parameters according to the network plan.

Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations


Table 8-51 Process of verifying Ethernet service configurations
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.10.6
Verifying a
Native
Ethernet
Service

Required.
The loopback (LB) test result should show that no packet loss
occurs.

8.7.4.5 Per-NE Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Services)


This section describes the processes of configuring the service information, port information,
protection information, and quality of service (QoS) information for an IEEE 802.1D bridgebased Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) service and the process of verifying the service
configurations.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

218

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Flowchart
Figure 8-44 shows the flowchart for configuring IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services.
Figure 8-44 Flowchart for configuring IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services

Required

Start

Optional
Configure a LAG.

Configure ERPS
protection.

Configure E-LAN
services.

Set port attributes.

Configure QoS.

Verify Ethernet
services.

End

The steps in the configuration flowchart are described as follows:

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

219

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Configuring LAG for Ethernet Ports


Table 8-52 Process of configuring LAG for Ethernet ports
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.2.1
Creating a
LAG

When the Ethernet link between an OptiX RTN 310 NE and


UNI-side equipment requires higher bandwidth or active/
standby protection. Set parameters as follows:
l Set LAG Type to the same value on the NE and on the
UNI-side equipment. The recommended value is Static.
l Set Load Sharing to the same value on the NE and on the
UNI-side equipment. Set Load Sharing to Sharing if the
Ethernet link requires higher bandwidth, or NonSharing if the Ethernet link does not require higher
bandwidth.
l Load Sharing Hash Algorithm takes the default value of
Automatic. This parameter is valid only to load-sharing
LAGs.
l Set Reversion Mode to the same value as that for the
opposite equipment. The recommended value is
Revertive. This parameter is valid only to non-load
sharing LAGs.
l Set WTR Time(min) to the same value on the NE and on
the UNI-side equipment. It is recommended that this
parameter take its default value. This parameter is valid
only to revertive LAGs.
l Set the main and slave ports according to the network plan.
It is recommended that you set the main and slave ports of
the LAG at both ends consistently.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

A.7.2.2
Setting
Parameters
for a LAG

Optional.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

220

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Configuring ERPS Protection


Table 8-53 Process of configuring ERPS protection
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.1.1 Creating an ERP


Instance

Required when an Ethernet


ring needs to be protected and
service loops need to be
avoided on the Ethernet ring.
Perform the configuration
based on the service plan and
the parameter planning
principles in the operation.

A.7.1.2 Setting ERPS


Protocol Parameters

Required if the values of the


default parameters of the
Ethernet ring protection
switching (ERPS) timers
need to be changed.
Set Hold-Off Time(ms),
Guard Time(ms), WTR
Time(mm:ss), and Packet
Transmit Interval(s)
according to the actual
requirements. Set these
parameters to the same
values for all the NEs on the
network.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

221

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Configuring IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Services


Table 8-54 Process of configuring IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.3.5 Creating an IEEE


802.1D Bridge-based ELAN Service

Optional.
Set the service parameters as follows:
l Set Source and Sink according to the network
plan.
l Leave VLAN ID empty for both the source and
sink.
l Set Tag Type to Tag-Transparent.
l Set Self-Learning MAC Address to Enabled
according to the network plan.
Set parameters for the source and sink ports as follows:
l Set Port Enable to Enabled.
l Set Encapsulation Type to Null.
l When the port is an Ethernet port connected to the
UNI-side equipment, set Working Mode to the
same value on the NE and on the UNI-side
equipment. Normally, this parameter is set to
Auto-Negotiation on the UNI-side equipment. If
the port is an Ethernet port used for internal
connection, it is recommended that you set
Working Mode to Auto-Negotiation for related
ports.
l To disable packet forwarding between certain ELAN service ports, configure the ports as Split
Horizon Group Members on the Config Split
Horizon Group window.
NOTE
IEEE 802.1D bridge-based services are configured for the
OptiX RTN 310 by default. This step is required only when
IEEE 802.1D bridge-based services need to be reconfigured
for the OptiX RTN 310.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

A.7.3.9 Changing Logical


Ports Mounted to a
Bridge

Optional.

Mana
ging
the
MAC
addres
s table

A.7.4.2 Creating
a Blacklist MAC
Address Entry

Required when usage of E-LAN services needs to be


disabled on certain MAC address host.

A.7.4.1 Creating
a Static MAC
Address Entry

Required if you need to set certain MAC address


entries not to age.

NOTE
Perform this operation when you need to change the type of
a logical port mounted to a bridge, because an OptiX RTN
310 carries IEEE 802.1D bridge-based services by default.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Set the parameters according to the network planning


information.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

222

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Step

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Operation

Remarks

A.7.4.3
Managing a
Dynamic MAC
Address Table
4

A.7.5 Setting the Mode


for Processing an
Unknown Frame of an ELAN Service

Required if the aging function needs to be disabled or


if the default aging time (five minutes) needs to be
changed.
Set the parameters according to the network plan.
Optional. By default, the processing mode for
unknown frames is flood.

NOTE

Because the Web LCT does not provide a window specifically for configuring microwave ports, configure
microwave port parameters in the window for configuring Ethernet port parameters.

Setting Port Attributes


Table 8-55 Process of setting port attributes

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Step

Operation

Setting the
parameter
s of
Ethernet
ports

Remarks
A.6.1.1
Setting
the Basic
Attribute
s for an
Ethernet
Port

Optional.
Set Max Frame Length (byte) to the length of the
longest frame that the port may receive. It is
recommended that this parameter take the default
value of 9600.

A.6.1.2
Configuri
ng the
Traffic
Control
Function
for an
Ethernet
Port

Required when the flow control function is enabled


on the external equipment to which the Ethernet port
is connected. Set parameters as follows:

A.6.1.4
Setting
the
Advanced
Attribute
s for an
Ethernet
Port

Required when you need to enable the port self-loop


test and automatic loopback shutdown functions or
to enable the broadcast packet suppression function.

l When the external equipment uses the non-autonegotiation flow control function, set NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode to
Enable Symmetric Flow Control.
l When the external equipment uses the autonegotiation flow control function, set
Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode to
Enable Symmetric Flow Control.

Set Loopback check, Loopback port shutdown,


Enabling broadcast packet suppression, and
Broadcast packet suppression threshold as
desired.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

223

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Step

Operation

Setting the
parameter
s of
microwav
e ports

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Remarks
A.6.2.1
Setting
Basic
Attribute
s for a
Microwav
e Port

Optional.

A.6.2.3
Setting
Advanced
Attribute
s for a
Microwav
e Port

Required when you need to enable the port self-loop


test and automatic loopback shutdown functions or
to enable the broadcast packet suppression function.
Set Loopback check, Loopback port shutdown,
Enabling broadcast packet suppression, and
Broadcast packet suppression threshold as
desired.

NOTE

Because the Web LCT does not provide a window specifically for configuring microwave ports, configure
microwave port parameters in the window for configuring Ethernet port parameters.

Configuring QoS
Table 8-56 Process of configuring QoS
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.6.1
Modifying
the
Mapping
for a DS
Domain

Required if the default mappings for the Differentiated


Services (DS) domain are inapplicable.

A.7.6.2
Changing
the Packet
Type
Trusted by a
Port

Required if the priority type of an Ethernet service is not


CVLAN, which is the default packet type trusted by the
DiffServ domain.

A.7.6.4
Setting
Egress
Queue
Scheduling
Policies

Required if a port is required to schedule traffic according to


a certain queue scheduling policy in the case of traffic
congestion. The default queue scheduling mode is SP+WRR
(SP is short for strict priority and WRR for weighted round
robin). AF1 to AF4 queues are WRR queues (allocated the
same weight) and the other queues are SP queues.

Set related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

224

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.6.5
Setting
Traffic
Shaping for
Egress
Queues

Required if the bandwidth for egress port queues needs to be


restricted.

A.7.6.6
Setting the
Congestion
Manageme
nt Mode for
Egress
Queues

Required if a certain congestion management mode is


required for queues at an egress port. The default mode is tail
drop.

A.7.6.3
Configuring
Port
Shaping

Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an


Ethernet service occupies.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Set related parameters according to the network plan.

Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations


Table 8-57 Process of verifying Ethernet service configurations
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.7.1
Creating an
MD

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved
in the service test are located. Set parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name and Maintenance
Domain Level to the same values for the NEs.
l For an Ethernet service between two edge nodes on the
transport network, it is recommended that Maintenance
Domain Level takes its default value of 4. For an Ethernet
service between two internal NEs on the transport
network, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value
smaller than 4. For an Ethernet service between two
Ethernet ports on the same NE, set Maintenance Domain
Level to a value smaller than the value that is set in the
test of an Ethernet service between two internal NEs on
the transport network.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

225

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.7.2
Creating an
MA

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved
in the service test are located. Set parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of
Maintenance Domain Name that is set in the preceding
step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the same value
for the NEs.
l Set Relevant Service to the same service for the NEs.
l It is recommended that you set CC Test Transmit
Period to 1s.

A.7.7.3
Creating an
MEP

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved
in the service test are located. Set parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of
Maintenance Association Name that is set in the
preceding step.
l Set Port to the Ethernet ports that are involved in the
service test.
l Set MP ID to different values for maintenance association
end points (MEPs) in the same maintenance domain (MD).
l If the OAM information initiated by the MEP travels
through the packet switching unit on the local NE, set
Direction of the MEP to Ingress. Otherwise, set
Direction to Egress.
l Set CC Status to Active, as the MEP ID is used to identify
the MEP during the loopback (LB) test.

A.7.7.4
Creating a
Remote
MEP in an
MA

Required for the NE where the Ethernet ports involved in the


OAM operation are located. Set parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of
Maintenance Domain Name that is set in the preceding
step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of
Maintenance Association Name that is set in the
preceding step.
l To ensure that an MEP can respond to the OAM operations
initiated by the other MEPs in the same maintenance
association (MA), you need to set the other MEPs as the
remote MEPs.
NOTE
When two MEPs are on the same NE, you do not need to configure
remote MEPs.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

A.7.7.7
Performing
an LB Test

Required.
The LB test result should show that no packet loss occurs.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

226

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.7.4.6 End-to-End Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN


Services)
This section describes the processes of configuring the service information, port information,
protection information, and quality of service (QoS) information for an IEEE 802.1D bridgebased Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) service in end-to-end mode and the process of
verifying the service configurations.

Flowchart
Figure 8-45 shows the flowchart for configuring IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services.
Figure 8-45 Flowchart for configuring IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services

Required

Start

Optional
Configure a LAG.

Configure ERPS
protection.

Configure E-LAN
services.

Configure QoS.

Verify Ethernet
services.

End

The steps in the configuration flowchart are described as follows:

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

227

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Configuring LAG for Ethernet Ports


Table 8-58 Process of configuring LAG for Ethernet ports
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.2.1
Creating a
LAG

When the Ethernet link between an OptiX RTN 310 NE and


UNI-side equipment requires higher bandwidth or active/
standby protection. Set parameters as follows:
l Set LAG Type to the same value on the NE and on the
UNI-side equipment. The recommended value is Static.
l Set Load Sharing to the same value on the NE and on the
UNI-side equipment. Set Load Sharing to Sharing if the
Ethernet link requires higher bandwidth, or NonSharing if the Ethernet link does not require higher
bandwidth.
l Load Sharing Hash Algorithm takes the default value of
Automatic. This parameter is valid only to load-sharing
LAGs.
l Set Reversion Mode to the same value as that for the
opposite equipment. The recommended value is
Revertive. This parameter is valid only to non-load
sharing LAGs.
l Set WTR Time(min) to the same value on the NE and on
the UNI-side equipment. It is recommended that this
parameter take its default value. This parameter is valid
only to revertive LAGs.
l Set the main and slave ports according to the network plan.
It is recommended that you set the main and slave ports of
the LAG at both ends consistently.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

A.7.2.2
Setting
Parameters
for a LAG

Optional.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

228

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Configuring ERPS Protection


Table 8-59 Process of configuring ERPS protection
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.1.1 Creating an ERP


Instance

Required when an Ethernet


ring needs to be protected and
service loops need to be
avoided on the Ethernet ring.
Perform the configuration
based on the service plan and
the parameter planning
principles in the operation.

A.7.1.2 Setting ERPS


Protocol Parameters

Required if the values of the


default parameters of the
Ethernet ring protection
switching (ERPS) timers
need to be changed.
Set Hold-Off Time(ms),
Guard Time(ms), WTR
Time(mm:ss), and Packet
Transmit Interval(s)
according to the actual
requirements. Set these
parameters to the same
values for all the NEs on the
network.

Configuring IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Services


Table 8-60 Process of configuring IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.3.4.1 Creating a Fiber/


Cable by Using the
Search Method

Perform this task to create microwave links or


Ethernet fibers/cables for service paths if they have not
been created on Main Topology of the U2000.
Set Automatically Allocate Address to No when
creating Ethernet fiber/cable.

A.10.4 Creating an IEEE


802.1D Bridge-based ELAN Service

Optional.
Set related parameters according to the service
planning information and parameter planning
information.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

229

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.3.9 Changing Logical


Ports Mounted to a
Bridge

Optional.
NOTE
Perform this operation when you need to change the type of
a logical port mounted to a bridge, because an OptiX RTN
310 carries IEEE 802.1D bridge-based services by default.

Configuring QoS
Table 8-61 Process of configuring QoS
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.6.1
Modifying
the
Mapping
for a DS
Domain

Required if the default mappings for the Differentiated


Services (DS) domain are inapplicable.

A.7.6.2
Changing
the Packet
Type
Trusted by a
Port

Required if the priority type of an Ethernet service is not


CVLAN, which is the default packet type trusted by the
DiffServ domain.

A.7.6.4
Setting
Egress
Queue
Scheduling
Policies

Required if a port is required to schedule traffic according to


a certain queue scheduling policy in the case of traffic
congestion. The default queue scheduling mode is SP+WRR
(SP is short for strict priority and WRR for weighted round
robin). AF1 to AF4 queues are WRR queues (allocated the
same weight) and the other queues are SP queues.

Set related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.


4

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

A.7.6.5
Setting
Traffic
Shaping for
Egress
Queues

Required if the bandwidth for egress port queues needs to be


restricted.

A.7.6.6
Setting the
Congestion
Manageme
nt Mode for
Egress
Queues

Required if a certain congestion management mode is


required for queues at an egress port. The default mode is tail
drop.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

230

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.6.3
Configuring
Port
Shaping

Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an


Ethernet service occupies.
Set related parameters according to the network plan.

Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations


Table 8-62 Process of verifying Ethernet service configurations
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.10.6
Verifying a
Native
Ethernet
Service

Required.
The loopback (LB) test result should show that no packet loss
occurs.

8.7.4.7 Per-NE Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services)


This section describes the processes of configuring the service information, port information,
protection information, and quality of service (QoS) information for an IEEE 802.1Q bridgebased Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) service and the process of verifying the service
configurations.

Flowchart
Figure 8-46 shows the flowchart for configuring IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

231

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-46 Flowchart for configuring IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services

Required

Start

Optional
Configure a LAG.

Configure ERPS
protection.

Configure E-LAN
services.

Set port attributes.

Configure QoS.

Verify Ethernet
services.

End

The steps in the configuration flowchart are described as follows:

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

232

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Configuring LAG for Ethernet Ports


Table 8-63 Process of configuring LAG for Ethernet ports
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.2.1
Creating a
LAG

When the Ethernet link between an OptiX RTN 310 NE and


UNI-side equipment requires higher bandwidth or active/
standby protection. Set parameters as follows:
l Set LAG Type to the same value on the NE and on the
UNI-side equipment. The recommended value is Static.
l Set Load Sharing to the same value on the NE and on the
UNI-side equipment. Set Load Sharing to Sharing if the
Ethernet link requires higher bandwidth, or NonSharing if the Ethernet link does not require higher
bandwidth.
l Load Sharing Hash Algorithm takes the default value of
Automatic. This parameter is valid only to load-sharing
LAGs.
l Set Reversion Mode to the same value as that for the
opposite equipment. The recommended value is
Revertive. This parameter is valid only to non-load
sharing LAGs.
l Set WTR Time(min) to the same value on the NE and on
the UNI-side equipment. It is recommended that this
parameter take its default value. This parameter is valid
only to revertive LAGs.
l Set the main and slave ports according to the network plan.
It is recommended that you set the main and slave ports of
the LAG at both ends consistently.

A.7.2.2
Setting
Parameters
for a LAG

Optional.

Configuring ERPS Protection


Table 8-64 Process of configuring ERPS protection

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.1.1 Creating an ERP


Instance

Required when an Ethernet


ring needs to be protected and
service loops need to be
avoided on the Ethernet ring.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

233

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.1.2 Setting ERPS


Protocol Parameters

Required if the values of the


default parameters of the
Ethernet ring protection
switching (ERPS) timers
need to be changed.
Set Hold-Off Time(ms),
Guard Time(ms), WTR
Time(mm:ss), and Packet
Transmit Interval(s)
according to the actual
requirements. Set these
parameters to the same
values for all the NEs on the
network.

Configuring IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services


Table 8-65 Process of configuring IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.3.11 Deleting
an E-LAN Service

Required when an NE is being initially configured.


NOTE
Delete the IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services that are
configured for an OptiX RTN 310 by default before configuring
IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

234

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.3.6 Creating an
IEEE 802.1Q
Bridge-based ELAN Service

Required.
Set the service parameters as follows:
l Set Source and Sink according to the network plan.
l Set VLAN ID for the source and sink according to the
network plan.
l Set Tag Type to C-Aware.
l Set Self-Learning MAC Address to Enabled according
to the network plan.
Set parameters for the source and sink ports as follows:
l Set Port Enable to Enabled.
l Set Encapsulation Type to 802.1Q.
l When the port is an Ethernet port connected to the UNIside equipment, set Working Mode to the same value on
the NE and on the UNI-side equipment. Normally, this
parameter is set to Auto-Negotiation on the UNI-side
equipment. If the port is an Ethernet port used for internal
connection, it is recommended that you set Working
Mode to Auto-Negotiation for related ports.
l To disable packet forwarding between certain E-LAN
service ports, configure the ports as Split Horizon
Group Members on the Config Split Horizon Group
window.
l Set Tag according to the following principles:
If all the accessed services carry VLAN tags (tagged
frames), set Tag to Tag Aware.
If none of the accessed services carries VLAN tags
(untagged frames), set Tag to Access, and set Default
VLAN ID and VLAN Priority according to the
network plan.
When the accessed services contain tagged frames
and untagged frames, set Tag to Hybrid, and set
Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority according to
the network plan.
NOTE
If PLA without NE-level protection has been configured, Ethernet
services do not need to be configured for the standby NE. If 1+1
protection or PLA with NE-level protection has been configured,
configure Ethernet services for the main and standby NEs
consistently.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

A.7.3.7 Creating an
E-LAN Service for
Transmitting
Layer 2 Protocol
Packets

Required when Layer 2 protocol packets need to be


transparently transmitted.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

235

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step

Operation

Remarks

Mana
ging
the
MAC
addres
s table

A.7.4.2
Creating a
Blacklist
MAC
Address
Entry

Required when usage of E-LAN services needs to be


disabled on certain MAC address host.

A.7.4.1
Creating a
Static
MAC
Address
Entry

Required if you need to set certain MAC address entries not


to age.

A.7.4.3
Managing
a Dynamic
MAC
Address
Table

Required if the aging function needs to be disabled or if the


default aging time (five minutes) needs to be changed.

A.7.5 Setting the


Mode for
Processing an
Unknown Frame of
an E-LAN Service

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Optional. By default, the processing mode for unknown


frames is flood.

Setting Port Attributes


Table 8-66 Process of setting port attributes

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Step

Operation

Setting the
parameter
s of
Ethernet
ports

Remarks
A.6.1.1
Setting
the Basic
Attribute
s for an
Ethernet
Port

Optional.
Set Max Frame Length (byte) to the length of the
longest frame that the port may receive. It is
recommended that this parameter take the default
value of 9600.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

236

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Step

Operation

Setting the
parameter
s of
microwav
e ports

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Remarks
A.6.1.2
Configuri
ng the
Traffic
Control
Function
for an
Ethernet
Port

Required when the flow control function is enabled


on the external equipment to which the Ethernet port
is connected. Set parameters as follows:

A.6.1.4
Setting
the
Advanced
Attribute
s for an
Ethernet
Port

Required when you need to enable the port self-loop


test and automatic loopback shutdown functions or
to enable the broadcast packet suppression function.

A.6.2.1
Setting
Basic
Attribute
s for a
Microwav
e Port

Optional.

A.6.2.2
Setting
Layer 2
Attribute
s for a
Microwav
e Port

Optional.

A.6.2.3
Setting
Advanced
Attribute
s for a
Microwav
e Port

Required when you need to enable the port self-loop


test and automatic loopback shutdown functions or
to enable the broadcast packet suppression function.

l When the external equipment uses the non-autonegotiation flow control function, set NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode to
Enable Symmetric Flow Control.
l When the external equipment uses the autonegotiation flow control function, set
Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode to
Enable Symmetric Flow Control.

Set Loopback check, Loopback port shutdown,


Enabling broadcast packet suppression, and
Broadcast packet suppression threshold as
desired.

Set Loopback check, Loopback port shutdown,


Enabling broadcast packet suppression, and
Broadcast packet suppression threshold as
desired.

NOTE

Because the Web LCT does not provide a window specifically for configuring microwave ports, configure
microwave port parameters in the window for configuring Ethernet port parameters.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

237

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Configuring QoS
Table 8-67 Process of configuring QoS
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.6.1
Modifying
the
Mapping
for a DS
Domain

Required if the default mappings for the Differentiated


Services (DS) domain are inapplicable.

A.7.6.2
Changing
the Packet
Type
Trusted by a
Port

Required if the priority type of an Ethernet service is not


CVLAN, which is the default packet type trusted by the
DiffServ domain.

A.7.6.4
Setting
Egress
Queue
Scheduling
Policies

Required if a port is required to schedule traffic according to


a certain queue scheduling policy in the case of traffic
congestion. The default queue scheduling mode is SP+WRR
(SP is short for strict priority and WRR for weighted round
robin). AF1 to AF4 queues are WRR queues (allocated the
same weight) and the other queues are SP queues.

Set related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.


4

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

A.7.6.5
Setting
Traffic
Shaping for
Egress
Queues

Required if the bandwidth for egress port queues needs to be


restricted.

A.7.6.6
Setting the
Congestion
Manageme
nt Mode for
Egress
Queues

Required if a certain congestion management mode is


required for queues at an egress port. The default mode is tail
drop.

A.7.6.3
Configuring
Port
Shaping

Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an


Ethernet service occupies.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Set related parameters according to the network plan.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

238

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations


Table 8-68 Process of verifying Ethernet service configurations
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.7.1
Creating an
MD

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved
in the service test are located. Set parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name and Maintenance
Domain Level to the same values for the NEs.
l For an Ethernet service between two edge nodes on the
transport network, it is recommended that Maintenance
Domain Level takes its default value of 4. For an Ethernet
service between two internal NEs on the transport
network, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value
smaller than 4. For an Ethernet service between two
Ethernet ports on the same NE, set Maintenance Domain
Level to a value smaller than the value that is set in the
test of an Ethernet service between two internal NEs on
the transport network.

A.7.7.2
Creating an
MA

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved
in the service test are located. Set parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of
Maintenance Domain Name that is set in the preceding
step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the same value
for the NEs.
l Set Relevant Service to the same service for the NEs.
l It is recommended that you set CC Test Transmit
Period to 1s.

A.7.7.3
Creating an
MEP

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved
in the service test are located. Set parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of
Maintenance Association Name that is set in the
preceding step.
l Set Port to the Ethernet ports that are involved in the
service test.
l Set MP ID to different values for maintenance association
end points (MEPs) in the same maintenance domain (MD).
l If the OAM information initiated by the MEP travels
through the packet switching unit on the local NE, set
Direction of the MEP to Ingress. Otherwise, set
Direction to Egress.
l Set CC Status to Active, as the MEP ID is used to identify
the MEP during the loopback (LB) test.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

239

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.7.4
Creating a
Remote
MEP in an
MA

Required for the NE where the Ethernet ports involved in the


OAM operation are located. Set parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of
Maintenance Domain Name that is set in the preceding
step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of
Maintenance Association Name that is set in the
preceding step.
l To ensure that an MEP can respond to the OAM operations
initiated by the other MEPs in the same maintenance
association (MA), you need to set the other MEPs as the
remote MEPs.
NOTE
When two MEPs are on the same NE, you do not need to configure
remote MEPs.

A.7.7.7
Performing
an LB Test

Required.
The LB test result should show that no packet loss occurs.

8.7.4.8 End-to-End Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN


Services)
This section describes the processes of configuring the service information, port information,
protection information, and quality of service (QoS) information for an IEEE 802.1Q bridgebased Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) service in end-to-end mode and the process of
verifying the service configurations.

Flowchart
Figure 8-47 shows the flowchart for configuring IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

240

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-47 Flowchart for configuring IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services

Required

Start

Optional
Configure a LAG.

Configure ERPS
protection.

Configure E-LAN
services.

Configure QoS.

Verify Ethernet
services.

End

The steps in the configuration flowchart are described as follows:

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

241

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Configuring LAG for Ethernet Ports


Table 8-69 Process of configuring LAG for Ethernet ports
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.2.1
Creating a
LAG

When the Ethernet link between an OptiX RTN 310 NE and


UNI-side equipment requires higher bandwidth or active/
standby protection. Set parameters as follows:
l Set LAG Type to the same value on the NE and on the
UNI-side equipment. The recommended value is Static.
l Set Load Sharing to the same value on the NE and on the
UNI-side equipment. Set Load Sharing to Sharing if the
Ethernet link requires higher bandwidth, or NonSharing if the Ethernet link does not require higher
bandwidth.
l Load Sharing Hash Algorithm takes the default value of
Automatic. This parameter is valid only to load-sharing
LAGs.
l Set Reversion Mode to the same value as that for the
opposite equipment. The recommended value is
Revertive. This parameter is valid only to non-load
sharing LAGs.
l Set WTR Time(min) to the same value on the NE and on
the UNI-side equipment. It is recommended that this
parameter take its default value. This parameter is valid
only to revertive LAGs.
l Set the main and slave ports according to the network plan.
It is recommended that you set the main and slave ports of
the LAG at both ends consistently.

A.7.2.2
Setting
Parameters
for a LAG

Optional.

Configuring ERPS Protection


Table 8-70 Process of configuring ERPS protection

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.1.1 Creating an ERP


Instance

Required when an Ethernet


ring needs to be protected and
service loops need to be
avoided on the Ethernet ring.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

242

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.1.2 Setting ERPS


Protocol Parameters

Required if the values of the


default parameters of the
Ethernet ring protection
switching (ERPS) timers
need to be changed.
Set Hold-Off Time(ms),
Guard Time(ms), WTR
Time(mm:ss), and Packet
Transmit Interval(s)
according to the actual
requirements. Set these
parameters to the same
values for all the NEs on the
network.

Configuring IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services


Table 8-71 Process of configuring IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.3.11
Deleting an
E-LAN
Service

Required when an NE is being initially configured.

A.3.4.1
Creating a
Fiber/Cable
by Using the
Search
Method

Required if microwave links or Ethernet fibers/cables have not


been created for service paths on Main Topology of the U2000.
Set Automatically Allocate Address to No when creating
Ethernet fiber/cable.

A.10.5
Creating an
IEEE 802.1Q
Bridge-based
E-LAN
Service

Required.

A.7.3.7
Creating an
E-LAN
Service for
Transmitting
Layer 2
Protocol
Packets

Required when Layer 2 protocol packets need to be transparently


transmitted.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

NOTE
Delete the IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services that are configured
for an OptiX RTN 310 by default before configuring IEEE 802.1Q bridgebased E-LAN services.

Set related parameters according to the service planning


information and parameter planning information.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

243

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Configuring QoS
Table 8-72 Process of configuring QoS
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.7.6.1
Modifying
the
Mapping
for a DS
Domain

Required if the default mappings for the Differentiated


Services (DS) domain are inapplicable.

A.7.6.2
Changing
the Packet
Type
Trusted by a
Port

Required if the priority type of an Ethernet service is not


CVLAN, which is the default packet type trusted by the
DiffServ domain.

A.7.6.4
Setting
Egress
Queue
Scheduling
Policies

Required if a port is required to schedule traffic according to


a certain queue scheduling policy in the case of traffic
congestion. The default queue scheduling mode is SP+WRR
(SP is short for strict priority and WRR for weighted round
robin). AF1 to AF4 queues are WRR queues (allocated the
same weight) and the other queues are SP queues.

Set related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.


4

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

A.7.6.5
Setting
Traffic
Shaping for
Egress
Queues

Required if the bandwidth for egress port queues needs to be


restricted.

A.7.6.6
Setting the
Congestion
Manageme
nt Mode for
Egress
Queues

Required if a certain congestion management mode is


required for queues at an egress port. The default mode is tail
drop.

A.7.6.3
Configuring
Port
Shaping

Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an


Ethernet service occupies.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Set related parameters according to the network plan.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

244

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations


Table 8-73 Process of verifying Ethernet service configurations
Step

Operation

Remarks

A.10.6
Verifying a
Native
Ethernet
Service

Required.
The loopback (LB) test result should show that no packet loss
occurs.

8.7.5 Configuration Example (Transparently Transmitted Point-toPoint E-Line Services)


This section provides an example of how to configure transparently transmitted point-to-point
Ethernet line (E-Line) services according to the network plan.

8.7.5.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking of NEs.
As Figure 8-48 illustrates, NE1 is a terminal station of a backhaul network. The service
requirements are as follows:
l

NE1 must transparently transmit the Ethernet services from the NodeB to NE2 in point-topoint manner.

NodeB uses differentiated services code point (DSCP) flags to identify the priorities of the
Ethernet services.

To meet the preceding requirements, transparently transmitted point-to-point E-line services are
configured, and a quality of service (QoS) policy is applied to the services.
Figure 8-48 Networking diagram (transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line services)
Transparently
transmitted E-line
service
Backhaul network

P&E
NodeB

NE1

Microwave link

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

NE2

RNC

Ethernet link

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

245

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

NOTE

l A P&E port can function as a GE electrical port and its logical port is 1-SHXA2-2(GE1) on the network
management system (NMS).
l The logical port for a microwave port on the NMS is 1-SHXA2-1(IF-1).

8.7.5.2 Service Planning (Port Information)


This section describes the parameters required for configuring Ethernet ports and microwave
ports.

Ethernet Port Information


Table 8-74 provides the information about the Ethernet ports that transmit/receive Ethernet
services.
Table 8-74 Ethernet port information
Parameter

1-SHXA2-2(GE1)

Encapsulation Type

Null

Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

Flow Control

Disabled

NOTE

l In this example, the GE port on the NodeB works in auto-negotiation mode. Therefore, the peer GE port on
NE1 must also work in auto-negotiation mode. If the peer Ethernet port works in another mode, the local
Ethernet port must be set to the same mode. The working modes of the Ethernet ports inside the network
are planned as auto-negotiation.
l Generally, the flow control function is enabled only when an NE or the peer equipment is inadequate for
quality of service (QoS) processing. The planning information of flow control must be the same for the
equipment at both ends.

Microwave Port Information


Table 8-75 provides the information about the microwave ports that transmit/receive services.
Table 8-75 Microwave port information
Parameter

1-SHXA2-1(IF)

Encapsulation Type

Null

8.7.5.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)


In this example, Ethernet protection is not used.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

246

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.7.5.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)


This section describes the parameters required for configuring Ethernet services.
Table 8-76 provides the planning information about an Ethernet service.
Table 8-76 Information about a transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service
Parameters

NE1

Service ID

Service Name

NodeBtoNE2_Tline

L2 Protocol Control

Not transparently transmitted

Source Port

1-SHXA2-2(GE1)

Source C-VLANs

Blank

Sink Port

1-SHXA2-1(IF)

Sink C-VLANs

Blank

8.7.5.5 Service Planning (QoS)


This section describes the parameters required for configuring quality of service (QoS).

Diffserv
DiffServ (DS) is the basis for QoS. It is recommended that a VLAN priority or differentiated
services code point (DSCP) value be allocated to a base station service based on the service type.
The transport network creates the corresponding DS domain according to the allocated VLAN
priority or DSCP value. All ports involved in the service must use the same DS configuration.
In this example, services from the base stations are allocated DSCP values based on service
types, and the OptiX RTN 310s allocate per-hop behaviors (PHBs) according to the DSCP
values. For details, see Table 8-77.
Table 8-77 PHBs and service types

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

PHB

DSCP

Service Type

CS7

56

CS6

48

EF

40

Real-time voice services


(R99 conversational and R99
streaming services) and
signaling

AF41

36

AF43

32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

247

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

PHB

DSCP

Service Type

AF31

28

O&M and high-priority realtime HSDPA services (O&M


and HSPA streaming
services)

AF33

24

Low-priority real-time
HSDPA service (HSPA
streaming service)

AF21

20

High-priority non-real-time
R99 services (R99 interactive
and R99 background
services)

AF23

16

Low-priority non-real-time
R99 services (R99 interactive
and R99 background
services)

AF11

12

AF13

BE

HSDPA data services (HSPA


interactive and background
services)

NOTE

l CS7 or CS6 is not recommended, because CS7 or CS6 may be used to transmit Ethernet protocol packets
or inband data communication network (DCN) packets.
l The trusted packet type is not the C-VLAN priority but the DSCP value. Therefore, the trusted packet type
needs to be changed for service-associated Ethernet ports in the default DS domain.

Queue Scheduling Policy and Congestion Management Mode


Because the transmission rate of an Ethernet port is much higher than the volume of traffic,
congestion never occurs at an Ethernet port. Therefore, queue scheduling policy and congestion
management mode need to be planned only for microwave ports. Retain the default queue
scheduling policy and congestion management mode for an Ethernet port.
Table 8-78 and Table 8-79 list the queue scheduling policies and congestion management modes
for services of various priorities on microwave ports in this example.
Table 8-78 Queue scheduling policies

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

PHB

Queue Scheduling Policy

CS7

SP

CS6

SP
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

248

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

PHB

Queue Scheduling Policy

EF

SP

AF4

SP

AF3

SP

AF2

SP

AF1

SP

BE

SP

Table 8-79 Congestion management mode


PHB

Congestion
Management
Mode

WRED Configuration
Upper
Threshold
(bytes)

Lower
Threshold
(bytes)

Discard Ratio
(%)

CS7

Tail drop

CS6

Tail drop

EF

WRED

64 (green)

42 (green)

100

AF4

Tail drop

AF3

WRED

64 (green)

42 (green)

100

42 (red)

21 (red)

64 (green)

42 (green)

42 (red)

21 (red)

AF2

WRED

100

AF1

Tail drop

BE

WRED

64 (green)

42 (green)

100

Service Flow Shaping


Generally, a microwave backhaul network does not perform shaping for service flows because
2G/3G base stations and RNCs have their own traffic control policies (BSC is short for base
station controller, and RNC for radio network controller).

Port Shaping
If the Ethernet bandwidth planned for the aggregation link is lower than the total bandwidth for
aggregation services, you can enable port shaping at the edge node to limit the Ethernet service
traffic sent to the convergence node. This prevents congestion at the convergence node.
In this example, you do not need to enable port shaping.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

249

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.7.5.6 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection)


In this example, Ethernet protection is not used.

8.7.5.7 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Ports)


This section describes the procedure for configuring service information.

Procedure
Step 1 Delete Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services. For details, see A.7.3.11 Deleting an ELAN Service.
Step 2 Create a transparently transmitted point-to-point Ethernet line (E-Line) service. For details, see
A.7.3.1 Creating a Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Service.
This table provides service parameter values.
Parameter

Value

Service ID

Service Name

NodeBtoNE2_Tline

Direction

UNI-UNI

L2 Protocol Control

Not Transparent

Source

1-SHXA2-2

Sink

1-SHXA2-1

This table provides port parameter values


Port

1-SHXA2-2

1-SHXA2-1

Port Enable

Enabled

VLAN ID (e.g. 1,3-5)

Blank

Blank

Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

Encapsulation Type

Null

Null

Tag

----End

8.7.5.8 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (QoS)


This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

250

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Procedure
Step 1 Modify the mapping for a Differentiated Services (DS) domain. For details, see A.7.6.1
Modifying the Mapping for a DS Domain.
TThis table provides parameter values on the Ingress tab page.
CVLAN

MPLS EXP

IP DSCP

PHB

Default value

Default value

BE

12

AF11

AF13

20

AF21

16

AF23

28

AF31

24

AF33

36

AF41

32

AF43

40

EF

48

CS6

56

CS7

This table provides parameter values on the Egress tab page.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

CVLAN

MPLS EXP

IP DSCP

PHB

Default value

Default value

BE

12

AF11

AF13

20

AF21

16

AF23

28

AF31

24

AF33

36

AF41

32

AF43

40

EF

48

CS6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

251

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

CVLAN

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

MPLS EXP

IP DSCP

PHB

56

CS7

Step 2 Change the packet type trusted by ports. For details, see A.7.6.2 Changing the Packet Type
Trusted by a Port.
Parameter

Packet Type

1-SHXA2-2

ip-dscp

1-SHXA2-1

NOTE

The required trusted packet type is not the C-VLAN priority but DSCP value. Therefore, the trusted packet type
needs to be changed for service-associated Ethernet ports in the default DS domain.

Step 3 Set egress queue scheduling policies. For details, see A.7.6.4 Setting Egress Queue Scheduling
Policies.
This table provides relayed parameters on microwave ports.
Parameter

Grooming Police After Reloading

CS7

SP

CS6

SP

EF

SP

AF4

SP

AF3

SP

AF2

SP

AF1

SP

BE

SP

Step 4 Set the congestion management mode for egress queues. For details, see A.7.6.6 Setting the
Congestion Management Mode for Egress Queues.
This table provides relayed parameters on microwave ports.
Parameter

CS7
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Congestion
Management
Mode

WRED Configuration
Upper
Threshold
(bytes)

Lower
Threshold
(bytes)

Discard Ratio
(%)

Tail drop

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

252

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Parameter

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Congestion
Management
Mode

WRED Configuration
Upper
Threshold
(bytes)

Lower
Threshold
(bytes)

Discard Ratio
(%)

CS6

Tail drop

EF

WRED

64(Green)

42 (Green)

100

AF4

Tail drop

AF3

WRED

64(Green)

42 (Green)

100

42 (Red)

21 (Red)

64(Green)

42 (Green)

42 (Red)

21 (Red)

AF2

WRED

100

AF1

Tail drop

BE

WRED

64(Green)

42 (Green)

100

----End

8.7.5.9 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Service Verification)


This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations.

Procedure
Step 1 Create a maintenance domain (MD). For details, see A.7.7.1 Creating an MD.
This table provides parameter values for creating an MD.
Parameter

Value
NE1

Maintenance Domain Name

InterNE

Maintenance Domain Level

Step 2 Create a maintenance association (MA). For details, see A.7.7.2 Creating an MA.
This table provides parameter values for creating an MA.
Parameter

Value
NE1

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Maintenance Domain Name

InterNE

Maintenance Association Name

NodeB_Tline

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

253

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Parameter

Value
NE1

Relevant Service

1-NodeBtoNE2_Tline

CC Test Transmit Period

1s

Step 3 Create maintenance association end points (MEPs). For details, see A.7.7.3 Creating an
MEP.
This table provides parameter values for creating MEPs.
Parameter

Value
NE1

Maintenance Domain
Name

InterNE

InterNE

Maintenance Association
Name

NodeB_Tline

NodeB_Tline

Board

1-SHXA2

1-SHXA2

Port

1-SHXA2-2

1-SHXA2-1

VLAN

MP ID

101

102

Direction

Ingress

Ingress

CC Status

Active

Active

Step 4 Perform a loopback (LB) test to verify Ethernet service configurations. For details, see A.7.7.7
Performing an LB Test.
Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MEP ID is 101 as the source MEP and the
MEP whose MEP ID is 102 as the sink MEP.
There should be no packet loss during the test.
----End

8.7.5.10 End-to-End Configuration Procedure


In this configuration example, service configuration is performed only on a single NE. Therefore,
end-to-end service configuration is not involved.

8.7.6 Configuration Example (VLAN-based E-Line Service)


This section provides an example of how to configure VLAN-based E-line services according
to the network plan.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

254

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.7.6.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking of NEs.
Based on 8.6.3 Configuration Example (Microwave Links on a Microwave Chain
Network), configure Ethernet services according to the following requirements:
l

Each of NodeB 1, NodeB 2, and NodeB 3 provides a 1000 Mbit/s GE port in autonegotiation mode.

VLAN IDs of Ethernet services transmitted by NodeB 1, NodeB 2, and NodeB 3 are 100,
200, and 300 respectively.

NodeB 1, NodeB 2, and NodeB 3 use DSCP flags to identify the priorities of Ethernet
services.

To meet the preceding requirements, VLAN-based Ethernet line (E-Line) services are
configured for service transmission on each NE. In addition, corresponding quality of service
(QoS) processing is configured.
Figure 8-49 Networking diagram (VLAN-based E-Line services)
NMS

LAN switch
NE11
P&E

NE99_1

NE13
V-polarization

P&E

GE
NodeB 1
VLAN 100

GE

COMBO

COMBO

COMBO

COMBO
GE

GE

Local backhaul
network

RNC

P&E
NE12

H-polarization

NE14

P&E
GE

P&E
NodeB 2
VLAN 200

GE
P&E

NE21

NE22

NE24

NE99_2

NE23

NodeB 3
VLAN 300
OptiX RTN 900

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Microwave link

Ethernet link

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

XPIC cable

255

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

NOTE

On the NMS, the logical port of a microwave port is 1-SHXA2-1(IF).

On the NMS, the logical port of a COMBO port that functions as an optical GE port is 1-SHXA2-2
(GE1).

On the NMS, the logical port of a P&E port is 1-SHXA2-2(GE1), when the COMBO port does not
function as an optical GE port.

On the NMS, the logical port of a GE port is 1-SHXA2-3(GE2).

On the NMS, the logical port of a COMBO port that functions as a 1+1 concatenation port is 1SHXA2-4. This port is valid only when DCN is being configured.

8.7.6.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports)


This section describes the parameters required for configuring Ethernet ports and microwave
ports.

Ethernet Port Information


Table 8-80 and Table 8-81 provide the information about the Ethernet ports that transmit/receive
Ethernet services.
Table 8-80 Information about Ethernet ports on XPIC links
Parame
ter

NE11

NE12

NE13

NE14

1SHXA2
-2(GE1)

1SHXA2
-3(GE2)

1SHXA2
-3(GE2)

1SHXA2
-2(GE1)

1SHXA2
-3(GE2)

1SHXA2
-2(GE1)

1SHXA2
-3(GE2)

Encapsul
ation
Type

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

Working
Mode

AutoNegotiat
ion

AutoNegotiat
ion

AutoNegotiat
ion

AutoNegotiat
ion

AutoNegotiat
ion

AutoNegotiat
ion

AutoNegotiat
ion

Flow
Control

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Tag
Type

Tag
Aware

Tag
Aware

Tag
Aware

Tag
Aware

Tag
Aware

Tag
Aware

Tag
Aware

Table 8-81 Information about Ethernet ports on non-XPIC links


Parameter

Encapsulatio
n Type
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

NE21

NE22

NE23

1-SHXA2-2
(GE1)

1-SHXA2-3
(GE2)

1-SHXA2-2
(GE1)

1-SHXA2-3
(GE2)

1-SHXA2-2
(GE1)

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

NE24

256

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Parameter

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

NE21

NE22

NE23

NE24

1-SHXA2-2
(GE1)

1-SHXA2-3
(GE2)

1-SHXA2-2
(GE1)

1-SHXA2-3
(GE2)

1-SHXA2-2
(GE1)

Working
Mode

AutoNegotiation

AutoNegotiation

AutoNegotiation

AutoNegotiation

AutoNegotiation

Flow Control

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Tag Type

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

NOTE

l In this example, the GE ports on all the NodeBs work in auto-negotiation mode. Therefore, the peer GE port
of each NE that receives services must work in auto-negotiation mode. 1-SHXA2-1(IF) the peer Ethernet
port works in another mode, the local Ethernet port must be set to the same mode. The working modes of
the Ethernet ports inside the network are planned as auto-negotiation.
l Generally, the flow control function is enabled only when an NE or the peer equipment is inadequate for
quality of service (QoS) processing. The planning information of flow control must be the same for the
equipment at both ends.
l In this example, all the services carry VLAN IDs. Therefore, the TAG attributes of all the ports are Tag
Aware.

Microwave Port Information


Table 8-82 and Table 8-83 provides the information about the microwave ports that transmit/
receive services.
Table 8-82 Information about microwave ports on XPIC links
Parameter

NE11

NE12

NE13

NE14

1-SHXA2-1
(IF)

1-SHXA2-1
(IF)

1-SHXA2-1
(IF)

1-SHXA2-1
(IF)

Encapsulation
Type

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

Tag Type

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Table 8-83 Information about microwave ports on non-XPIC links


Parameter

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

NE21

NE22

NE23

NE24

1-SHXA2-1
(IF)

1-SHXA2-1
(IF)

1-SHXA2-1
(IF)

1-SHXA2-1
(IF)

Encapsulation
Type

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

Tag Type

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

257

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.7.6.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)


This section describes the parameters required for configuring Ethernet protection.
In this example, it is assumed that PLA has been configured during microwave link
configuration. Therefore, Ethernet protection is not required.

8.7.6.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)


This section describes the parameters required for configuring Ethernet services.
Figure 8-50 provides the planning information of the VLAN-based Ethernet line (E-Line)
services between NEs.
Figure 8-50 Information about VLAN-based E-Line services
Links-1: NE13-NE11V-polarization
NE13

NE11

IF
RNC - NodeB 1

IF
C:100V

GE1(C:100)

GE1(C:100)

Links-2: NE24-NE23-NE22-NE21

RNC - NodeB 3
RNC - NodeB 2

NE24

NE23

IF

IF GE2

NE22
GE2 IF

NE21
IF

C:300
GE1(C:300)

GE1(C:300)
C:200

C:200

C:200
GE1(C:200)

GE1(C:200)

C: C-VLAN
Pass through
Add/Drop
Foward

Table 8-84 and Table 8-85 provide detailed planning information about services on each NE.
Table 8-84 Information about VLAN-based E-Line services on XPIC links
Parameter

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

NE13

NE11

NE14

NE11 to the RNC

NodeB 1 to NE13

NE11 to the RNC

Service ID

Service name

NE11toRNC_Vline

NodeB1toNE13_Vli
ne

NE11toRNC_Vline

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

258

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Parameter

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

NE13

NE11

NE14

NE11 to the RNC

NodeB 1 to NE13

NE11 to the RNC

L2 protocol control

Not transparently
transmitted

Not transparently
transmitted

Not transparently
transmitted

Source port

1-SHXA2-1(IF)

1-SHXA2-2(GE1)

1-SHXA2-1(IF)

Source C-VLAN IDs

100

100

100

Sink port

1-SHXA2-2(GE1)

1-SHXA2-1(IF)

1-SHXA2-2(GE1)

Sink C-VLAN IDs

100

100

100

Table 8-85 Information about VLAN-based E-Line services on non-XPIC links


Parameter

NE24

NE23

NE22

NE21

NE23 to
NE99

NE22 to
NE24

NodeB 3 to
NE24

NE21 to
NE23

NodeB 2 to
NE22

Service ID

Service
name

NE23toNE9
9_Vline

NE22toNE2
4_Vline

NodeB3toN
E24_Vline

NE21toNE2
3_Vline

NodeB2toN
E22_Vline

L2 protocol
control

Not
transparently
transmitted

Not
transparently
transmitted

Not
transparently
transmitted

Not
transparently
transmitted

Not
transparently
transmitted

Source port

1-SHXA2-1
(IF)

1-SHXA2-3
(GE2)

1-SHXA2-2
(GE1)

1-SHXA2-1
(IF)

1-SHXA2-2
(GE1)

Source CVLAN IDs

300,200

300,200

300

200

200

Sink port

1-SHXA2-2
(GE1)

1-SHXA2-1
(IF)

1-SHXA2-1
(IF)

1-SHXA2-3
(GE2)

1-SHXA2-1
(IF)

Sink CVLAN IDs

300,200

300,200

300

200

200

8.7.6.5 Service Planning (QoS)


This section describes the parameters required for configuring quality of service (QoS).

Diffserv
DiffServ (DS) is the basis for QoS. It is recommended that a VLAN priority or differentiated
services code point (DSCP) value be allocated to a base station service based on the service type.
The transport network creates the corresponding DS domain according to the allocated VLAN
priority or DSCP value. All ports involved in the service must use the same DS configuration.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

259

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

In this example, services from the base stations are allocated DSCP values based on service
types, and the OptiX RTN 310s allocate per-hop behaviors (PHBs) according to the DSCP
values. For details, see Table 8-86.
Table 8-86 PHBs and service types
PHB

DSCP

Service Type

CS7

56

CS6

48

EF

40

Real-time voice services


(R99 conversational and R99
streaming services) and
signaling

AF41

36

AF43

32

AF31

28

O&M and high-priority realtime HSDPA services (O&M


and HSPA streaming
services)

AF33

24

Low-priority real-time
HSDPA service (HSPA
streaming service)

AF21

20

High-priority non-real-time
R99 services (R99 interactive
and R99 background
services)

AF23

16

Low-priority non-real-time
R99 services (R99 interactive
and R99 background
services)

AF11

12

AF13

BE

HSDPA data services (HSPA


interactive and background
services)

NOTE

l CS7 or CS6 is not recommended, because CS7 or CS6 may be used to transmit Ethernet protocol packets
or inband data communication network (DCN) packets.
l The trusted packet type is not the C-VLAN priority but the DSCP value. Therefore, the trusted packet type
needs to be changed for service-associated Ethernet ports in the default DS domain.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

260

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Queue Scheduling Policy and Congestion Management Mode


Because the transmission rate of an Ethernet port is much higher than the volume of traffic,
congestion never occurs at an Ethernet port. Therefore, queue scheduling policy and congestion
management mode need to be planned only for microwave ports. Retain the default queue
scheduling policy and congestion management mode for an Ethernet port.
Table 8-87 and Table 8-88 list the queue scheduling policies and congestion management modes
for services of various priorities on microwave ports in this example.
Table 8-87 Queue scheduling policies
PHB

Queue Scheduling Policy

CS7

SP

CS6

SP

EF

SP

AF4

SP

AF3

SP

AF2

SP

AF1

SP

BE

SP

Table 8-88 Congestion management mode


PHB

Congestion
Management
Mode

WRED Configuration
Upper
Threshold
(bytes)

Lower
Threshold
(bytes)

Discard Ratio
(%)

CS7

Tail drop

CS6

Tail drop

EF

WRED

64 (green)

42 (green)

100

AF4

Tail drop

AF3

WRED

64 (green)

42 (green)

100

42 (red)

21 (red)

64 (green)

42 (green)

42 (red)

21 (red)

AF2

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

WRED

100

AF1

Tail drop

BE

WRED

64 (green)

42 (green)

100

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

261

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Service Flow Shaping


Generally, a microwave backhaul network does not perform shaping for service flows because
2G/3G base stations and RNCs have their own traffic control policies (BSC is short for base
station controller, and RNC for radio network controller).

Port Shaping
If the Ethernet bandwidth planned for the aggregation link is lower than the total bandwidth for
aggregation services, you can enable port shaping at the edge node to limit the Ethernet service
traffic sent to the convergence node. This prevents congestion at the convergence node.
In this example, you do not need to enable port shaping.

8.7.6.6 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection)


In this example, Ethernet protection is not used.

8.7.6.7 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Service Information)


This section describes the procedure for configuring service information.

Procedure
Step 1 Delete Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services. For details, see A.7.3.11 Deleting an ELAN Service.
Step 2 Create a VLAN-based Ethernet line (E-Line) service. For details, see A.7.3.2 Creating a VLANbased E-Line Service.
l Cross polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) links
Parameters of NE11 and NE13
This table provides service parameter values.
Parameter

NE13

NE11

NE11 to RNC

NodeB 1 to NE13

Service ID

Service Name

NE11toRNC_Vline

NodeB1toNE13_Vline

Direction

UNI-UNI

UNI-UNI

Source

1-SHXA2-1

1-SHXA2-2

Sink

1-SHXA2-2

1-SHXA2-1

This table provides port parameter values

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

262

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Parameter

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

NE13

NE11

1-SHXA2-2

1-SHXA2-1

1-SHXA2-2

1-SHXA2-1

Port Enable

Enabled

Enabled

VLAN ID
(e.g. 1,3-5)

100

100

100

100

Working
Mode

AutoNegotiation

AutoNegotiation

Encapsulatio
n Type

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

Tag

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Parameters of NE14
This table provides service parameter values.
Parameter

NE14
NE11 to RNC

Service ID

Service Name

NE11toRNC_Vline

Direction

UNI-UNI

Source

1-SHXA2-1

Sink

1-SHXA2-2

This table provides port parameter values


Parameter

NE14
1-SHXA2-2

1-SHXA2-1

Port Enable

Enabled

VLAN ID (e.g. 1,3-5)

100

100

Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

Encapsulation Type

802.1Q

802.1Q

Tag

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

l Non-XPIC links
Parameters of NE21
This table provides service parameter values.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

263

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Parameter

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

NE21
NodeB 2 to NE22

Service ID

Service Name

NodeB2toNE22_Vline

Direction

UNI-UNI

Source

1-SHXA2-2

Sink

1-SHXA2-1

This table provides port parameter values


Parameter

NE21
1-SHXA2-2

1-SHXA2-1

Port Enable

Enabled

VLAN ID (e.g. 1,3-5)

200

200

Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

Encapsulation Type

802.1Q

802.1Q

Tag

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Parameters of NE22
This table provides service parameter values.
Parameter

NE22
NE21 to NE23

Service ID

Service Name

NE21toNE23_Vline

Direction

UNI-UNI

Source

1-SHXA2-1

Sink

1-SHXA2-3

This table provides port parameter values

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

264

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Parameter

NE22
1-SHXA2-3

1-SHXA2-1

Port Enable

Enabled

VLAN ID (e.g. 1,3-5)

200

200

Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

Encapsulation Type

802.1Q

802.1Q

Tag

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Parameters of NE23
This table provides service parameter values.
Parameter

NE23
NE22 to NE24

NodeB 3 to NE24

Service ID

Service Name

NE22toNE24_Vline

NodeB3toNE24_Vline

Direction

UNI-UNI

UNI-UNI

Source

1-SHXA2-3

1-SHXA2-2

Sink

1-SHXA2-1

1-SHXA2-1

This table provides port parameter values


Parameter

NE23
1-SHXA2-3

1-SHXA2-2

1-SHXA2-1

Port Enable

Enabled

Enabled

VLAN ID (e.g.
1,3-5)

200

300

300,200

Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

Encapsulation
Type

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

Tag

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Parameters of NE24
This table provides service parameter values.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

265

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Parameter

NE24
NE23 to NE99

Service ID

Service Name

NE23toNE99_Vline

Direction

UNI-UNI

Source

1-SHXA2-1

Sink

1-SHXA2-2

This table provides port parameter values


Parameter

NE24
1-SHXA2-2

1-SHXA2-1

Port Enable

Enabled

VLAN ID (e.g. 1,3-5)

300,200

300,200

Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

Encapsulation Type

802.1Q

802.1Q

Tag

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

----End

8.7.6.8 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (QoS)


This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).

Procedure
Step 1 Modify the mapping for a Differentiated Services (DS) domain. For details, see A.7.6.1
Modifying the Mapping for a DS Domain.
This table provides parameter values on the Ingress tab page.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

CVLAN

MPLS EXP

IP DSCP

PHB

Default value

Default value

BE

12

AF11

AF13

20

AF21

16

AF23

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

266

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

CVLAN

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

MPLS EXP

IP DSCP

PHB

28

AF31

24

AF33

36

AF41

32

AF43

40

EF

48

CS6

56

CS7

This table provides parameter values on the Egress tab page.


CVLAN

MPLS EXP

IP DSCP

PHB

Default value

Default value

BE

12

AF11

AF13

20

AF21

16

AF23

28

AF31

24

AF33

36

AF41

32

AF43

40

EF

48

CS6

56

CS7

Step 2 Change the ports applied to the DS domain and their trusted packet types. For details, see A.
7.6.2 Changing the Packet Type Trusted by a Port.
This table provides parameter values for NE11, NE13, NE14, and NE23.
Parameter

Packet Type

1-SHXA2-2

ip-dscp

1-SHXA2-3
1-SHXA2-1

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

267

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

This table provides parameter values for NE22.


Parameter

Packet Type

1-SHXA2-3

ip-dscp

1-SHXA2-1

This table provides parameter values for NE21 and NE24.


Parameter

Packet Type

1-SHXA2-2

ip-dscp

1-SHXA2-1

NOTE

The desired trusted packet type of the port is not the C-VLAN priority but DSCP value. Therefore, the trusted
packet type needs to be changed for service-associated Ethernet ports in the default DS domain.

Step 3 Set egress queue scheduling policies. For details, see A.7.6.4 Setting Egress Queue Scheduling
Policies.
This table provides parameter values for microwave ports on NE11 to NE14 and NE21 to NE24.
Parameter

Grooming Police After Reloading

CS7

SP

CS6

SP

EF

SP

AF4

SP

AF3

SP

AF2

SP

AF1

SP

BE

SP

Step 4 Set the congestion management mode for egress queues. For details, see A.7.6.6 Setting the
Congestion Management Mode for Egress Queues.
This table provides parameter values for microwave ports on NE11 to NE14 and NE21 to NE24.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

268

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Parameter

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Congestion
Management
Mode

WRED Configuration
Upper
Threshold
(bytes)

Lower
Threshold
(bytes)

Discard Ratio
(%)

CS7

Tail drop

CS6

Tail drop

EF

WRED

64(Green)

42 (Green)

100

AF4

Tail drop

AF3

WRED

64(Green)

42 (Green)

100

42 (Red)

21 (Red)

64(Green)

42 (Green)

42 (Red)

21 (Red)

AF2

WRED

100

AF1

Tail drop

BE

WRED

64(Green)

42 (Green)

100

----End

8.7.6.9 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Service Verification)


This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations.

Procedure
Step 1 Create maintenance domains (MDs) for NE11, NE13, NE21, NE23, and NE24. For details, see
A.7.7.1 Creating an MD.
This table provides parameter values for creating MDs for NE11, NE13, NE21, NE23, and NE24.
Parameter

Value
NE11

NE13

NE21

NE23

NE24

Maintenanc
e Domain
Name

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

Maintenanc
e Domain
Level

Step 2 Create maintenance associations (MAs) for NE11, NE13, NE21, NE23, and NE24. For details,
see A.7.7.2 Creating an MA.
l This table provides parameter values for creating MAs for NE11 and NE13.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

269

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Parameter

Value
NE11

NE13

Maintenance Domain
Name

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

Maintenance Association
Name

NodeB1_Vline

NodeB1_Vline

Relevant Service

1-NodeB1toNE13_Vline

1-NE11toRNC_Vline

CC Test Transmit Period

1s

1s

l This table provides parameter values for creating MAs for NE21, NE23, and NE24.
Parameter

Value
NE21

NE23

NE24

Maintenance
Domain Name

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

Maintenance
Association
Name

NodeB2_Vline

NodeB3_Vline

NodeB2_Vline

NodeB3_Vline

Relevant
Service

1NodeB2toNE2
2_Vline

1NodeB3toNE2
4_Vline

NE23toNE99_
Vline

NE23toNE99_
Vline

CC Test
Transmit
Period

1s

1s

1s

1s

Step 3 Create maintenance association end points (MEPs). For details, see A.7.7.3 Creating an
MEP.
l This table provides parameter values for creating MEPs for NE11 and NE13.
Parameter

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Value
NE11

NE13

Maintenance Domain
Name

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

Maintenance Association
Name

NodeB1_Vline

NodeB1_Vline

Board

1-SHXA2

1-SHXA2

Port

1-SHXA2-2

1-SHXA2-2

VLAN

100

100

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

270

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Parameter

Value
NE11

NE13

MP ID

101

102

Direction

Ingress

Ingress

CC Status

Active

Active

l This table provides parameter values for creating MEPs for NE21, NE23, and NE24.
Parameter

Value
NE21

NE23

NE24

Maintenance
Domain Name

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

Maintenance
Association
Name

NodeB2_Vline

NodeB3_Vline

NodeB2_Vline

NodeB3_Vline

Board

1-SHXA2

1-SHXA2

1-SHXA2

1-SHXA2

Port

1-SHXA2-2

1-SHXA2-2

1-SHXA2-2

1-SHXA2-2

VLAN

200

300

200

300

MP ID

201

301

202

302

Direction

Ingress

Ingress

Ingress

Ingress

CC Status

Active

Active

Active

Active

Step 4 Specify remote MEPs. For details, see A.7.7.4 Creating a Remote MEP in an MA.
l This table provides parameter values for creating remote MEPs for NE11 and NE13.
Parameter

Value
NE11

NE13

Maintenance Domain
Name

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

Maintenance Association
Name

NodeB1_Vline

NodeB1_Vline

MP ID

102

101

l This table provides parameter values for creating remote MEPs for NE21, NE23, and NE24.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

271

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Parameter

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Value
NE21

NE23

NE24

Maintenance
Domain Name

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

Maintenance
Association
Name

NodeB2_Vline

NodeB3_Vline

NodeB2_Vline

NodeB3_Vline

Remote
Maintenance
Point ID(e.g:
1,3-6)

202

302

201

301

Step 5 Perform loopback (LB) tests. For details, see A.7.7.7 Performing an LB Test.
Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MEP ID is 102 as the source MEP and the
MEP whose MEP ID is 101 as the sink MEP.
Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MEP ID is 202 as the source MEP and the
MEP whose MEP ID is 201 as the sink MEP.
Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MEP ID is 302 as the source MEP and the
MEP whose MEP ID is 301 as the sink MEP.
There should be no packet loss during the tests.
----End

8.7.6.10 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection)


In this example, Ethernet protection is not used.

8.7.6.11 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Service Information)


This section describes the procedure for configuring service information.

Context
NOTE

It is recommended that you configure microwave links for which the cross polarization interference cancellation
(XPIC) function is enabled on a per NE basis, because Ethernet services on the links are transparently transmitted
using Layer 2 protocols. This configuration example is for configuring Ethernet services on non-XPIC links.

Procedure
Step 1 Delete Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services. For details, see A.7.3.11 Deleting an ELAN Service.
Step 2 Create optical fibers manually. For details, see A.3.4.1 Creating a Fiber/Cable by Using the
Search Method.
This table provides parameter values for creating optical fibers manually.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

272

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Parameter

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Value
GE Optical Fiber between NE23 and
NE22

Fiber/Cable Type

Fiber

Source NE

NE23

Source Board

GE2

Source Port

Sink NE

NE22

Sink Board

GE2

Sink Port

Automatically Allocate IP Address

No

NOTE

This example is based on the hypothesis that the microwave links have been created during microwave link
configuration.

Step 3 Create Ethernet line (E-Line) services transmitted in Native Ethernet mode. For details, see A.
10.3 Creating a VLAN-based E-Line Service.
1.

Choose Service > Native Ethernet Service > Create E-Line Service from the Main Menu.

2.

Set the basic attributes for the E-Line service.

3.

Configure the source and sink of the E-Line service.


a.

Double-click the source NE (NE24) in the Physical Topology tab page.

b.

Select GE1, set C-VLAN to 200 and set S-VLAN to blank.

c.

Click OK.

d.

Double-click the sink NE (NE23) in the Physical Topology tab page.

e.

Select GE1, set C-VLAN to 200 and set S-VLAN to blank.

f.

Click OK.

4.

Click Calculate Route.

5.

Check the service path and VLAN information.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

273

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

6.

Select Deploy and ETH OAM CC.

7.

Click OK.

8.

Repeat Step 3.1 to Step 3.7 and configure the Ethernet services from the radio network
controller (RNC) to NodeB 2 according to the planned values in 8.7.6.4 Service Planning
(Ethernet Services).

----End

8.7.6.12 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS)


This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).

Procedure
Step 1 Modify the mapping for a Differentiated Services (DS) domain. For details, see A.7.6.1
Modifying the Mapping for a DS Domain.
This table provides parameter values on the Ingress tab page.
CVLAN

MPLS EXP

IP DSCP

PHB

Default value

Default value

BE

12

AF11

AF13

20

AF21

16

AF23

28

AF31

24

AF33

36

AF41

32

AF43

40

EF

48

CS6

56

CS7

This table provides parameter values on the Egress tab page.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

274

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

CVLAN

MPLS EXP

IP DSCP

PHB

Default value

Default value

BE

12

AF11

AF13

20

AF21

16

AF23

28

AF31

24

AF33

36

AF41

32

AF43

40

EF

48

CS6

56

CS7

Step 2 Change the ports applied to the DS domain and their trusted packet types. For details, see A.
7.6.2 Changing the Packet Type Trusted by a Port.
This table provides parameter values for NE11, NE13, NE14, and NE23.
Parameter

Packet Type

1-SHXA2-2

ip-dscp

1-SHXA2-3
1-SHXA2-1

This table provides parameter values for NE22.


Parameter

Packet Type

1-SHXA2-3

ip-dscp

1-SHXA2-1

This table provides parameter values for NE21 and NE24.


Parameter

Packet Type

1-SHXA2-2

ip-dscp

1-SHXA2-1

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

275

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

NOTE

The desired trusted packet type of the port is not the C-VLAN priority but DSCP value. Therefore, the trusted
packet type needs to be changed for service-associated Ethernet ports in the default DS domain.

Step 3 Set egress queue scheduling policies. For details, see A.7.6.4 Setting Egress Queue Scheduling
Policies.
This table provides parameter values for microwave ports on NE11 to NE14 and NE21 to NE24.
Parameter

Grooming Police After Reloading

CS7

SP

CS6

SP

EF

SP

AF4

SP

AF3

SP

AF2

SP

AF1

SP

BE

SP

Step 4 Set the congestion management mode for egress queues. For details, see A.7.6.6 Setting the
Congestion Management Mode for Egress Queues.
This table provides parameter values for microwave ports on NE11 to NE14 and NE21 to NE24.
Parameter

Congestion
Management
Mode

WRED Configuration
Upper
Threshold
(bytes)

Lower
Threshold
(bytes)

Discard Ratio
(%)

CS7

Tail drop

CS6

Tail drop

EF

WRED

64(Green)

42 (Green)

100

AF4

Tail drop

AF3

WRED

64(Green)

42 (Green)

100

42 (Red)

21 (Red)

64(Green)

42 (Green)

42 (Red)

21 (Red)

AF2

WRED

100

AF1

Tail drop

BE

WRED

64(Green)

42 (Green)

100

----End
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

276

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.7.6.13 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Service Verification)


This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Native Ethernet Service > Manage Native Ethernet Service from the main
menu.
Step 2 In the Set Filter Criteria dialog box, set filter conditions and click Filter.
The Native Ethernet services that meet the criteria are listed in the query result.
Step 3 Right-click the desired Native Ethernet service, and choose Ethernet OAM > LB Test from
the shortcut menu.

Step 4 In the LB Test dialog box, select the desired service trail.
NOTE

l An LB test checks whether a service is bidirectional available. For a bidirectional service, select the
NE at either end to initiate an LB test.
l If Ethernet services are in different VLANs, the U2000 automatically selects the service in a VLAN
for an LB test.
l One NE cannot be involved in multiple LB tests simultaneously.

Step 5 Optional: Choose Config LB Parameter from the shortcut menu. Set Sent Packets, Sent
Packets Length, and Sent Packets Priority. Then, click OK.

Step 6 Click Run.


Step 7 Click the LB Testing Information and LB Statistics Information tabs, and determine whether
the service is available based on the displayed information.
Normally, Test Results indicates Test Succeeded.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

277

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 8 Repeat steps Step 3 to Step 7 to verify the Ethernet services transmitted from the radio network
controller (RNC) to NodeB 2.
----End

8.7.7 Configuration Example (IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN


Service)
This section provides an example of how to configure IEEE 802.1D bridge-based Ethernet local
area network (E-LAN) services according to the network plan.

8.7.7.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking of NEs.
Based on 8.6.4 Configuration Example (Microwave Links on a Microwave Ring
Network), configure Ethernet services according to the actual requirements.
l

Each of NodeB 1 and NodeB 2 provides a 1000 Mbit/s GE port in auto-negotiation mode.

Ethernet services on a ring network need to be protected.

Services from base stations need to be transparently transmitted.

NodeB 1 and NodeB 2 use DSCP flags to identify the priorities of the Ethernet services.

The network must provide the service loop detection function and the broadcast packet
suppression function.

To meet the preceding requirements, IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services are configured
to transmit services from base stations. In addition, the following functions are configured for
the services: service loop test, broadcast packet suppression, ERPS protection, and QoS
processing. See Figure 8-51.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

278

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-51 Networking diagram (IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services)

NMS
NodeB 1
P&E
GE
NE31
802.1D bridge

LAN switch

GE
NE36
802.1D bridge
P&E

Local backhaul
network
RNC

GE

GE NE35

NE32
802.1D bridge

802.1D bridge
GE

GE

P&E
NodeB 2

NE33
802.1D bridge
Microwave link

NE34
802.1D bridge
Ethernet link

NOTE

On the NMS, the logical port of a microwave port is 1-SHXA2-1(IF).

On the NMS, the logical port of a COMBO port that functions as an optical GE port is 1-SHXA2-2
(GE1).

On the NMS, the logical port of a P&E port is 1-SHXA2-2(GE1), when the COMBO port does not
function as an optical GE port.

On the NMS, the logical port of a GE port is 1-SHXA2-3(GE2).

On the NMS, the logical port of a COMBO port that functions as a 1+1 concatenation port is 1SHXA2-4. This port is valid only when DCN is being configured.

8.7.7.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports)


This section describes the parameters required for configuring Ethernet ports and microwave
ports.

Ethernet Port Information


Table 8-89 provides the information about the Ethernet ports that transmit/receive Ethernet
services.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

279

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

NOTE

On the NMS, the logical port of a microwave port is 1-SHXA2-1(IF).

On the NMS, the logical port of a COMBO port that functions as an optical GE port is 1-SHXA2-2(GE1).

On the NMS, the logical port of a P&E port is 1-SHXA2-2(GE1), when the COMBO port does not function
as an optical GE port.

On the NMS, the logical port of a GE port is 1-SHXA2-3(GE2).

On the NMS, the logical port of a COMBO port that functions as a 1+1 concatenation port is 1-SHXA2-4.
This port is valid only when DCN is being configured.

Table 8-89 Ethernet port information


Parameter

Encapsulati
on Type

Working
Mode

Flow
Control

Broadcast
Packet
Suppressio
n

Broadcast
Packet
Suppressio
n Threshold

NE31

1-SHXA2-3
(GE2)

Null

AutoNegotiation

Disabled

Enabled

30

NE32

1-SHXA2-3
(GE2)

Null

AutoNegotiation

Disabled

Enabled

30

NE33

1-SHXA2-2
(GE1)

Null

AutoNegotiation

Disabled

Enabled

30

1-SHXA2-3
(GE2)

Null

AutoNegotiation

Disabled

Enabled

30

NE34

1-SHXA2-3
(GE2)

Null

AutoNegotiation

Disabled

Enabled

30

NE35

1-SHXA2-2
(GE1)

Null

AutoNegotiation

Disabled

Enabled

30

1-SHXA2-3
(GE2)

Null

AutoNegotiation

Disabled

Enabled

30

1-SHXA2-2
(GE1)

Null

AutoNegotiation

Disabled

Enabled

30

1-SHXA2-3
(GE2)

Null

AutoNegotiation

Disabled

Enabled

30

NE36

NOTE

l In this example, the GE ports on all the NodeBs work in auto-negotiation mode. Therefore, the peer GE port
of each NE that receives services must work in auto-negotiation mode. 1-SHXA2-1(IF-1) the peer Ethernet
port works in another mode, the local Ethernet port must be set to the same mode. The working modes of
the Ethernet ports inside the network are planned as auto-negotiation.
l In this example, the loopback port shutdown function is disabled for the Ethernet ports.

Microwave Port Information


Table 8-90 provides the information about the microwave ports that transmit/receive services.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

280

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Table 8-90 Microwave port information


Parameter

Encapsulation
Type

Broadcast
Packet
Suppression

Broadcast
Packet
Suppression
Threshold

NE31

1-SHXA2-1
(IF-1)

Null

Enabled

30

NE32

1-SHXA2-1
(IF-1)

Null

Enabled

30

NE33

1-SHXA2-1
(IF-1)

Null

Enabled

30

NE34

1-SHXA2-1
(IF-1)

Null

Enabled

30

NE35

1-SHXA2-1
(IF-1)

Null

Enabled

30

NE36

1-SHXA2-1
(IF-1)

Null

Enabled

30

8.7.7.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)


This section describes the parameters required for configuring Ethernet protection.

Information About ERP Instances


Table 8-91 provides the planning information about Ethernet ring protection (ERP) instances.
Table 8-91 Information about ERP instances

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Item

NE31

NE32

NE33

NE34

NE35

NE36

ERPS ID

East Port

1SHXA2-1
(IF-1)

1SHXA2-3
(GE2)

1SHXA2-1
(IF-1)

1SHXA2-3
(GE2)

1SHXA2-1
(IF-1)

1SHXA2-3
(GE2)

West Port

1SHXA2-3
(GE2)

1SHXA2-1
(IF-1)

1SHXA2-3
(GE2)

1SHXA2-1
(IF-1)

1SHXA2-3
(GE2)

1SHXA2-1
(IF-1)

RPL
Owner
Ring Node
Flag

No

Yes

No

No

No

No

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

281

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Item

NE31

NE32

NE33

NE34

NE35

NE36

RPL Port

1SHXA2-3
(GE2)

Control
VLAN

4093

4093

4093

4093

4093

4093

Packet
Transmit
Interval(s)

5s (default
value)

5s (default
value)

5s (default
value)

5s (default
value)

5s (default
value)

5s (default
value)

Entity
Level

4 (default
value)

4 (default
value)

4 (default
value)

4 (default
value)

4 (default
value)

4 (default
value)

WTR
Time

5 minutes
(default
value)

Guard
Time (ms)

500 ms
(default
value)

500 ms
(default
value)

500 ms
(default
value)

500 ms
(default
value)

500 ms
(default
value)

500 ms
(default
value)

Hold-Off
Time (ms)

0s (default
value)

0s (default
value)

0s (default
value)

0s (default
value)

0s (default
value)

0s (default
value)

NOTE

l In this example, all the services are aggregated on NE35. Therefore, the NE that is farthest from NE35 needs
to function as the RPL owner. In this manner, when the ring network is normal, the traffic carried on each
link is relatively even.
l The control VLAN ID must be unique. It is recommended that the control VLAN ID take the value 4093.
l The packet transmit interval, entity level, WTR time, guard time, and hold-off time generally take their
default values.

8.7.7.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)


This section describes the parameters required for configuring Ethernet services.
Table 8-92 provides the planning information about an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based Ethernet
service.
Table 8-92 Information About an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Paramete
r

NE31

NE32

NE33

NE34

NE35

NE36

Service ID

Service
Name

Dlan

Dlan

Dlan

Dlan

Dlan

Dlan

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

282

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Paramete
r

NE31

NE32

NE33

NE34

NE35

NE36

Tag Type

TagTranspare
nt

TagTranspare
nt

TagTranspare
nt

TagTranspare
nt

TagTranspare
nt

TagTranspare
nt

MAC
Address
Learning

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

MAC
Address
Learning
Mode

SVL

SVL

SVL

SVL

SVL

SVL

Mounted
UNI port

1SHXA2-3
(GE2)

1SHXA2-3
(GE2)

1SHXA2-2
(GE1)

1SHXA2-3
(GE2)

1SHXA2-2
(GE1)

1SHXA2-2
(GE1)

1SHXA2-1
(IF-1)

1SHXA2-1
(IF-1)

1SHXA2-3
(GE2)

1SHXA2-1
(IF-1)

1SHXA2-3
(GE2)

1SHXA2-3
(GE2)

1SHXA2-1
(IF-1)

1SHXA2-1
(IF-1)

1SHXA2-1
(IF-1)

8.7.7.5 Service Planning (QoS)


This section describes the parameters required for configuring quality of service (QoS).

Diffserv
DiffServ (DS) is the basis for QoS. It is recommended that a VLAN priority or differentiated
services code point (DSCP) value be allocated to a base station service based on the service type.
The transport network creates the corresponding DS domain according to the allocated VLAN
priority or DSCP value. All ports involved in the service must use the same DS configuration.
In this example, services from the base stations are allocated DSCP values based on service
types, and the OptiX RTN 310s allocate per-hop behaviors (PHBs) according to the DSCP
values. For details, see Table 8-93.
Table 8-93 PHBs and service types

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

PHB

DSCP

Service Type

CS7

56

CS6

48

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

283

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

PHB

DSCP

Service Type

EF

40

Real-time voice services


(R99 conversational and R99
streaming services) and
signaling

AF41

36

AF43

32

AF31

28

O&M and high-priority realtime HSDPA services (O&M


and HSPA streaming
services)

AF33

24

Low-priority real-time
HSDPA service (HSPA
streaming service)

AF21

20

High-priority non-real-time
R99 services (R99 interactive
and R99 background
services)

AF23

16

Low-priority non-real-time
R99 services (R99 interactive
and R99 background
services)

AF11

12

AF13

BE

HSDPA data services (HSPA


interactive and background
services)

NOTE

l CS7 or CS6 is not recommended, because CS7 or CS6 may be used to transmit Ethernet protocol packets
or inband data communication network (DCN) packets.
l The trusted packet type is not the C-VLAN priority but the DSCP value. Therefore, the trusted packet type
needs to be changed for service-associated Ethernet ports in the default DS domain.

Queue Scheduling Policy and Congestion Management Mode


Because the transmission rate of an Ethernet port is much higher than the volume of traffic,
congestion never occurs at an Ethernet port. Therefore, queue scheduling policy and congestion
management mode need to be planned only for microwave ports. Retain the default queue
scheduling policy and congestion management mode for an Ethernet port.
Table 8-94 and Table 8-95 list the queue scheduling policies and congestion management modes
for services of various priorities on microwave ports in this example.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

284

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Table 8-94 Queue scheduling policies


PHB

Queue Scheduling Policy

CS7

SP

CS6

SP

EF

SP

AF4

SP

AF3

SP

AF2

SP

AF1

SP

BE

SP

Table 8-95 Congestion management mode


PHB

Congestion
Management
Mode

WRED Configuration
Upper
Threshold
(bytes)

Lower
Threshold
(bytes)

Discard Ratio
(%)

CS7

Tail drop

CS6

Tail drop

EF

WRED

64 (green)

42 (green)

100

AF4

Tail drop

AF3

WRED

64 (green)

42 (green)

100

42 (red)

21 (red)

64 (green)

42 (green)

42 (red)

21 (red)

AF2

WRED

100

AF1

Tail drop

BE

WRED

64 (green)

42 (green)

100

Service Flow Shaping


Generally, a microwave backhaul network does not perform shaping for service flows because
2G/3G base stations and RNCs have their own traffic control policies (BSC is short for base
station controller, and RNC for radio network controller).

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

285

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Port Shaping
If the Ethernet bandwidth planned for the aggregation link is lower than the total bandwidth for
aggregation services, you can enable port shaping at the edge node to limit the Ethernet service
traffic sent to the convergence node. This prevents congestion at the convergence node.
In this example, you do not need to enable port shaping.

8.7.7.6 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection)


This section describes the procedure for configuring Ethernet protection.

Procedure
Step 1 Create an Ethernet ring protection switching (ERP) instance. For details, see A.7.1.1 Creating
an ERP Instance.
This table provides parameter values for creating an ERP instance.
Paramete
r

Value
NE31

NE32

NE33

NE34

NE35

NE36

ERPS ID

East Port

1SHXA2-1

1SHXA2-3

1SHXA2-1

1SHXA2-3

1SHXA2-1

1SHXA2-3

West Port

1SHXA2-3

1SHXA2-1

1SHXA2-3

1SHXA2-1

1SHXA2-3

1SHXA2-1

RPL
Owner
Ring
Node Flag

No

Yes

No

No

No

No

RPL Port

1SHXA2-3

Control
VLAN

4093

4093

4093

4093

4093

4093

----End

8.7.7.7 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Service Information)


This section describes the procedure for configuring service information.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services based on the IEEE 802.1D bridge. For
details, see A.7.3.5 Creating an IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service.
l Parameters of NE31, NE32, and NE34
This table lists the ports to be selected.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

286

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Port
1-SHXA2-3
1-SHXA2-1

This table provides service parameter values.


Parameter

Value

Service ID

Service Name

Dlan

Direction

Tag-Transparent

L2 Protocol Control

Not Transparent

MAC Address Learning

Enabled

This table provides port parameter values


Parameter

1-SHXA2-3

1-SHXA2-1

Port Enable

Enabled

VLAN ID (e.g. 1,3-5)

Blank

Blank

Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

Encapsulation Type

Null

Null

Tag

l Parameters of NE33, NE35, and NE36


This table lists the ports to be selected.
Port
1-SHXA2-2
1-SHXA2-3
1-SHXA2-1

This table provides service parameter values.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Parameter

Value

Service ID

1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

287

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Parameter

Value

Service Name

Dlan

Direction

Tag-Transparent

L2 Protocol Control

Not Transparent

MAC Address Learning

Enabled

This table provides port parameter values


Parameter

1-SHXA2-2

1-SHXA2-3

1-SHXA2-1

Port Enable

Enabled

Enabled

VLAN ID (e.g.
1,3-5)

Blank

Blank

Blank

Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

Encapsulation
Type

Null

Null

Null

Tag

----End

8.7.7.8 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Ports)


This section describes the procedure for configuring Ethernet ports and microwave ports.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the advanced attributes of Ethernet ports. For details, see A.6.1.4 Setting the
Advanced Attributes for an Ethernet Port.
This table provides parameter values for Ethernet ports.
Parameter

Broadcast
Packet
Suppression

Broadcast
Packet
Suppression
Threshold

NE31

1-SHXA2-3

Enabled

Enabled

30

NE32

1-SHXA2-3

Enabled

Enabled

30

NE33

1-SHXA2-2

Enabled

Enabled

30

1-SHXA2-3

Enabled

Enabled

30

1-SHXA2-3

Enabled

Enabled

30

NE34
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Loopback
Check

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

288

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Parameter

NE35

NE36

Loopback
Check

Broadcast
Packet
Suppression

Broadcast
Packet
Suppression
Threshold

1-SHXA2-2

Enabled

Enabled

30

1-SHXA2-3

Enabled

Enabled

30

1-SHXA2-2

Enabled

Enabled

30

1-SHXA2-3

Enabled

Enabled

30

This table provides parameter values for microwave ports.


Parameter

Broadcast Packet
Suppression

Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Threshold

NE31

1-SHXA2-1

Enabled

30

NE32

1-SHXA2-1

Enabled

30

NE33

1-SHXA2-1

Enabled

30

NE34

1-SHXA2-1

Enabled

30

NE35

1-SHXA2-1

Enabled

30

NE36

1-SHXA2-1

Enabled

30

----End

8.7.7.9 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (QoS)


This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).

Procedure
Step 1 Modify the mapping for a Differentiated Services (DS) domain. For details, see A.7.6.1
Modifying the Mapping for a DS Domain.
This table provides parameter values on the Ingress tab page.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

CVLAN

MPLS EXP

IP DSCP

PHB

Default value

Default value

BE

12

AF11

AF13

20

AF21

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

289

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

CVLAN

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

MPLS EXP

IP DSCP

PHB

16

AF23

28

AF31

24

AF33

36

AF41

32

AF43

40

EF

48

CS6

56

CS7

This table provides parameter values on the Egress tab page.


CVLAN

MPLS EXP

IP DSCP

PHB

Default value

Default value

BE

12

AF11

AF13

20

AF21

16

AF23

28

AF31

24

AF33

36

AF41

32

AF43

40

EF

48

CS6

56

CS7

Step 2 Modify the ports in the DS domain and their trusted packet types. For details, see A.7.6.2
Changing the Packet Type Trusted by a Port.
This table provides parameter values for NE33, NE35, and NE36.
Parameter

Packet Type

GE1

ip-dscp

GE2
IF
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

290

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

This table provides parameter values for NE31, NE32, and NE34.
Parameter

Packet Type

GE2

ip-dscp

IF

NOTE

The desired trusted packet type of the port is not the C-VLAN priority but DSCP value. Therefore, the trusted
packet type needs to be changed for service-associated Ethernet ports in the default DS domain.

Step 3 Set scheduling policies for egress queues. For details, see A.7.6.4 Setting Egress Queue
Scheduling Policies.
This table provides parameter values for microwave ports on NE31 to NE36.
Parameter

Grooming Police After Reloading

CS7

SP

CS6

SP

EF

SP

AF4

SP

AF3

SP

AF2

SP

AF1

SP

BE

SP

Step 4 Set the congestion management mode for egress queues. For details, see A.7.6.6 Setting the
Congestion Management Mode for Egress Queues.
This table provides parameter values for microwave ports on NE31 to NE36.
Parameter

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Congestion
Management
Mode

WRED Configuration
Upper
Threshold
(bytes)

Lower
Threshold
(bytes)

Discard Ratio
(%)

CS7

Tail drop

CS6

Tail drop

EF

WRED

64(Green)

42 (Green)

100

AF4

Tail drop

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

291

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Parameter

AF3

AF2

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Congestion
Management
Mode

WRED Configuration
Upper
Threshold
(bytes)

Lower
Threshold
(bytes)

Discard Ratio
(%)

WRED

64(Green)

42 (Green)

100

42 (Red)

21 (Red)

64(Green)

42 (Green)

42 (Red)

21 (Red)

WRED

100

AF1

Tail drop

BE

WRED

64(Green)

42 (Green)

100

----End

8.7.7.10 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Service Verification)


This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations.

Procedure
Step 1 Create maintenance domains (MDs). For details, see A.7.7.1 Creating an MD.
This table provides parameter values for creating MDs.
Parameter

Value
NE33

NE35

NE36

Maintenance
Domain Name

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

Maintenance
Domain Level

Step 2 Create a maintenance association (MA). For details, see A.7.7.2 Creating an MA.
This table provides parameter values for creating MAs.
Parameter

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Value
NE33

NE35

NE36

Maintenance
Domain Name

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

Maintenance
Association Name

Dlan

Dlan

Dlan

Relevant Service

1-Dlan

1-Dlan

1-Dlan

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

292

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Parameter

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Value

CC Test Transmit
Period

NE33

NE35

NE36

1s

1s

1s

Step 3 Create maintenance association end points (MEPs). For details, see A.7.7.3 Creating an
MEP.
This table provides parameter values for creating MEPs
Parameter

Value
NE33

NE35

NE36

Maintenance
Domain Name

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

Maintenance
Association Name

Dlan

Dlan

Dlan

Board

1-SHXA2

1-SHXA2

1-SHXA2

Port

GE1

GE1

GE1

VLAN

MP ID

103

105

106

Direction

Ingress

Ingress

Ingress

CC Status

Active

Active

Active

Step 4 Specify remote MEPs. For details, see A.7.7.4 Creating a Remote MEP in an MA.
l This table provides parameter values for creating remote MEPs for NE35.
Parameter

Value

Maintenance Domain
Name

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

Maintenance Association
Name

Dlan

Dlan

MP ID

103

106

l This table provides parameter values for creating a remote MEP for NE33.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Parameter

Value

Maintenance Domain Name

EdgeNE

Maintenance Association Name

Dlan

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

293

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Parameter

Value

MP ID

105

l This table provides parameter values for creating a remote MEP for NE36.
Parameter

Value

Maintenance Domain Name

EdgeNE

Maintenance Association Name

Dlan

MP ID

105

Step 5 Perform loopback (LB) tests. For details, see A.7.7.7 Performing an LB Test.
Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MEP ID is 105 as the source MEP and the
MEP whose MEP ID is 103 as the sink MEP.
Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MEP ID is 105 as the source MEP and the
MEP whose MEP ID is 106 as the sink MEP.
There should be no packet loss during the tests.
----End

8.7.7.11 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Service Information)


This section describes the procedure for configuring service information.

Procedure
Step 1 Create optical fibers manually. For details, see A.3.4.1 Creating a Fiber/Cable by Using the
Search Method.
This table provides parameter values for creating optical fibers manually.
Parameter

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Value
GE Optical Fiber
between NE31 and
NE36

GE Optical Fiber
between NE32 and
NE33

GE Optical Fiber
between NE34 and
NE35

Fiber/Cable Type

Fiber

Fiber

Fiber

Source NE

NE31

NE32

NE34

Source Board

GE2

GE2

GE2

Source Port

Sink NE

NE36

NE33

NE35

Sink Board

GE2

GE2

GE2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

294

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Parameter

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Value
GE Optical Fiber
between NE31 and
NE36

GE Optical Fiber
between NE32 and
NE33

GE Optical Fiber
between NE34 and
NE35

Sink Port

Automatically
Allocate IP Address

No

No

No

NOTE

This example is based on the hypothesis that the microwave links have been created during microwave link
configuration.

Step 2 Create Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services transmitted in Native Ethernet mode. For
details, see A.10.4 Creating an IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service.
1.

Choose ServiceNative Ethernet ServiceCreate E-LAN Service from the Main Menu.

2.

Set the general attributes for E-LAN services.

3.

Configure bridge-mounted ports for E-LAN services.


a.

Double-click NE35 in the Physical Topology tab page.

b.

Set Tag Type to Tag-Transparent.

c.

Under Available Interface, select GE1, GE2, and IF, and click

d.

Click OK.

4.

Repeat Step 2.3 to configure bridge-mounted ports on NE32, NE33, NE34, and NE36 based
on 8.7.7.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Services).

5.

Set the general attributes for the bridge-mounted ports.


a.

Click

b.

Click the Interface Information tab.

c.

Set the general attributes for the bridge-mounted ports.

NE

Interface

Enable Port

Working Mode

Max Frame
Length (byte)

NE31

GE2

Enabled

Auto-Negotiation

9600

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

295

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

NE

NE32

NE33

NE34

NE35

NE36

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Interface

Enable Port

Working Mode

Max Frame
Length (byte)

IF

GE2

Enabled

Auto-Negotiation

9600

IF

GE1

Enabled

Auto-Negotiation

9600

GE2

Enabled

Auto-Negotiation

9600

IF

GE2

Enabled

Auto-Negotiation

9600

IF

GE1

Enabled

Auto-Negotiation

9600

GE2

Enabled

Auto-Negotiation

9600

IF

GE1

Enabled

Auto-Negotiation

9600

GE2

Enabled

Auto-Negotiation

9600

IF

6.

Set the advanced attributes for the bridge-mounted ports.


a.

Click

b.

Click the Interface Information tab.

c.

Select the desired bridge-mounted ports.

d.

Click

e.

Click the Advanced Attributes tab and set the advanced attributes for the ports.

NE

Port

Loopback Check

Broadcast Packet
Suppression

Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Threshold

NE31

GE2

Enabled

Enabled

30

IF

Enabled

Enabled

30

GE2

Enabled

Enabled

30

IF

Enabled

Enabled

30

GE1

Enabled

Enabled

30

GE2

Enabled

Enabled

30

NE32

NE33

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

296

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

NE

NE34

NE35

NE36

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Port

Loopback Check

Broadcast Packet
Suppression

Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Threshold

IF

Enabled

Enabled

30

GE2

Enabled

Enabled

30

IF

Enabled

Enabled

30

GE1

Enabled

Enabled

30

GE2

Enabled

Enabled

30

IF

Enabled

Enabled

30

GE1

Enabled

Enabled

30

GE2

Enabled

Enabled

30

IF

Enabled

Enabled

30

7.

Configure Ethernet Ring Protection Switching (ERPS).


a.

Click

b.

Click the ERPS tab. Then, click Add.

c.

Set the parameters for the ERPS protection instance.

d.

Click OK.

e.

Set the parameters for the ERPS protocol.

8.

Select Deploy and ETH OAM CC.

9.

Click Configure. In the Configure Ethernet OAM dialog box, configure Ethernet
operation, administration and maintenance (ETH OAM) port information.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

297

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

10. Click OK.


----End

8.7.7.12 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS)


This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).

Procedure
Step 1 Modify the mapping for a Differentiated Services (DS) domain. For details, see A.7.6.1
Modifying the Mapping for a DS Domain.
This table provides parameter values on the Ingress tab page.
CVLAN

MPLS EXP

IP DSCP

PHB

Default value

Default value

BE

12

AF11

AF13

20

AF21

16

AF23

28

AF31

24

AF33

36

AF41

32

AF43

40

EF

48

CS6

56

CS7

This table provides parameter values on the Egress tab page.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

CVLAN

MPLS EXP

IP DSCP

PHB

Default value

Default value

BE

12

AF11

AF13

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

298

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

CVLAN

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

MPLS EXP

IP DSCP

PHB

20

AF21

16

AF23

28

AF31

24

AF33

36

AF41

32

AF43

40

EF

48

CS6

56

CS7

Step 2 Modify the ports in the DS domain and their trusted packet types. For details, see A.7.6.2
Changing the Packet Type Trusted by a Port.
This table provides parameter values for NE33, NE35, and NE36.
Parameter

Packet Type

GE1

ip-dscp

GE2
IF

This table provides parameter values for NE31, NE32, and NE34.
Parameter

Packet Type

GE2

ip-dscp

IF

NOTE

The desired trusted packet type of the port is not the C-VLAN priority but DSCP value. Therefore, the trusted
packet type needs to be changed for service-associated Ethernet ports in the default DS domain.

Step 3 Set scheduling policies for egress queues. For details, see A.7.6.4 Setting Egress Queue
Scheduling Policies.
This table provides parameter values for microwave ports on NE31 to NE36.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Parameter

Grooming Police After Reloading

CS7

SP
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

299

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Parameter

Grooming Police After Reloading

CS6

SP

EF

SP

AF4

SP

AF3

SP

AF2

SP

AF1

SP

BE

SP

Step 4 Set the congestion management mode for egress queues. For details, see A.7.6.6 Setting the
Congestion Management Mode for Egress Queues.
This table provides parameter values for microwave ports on NE31 to NE36.
Parameter

Congestion
Management
Mode

WRED Configuration
Upper
Threshold
(bytes)

Lower
Threshold
(bytes)

Discard Ratio
(%)

CS7

Tail drop

CS6

Tail drop

EF

WRED

64(Green)

42 (Green)

100

AF4

Tail drop

AF3

WRED

64(Green)

42 (Green)

100

42 (Red)

21 (Red)

64(Green)

42 (Green)

42 (Red)

21 (Red)

AF2

WRED

100

AF1

Tail drop

BE

WRED

64(Green)

42 (Green)

100

----End

8.7.7.13 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Verifying Ethernet Service


Configurations)
This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

300

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Native Ethernet Service > Manage Native Ethernet Service from the main
menu.
Step 2 In the Set Filter Criteria dialog box, set filter conditions and click Filter.
The Native Ethernet services that meet the criteria are listed in the query result.
Step 3 Right-click the desired Native Ethernet service, and choose Ethernet OAM > LB Test from
the shortcut menu.

Step 4 In the LB Test dialog box, select the desired service trail.
NOTE

l An LB test checks whether a service is bidirectional available. For a bidirectional service, select the
NE at either end to initiate an LB test.
l If Ethernet services are in different VLANs, the U2000 automatically selects the service in a VLAN
for an LB test.
l One NE cannot be involved in multiple LB tests simultaneously.

Step 5 Optional: Choose Config LB Parameter from the shortcut menu. Set Sent Packets, Sent
Packets Length, and Sent Packets Priority. Then, click OK.

Step 6 Click Run.


Step 7 Click the LB Testing Information and LB Statistics Information tabs, and determine whether
the service is available based on the displayed information.
Normally, Test Results indicates Test Succeeded.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

301

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 8 Repeat steps Step 3 to Step 7 to verify the Ethernet services transmitted from the radio network
controller (RNC) to NodeB 1.
----End

8.7.8 Configuration Example (IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN


Service)
This section provides an example of how to configure IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based Ethernet local
area network (E-LAN) services according to the network plan.

8.7.8.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking of NEs.
Based on 8.6.3 Configuration Example (Microwave Links on a Microwave Chain
Network), configure Ethernet services according to the following requirements:
l

Each of NodeB 1, NodeB 2, and NodeB 3 provides a 1000 Mbit/s GE port in autonegotiation mode.

NodeB 1 belongs to area 1; NodeB 2 and NodeB 3 belong to area 2. The base stations in
an area have the same VLAN ID and data from different areas is isolated from each other
by using VLAN IDs.

NodeB 1, NodeB 2, and NodeB 3 use DSCP flags to identify the priorities of Ethernet
services.

The network must provide the service loop detection function and the broadcast packet
suppression function.

To meet the preceding requirements, IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based Ethernet local area network (ELAN) services are configured for service transmission on each NE. In addition, the following
functions are configured for the services: service loop test, broadcast packet suppression, and
quality of service (QoS) processing.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

302

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-52 Networking diagram (IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services)


NMS

LAN switch
NE11
P&E

NodeB 1
VALN 100

NE13
V-polarization

NE99_1
P&E

GE
COMBO

GE
COMBO

COMBO

COMBO
GE
P&E

Local backhaul
network

Domain 1

GE
NE12

H-polarization

RNC

NE14

P&E
GE
P&E

GE
P&E

NE21

NE22

NodeB 2
VLAN 200

NE24

NE99_2

NE23
Domain 2

NodeB 3
VLAN 200

OptiX RTN 900

Microwave link

Ethernet link

XPIC cable

NOTE

On the NMS, the logical port of a microwave port is 1-SHXA2-1(IF).

On the NMS, the logical port of a COMBO port that functions as an optical GE port is 1-SHXA2-2
(GE1).

On the NMS, the logical port of a P&E port is 1-SHXA2-2(GE1), when the COMBO port does not
function as an optical GE port.

On the NMS, the logical port of a GE port is 1-SHXA2-3(GE2).

On the NMS, the logical port of a COMBO port that functions as a 1+1 concatenation port is 1SHXA2-4. This port is valid only when DCN is being configured.

8.7.8.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports)


This section describes the parameters required for configuring Ethernet ports and microwave
ports.

Ethernet Port Information


Table 8-96 and Table 8-97 provide the information about the Ethernet ports that transmit/receive
Ethernet services.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

303

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Table 8-96 Information about Ethernet ports on XPIC links


Parame
ter

NE11

NE12

NE13

NE14

1SHXA2
-2(GE1)

1SHXA2
-3(GE2)

1SHXA2
-3(GE2)

1SHXA2
-2(GE1)

1SHXA2
-3(GE2)

1SHXA2
-2(GE1)

1SHXA2
-3(GE2)

Encapsul
ation
Type

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

Working
Mode

AutoNegotiat
ion

AutoNegotiat
ion

AutoNegotiat
ion

AutoNegotiat
ion

AutoNegotiat
ion

AutoNegotiat
ion

AutoNegotiat
ion

Flow
Control

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Tag
Type

Tag
Aware

Tag
Aware

Tag
Aware

Tag
Aware

Tag
Aware

Tag
Aware

Tag
Aware

Broadca
st Packet
Suppress
ion

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Broadca
st Packet
Suppress
ion
Threshol
d

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

Table 8-97 Information about Ethernet ports on non-XPIC links


Parameter

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

NE21

NE22

NE23

1-SHXA2-2
(GE1)

1-SHXA2-3
(GE2)

1-SHXA2-2
(GE1)

1-SHXA2-3
(GE2)

1-SHXA2-2
(GE1)

Encapsulatio
n Type

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

Working
Mode

AutoNegotiation

AutoNegotiation

AutoNegotiation

AutoNegotiation

AutoNegotiation

Flow Control

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Tag Type

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Broadcast
Packet
Suppression

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

NE24

304

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Parameter

Broadcast
Packet
Suppression
Threshold

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

NE21

NE22

NE23

NE24

1-SHXA2-2
(GE1)

1-SHXA2-3
(GE2)

1-SHXA2-2
(GE1)

1-SHXA2-3
(GE2)

1-SHXA2-2
(GE1)

30

30

30

30

30

NOTE

l In this example, the GE ports on all the NodeBs work in auto-negotiation mode. Therefore, the peer GE port
of each NE that receives services must work in auto-negotiation mode. 1-SHXA2-1(IF) the peer Ethernet
port works in another mode, the local Ethernet port must be set to the same mode. The working modes of
the Ethernet ports inside the network are planned as auto-negotiation.
l Generally, the flow control function is enabled only when an NE or the peer equipment is inadequate for
quality of service (QoS) processing. The planning information of flow control must be the same for the
equipment at both ends.
l In this example, all the services carry VLAN IDs. Therefore, the TAG attributes of all the ports are Tag
Aware.

Microwave Port Information


Table 8-98 and Table 8-99 provide the information about the microwave ports that transmit/
receive services.
Table 8-98 Information about microwave ports on XPIC links
Parameter

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

NE11

NE12

NE13

NE14

1-SHXA2-1
(IF)

1-SHXA2-1
(IF)

1-SHXA2-1
(IF)

1-SHXA2-1
(IF)

Encapsulation
Type

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

Tag Type

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Broadcast
Packet
Suppression

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Broadcast
Packet
Suppression
Threshold

30

30

30

30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

305

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Table 8-99 Information about microwave ports on non-XPIC links


Parameter

NE21

NE22

NE23

NE24

1-SHXA2-1
(IF)

1-SHXA2-1
(IF)

1-SHXA2-1
(IF)

1-SHXA2-1
(IF)

Encapsulation
Type

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

802.1Q

Tag Type

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Broadcast
Packet
Suppression

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Broadcast
Packet
Suppression
Threshold

30

30

30

30

8.7.8.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)


This section describes the parameters required for configuring Ethernet protection.
In this example, it is assumed that PLA has been configured during microwave link
configuration. Therefore, Ethernet protection is not required.

8.7.8.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)


This section describes the parameters required for configuring Ethernet services.
Table 8-100 and Table 8-101 provide the service planning information.
Table 8-100 Information about IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services on XPIC links

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Parameter

NE11

NE13

NE14

Service ID

Auto Assigned

Auto Assigned

Auto Assigned

Service Name

Qlan

Qlan

Qlan

Tag Type

C-Aware

C-Aware

C-Aware

MAC Address
Learning

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

MAC Address
Learning Mode

IVL

IVL

IVL

L2 Protocol Control

Not Transparent

Not Transparent

Not Transparent

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

306

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Parameter

NE11

NE13

NE14

Mounted UNI port

1-SHXA2-1(IF)
(VLAN ID: 100)

1-SHXA2-1(IF)
(VLAN ID: 100)

1-SHXA2-1(IF)
(VLAN ID: 100)

1-SHXA2-2(GE1)
(VLAN ID: 100)

1-SHXA2-2(GE1)
(VLAN ID: 100)

1-SHXA2-2(GE1)
(VLAN ID: 100)

Table 8-101 Information about IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services on non-XPIC links
Parameter

NE21

NE22

NE23

NE24

Service ID

Auto Assigned

Auto Assigned

Auto Assigned

Auto Assigned

Service Name

Qlan

Qlan

Qlan

Qlan

Tag Type

C-Aware

C-Aware

C-Aware

C-Aware

MAC Address
Learning

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

MAC Address
Learning Mode

IVL

IVL

IVL

IVL

L2 Protocol
Control

Not Transparent

Not Transparent

Not Transparent

Not Transparent

Mounted UNI
port

1-SHXA2-1(IF)
(VLAN ID:
200)

1-SHXA2-1(IF)
(VLAN ID:
200)

1-SHXA2-1(IF)
(VLAN ID:
200)

1-SHXA2-1(IF)
(VLAN ID:
200)

1-SHXA2-2
(GE1) (VLAN
ID: 200)

1-SHXA2-3
(GE2) (VLAN
ID: 200)

1-SHXA2-2
(GE1) (VLAN
ID: 200)

1-SHXA2-2
(GE1) (VLAN
ID: 200)

1-SHXA2-3
(GE2) (VLAN
ID: 200)

NOTE

In this example, the split horizon group is not used.

8.7.8.5 Service Planning (QoS)


This section describes the parameters required for configuring quality of service (QoS).

Diffserv
DiffServ (DS) is the basis for QoS. It is recommended that a VLAN priority or differentiated
services code point (DSCP) value be allocated to a base station service based on the service type.
The transport network creates the corresponding DS domain according to the allocated VLAN
priority or DSCP value. All ports involved in the service must use the same DS configuration.
Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

307

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

In this example, services from the base stations are allocated DSCP values based on service
types, and the OptiX RTN 310s allocate per-hop behaviors (PHBs) according to the DSCP
values. For details, see Table 8-102.
Table 8-102 PHBs and service types
PHB

DSCP

Service Type

CS7

56

CS6

48

EF

40

Real-time voice services


(R99 conversational and R99
streaming services) and
signaling

AF41

36

AF43

32

AF31

28

O&M and high-priority realtime HSDPA services (O&M


and HSPA streaming
services)

AF33

24

Low-priority real-time
HSDPA service (HSPA
streaming service)

AF21

20

High-priority non-real-time
R99 services (R99 interactive
and R99 background
services)

AF23

16

Low-priority non-real-time
R99 services (R99 interactive
and R99 background
services)

AF11

12

AF13

BE

HSDPA data services (HSPA


interactive and background
services)

NOTE

l CS7 or CS6 is not recommended, because CS7 or CS6 may be used to transmit Ethernet protocol packets
or inband data communication network (DCN) packets.
l The trusted packet type is not the C-VLAN priority but the DSCP value. Therefore, the trusted packet type
needs to be changed for service-associated Ethernet ports in the default DS domain.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

308

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Queue Scheduling Policy and Congestion Management Mode


Because the transmission rate of an Ethernet port is much higher than the volume of traffic,
congestion never occurs at an Ethernet port. Therefore, queue scheduling policy and congestion
management mode need to be planned only for microwave ports. Retain the default queue
scheduling policy and congestion management mode for an Ethernet port.
Table 8-103 and Table 8-104 list the queue scheduling policies and congestion management
modes for services of various priorities on microwave ports in this example.
Table 8-103 Queue scheduling policies
PHB

Queue Scheduling Policy

CS7

SP

CS6

SP

EF

SP

AF4

SP

AF3

SP

AF2

SP

AF1

SP

BE

SP

Table 8-104 Congestion management mode


PHB

Congestion
Management
Mode

WRED Configuration
Upper
Threshold
(bytes)

Lower
Threshold
(bytes)

Discard Ratio
(%)

CS7

Tail drop

CS6

Tail drop

EF

WRED

64 (green)

42 (green)

100

AF4

Tail drop

AF3

WRED

64 (green)

42 (green)

100

42 (red)

21 (red)

64 (green)

42 (green)

42 (red)

21 (red)

AF2

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

WRED

100

AF1

Tail drop

BE

WRED

64 (green)

42 (green)

100

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

309

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Service Flow Shaping


Generally, a microwave backhaul network does not perform shaping for service flows because
2G/3G base stations and RNCs have their own traffic control policies (BSC is short for base
station controller, and RNC for radio network controller).

Port Shaping
If the Ethernet bandwidth planned for the aggregation link is lower than the total bandwidth for
aggregation services, you can enable port shaping at the edge node to limit the Ethernet service
traffic sent to the convergence node. This prevents congestion at the convergence node.
In this example, you do not need to enable port shaping.

8.7.8.6 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection)


In this example, Ethernet protection is not used.

8.7.8.7 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Service Information)


This section describes the procedure for configuring service information.

Procedure
Step 1 Delete Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services. For details, see A.7.3.11 Deleting an ELAN Service.
Step 2 Create IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services. For details, see A.7.3.6 Creating an IEEE
802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service.
l Cross polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) links
Parameters of NE11, NE13 and NE14
This table provides parameter values for mounted ports.
Port
1-SHXA2-2
1-SHXA2-1

This table provides service parameter values.

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Parameter

Value

Service ID

Service Name

Qlan

Direction

C-Aware

L2 Protocol Control

Not Transparent

MAC Address Learning

Enabled

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

310

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

This table provides port parameter values


Parameter

1-SHXA2-2

1-SHXA2-1

Port Enable

Enabled

VLAN ID (e.g. 1,3-5)

100

100

Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

Encapsulation Type

802.1Q

802.1Q

Tag

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

l Non-XPIC links
Parameters of NE21 and NE24
This table provides parameter values for mounted ports.
Port
1-SHXA2-2
1-SHXA2-1

This table provides service parameter values.


Parameter

Value

Service ID

Service Name

Qlan

Direction

C-Aware

L2 Protocol Control

Not Transparent

MAC Address Learning

Enabled

This table provides port parameter values

Issue 02 (2012-12-30)

Parameter

1-SHXA2-2

1-SHXA2-1

Port Enable

Enabled

VLAN ID (e.g. 1,3-5)

200

200

Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

Encapsulation Type

802.1Q

802.1Q

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

311

OptiX RTN 310 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Parameter

1-SHXA2-2

1-SHXA2-1

Tag

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Parameters of NE22
This table provides parameter values for m